Installation Manual-Volume 1 PDF

Chapter 1 Safety Precautions .........................................................................
1-1
1.1 Overview ................................................................................................ 1-1
1.1.1 Symbol Explanation ....................................................................... 1-2
1.2 Toxic Hazardous Articles........................................................................ 1-3
1.2.1 Beryllium Oxide .............................................................................. 1-3
1.2.2 Hydrochloride ................................................................................. 1-4
1.2.3 Hydrofluoride .................................................................................. 1-4
1.3 Electrical Safety ...................................................................................... 1-5
1.3.1 High Voltage .................................................................................. 1-5
1.3.2 Power Cables and Grounding Cables ............................................ 1-5
1.3.3 Tools .............................................................................................. 1-7
1.3.4 Drilling ............................................................................................ 1-7
1.3.5 Thunderstorms ............................................................................... 1-8
1.3.6 Static Electricity.............................................................................. 1-8
1.3.7 Power Labels ................................................................................. 1-10
1.3.8 Current Leakage ............................................................................ 1-10
1.3.9 Flammable Air Environment ........................................................... 1-10
1.4 Fuse ....................................................................................................... 1-11
1.5 Laser ...................................................................................................... 1-12
1.5.1 General Laser Information ............................................................. 1-12
1.5.2 Laser Safety Guidelines ................................................................. 1-13
1.5.3 Handling Fibers .............................................................................. 1-14
1.6 High Temperature .................................................................................. 1-15
1.7 Fans ....................................................................................................... 1-15
1.8 Working at High Altitudes ....................................................................... 1-16
1.8.1 General Operations........................................................................ 1-16
1.8.2 Safety Codes for Using Ladders .................................................... 1-16
1.9 Other Items............................................................................................. 1-18
1.9.1 Hoisting of Heavy Objects .............................................................. 1-18
1.9.2 Handling of Heavy Objects ............................................................ 1-19
1.9.3 Sharp Edges .................................................................................. 1-20
1.9.4 Inserting & Pulling Out the Boards ................................................. 1-20
1.9.5 Bundling the Signal Cables ............................................................ 1-21
1.9.6 Maintenance and Commissioning by a Single Person Not
Allowed ................................................................................................... 1-21
Chapter 2 Overview ......................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Purpose .................................................................................................. 2-1
2.2 Hardware Installation Process ................................................................ 2-1
2.3 Caution ................................................................................................... 2-5
Chapter 3 Requirements for Equipment Building ........................................ 3-1
3.1 Introduction............................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 Site Selection of Equipment Room......................................................... 3-1
3.3 Layout of Equipment Rooms .................................................................. 3-2
3.3.1 SPC Switch Room and Control Room ........................................... 3-3
3.3.2 MDF Room and Transmission Equipment Room .......................... 3-4
3.3.3 Power Distribution Room and Storage Battery Room .................... 3-5
3.4 Architectural Requirements for Switch Room ......................................... 3-6
3.5 Requirements for Power Supply System of Equipment Building............ 3-11
3.5.1 Requirements for AC Power Supply System ................................. 3-12
3.5.2 Requirements for DC Power Supply System ................................. 3-12
3.5.3 Calculation of Current and Power Consumption ............................ 3-15
3.5.4 Feed System of C&C08 Switch...................................................... 3-20
3.6 Requirements for Lighting System of Equipment Building ..................... 3-20
3.7 Requirements for Water Supply and Drainage System of Equipment
Building......................................................................................................... 3-23
3.8 Requirements for Air Conditioning and Ventilation System of
Equipment Building ...................................................................................... 3-23
3.9 Requirements for Protection Systems .................................................... 3-26
3.9.1 ESD Prevention ............................................................................. 3-26
3.9.2 Anti-Interference ............................................................................ 3-28
3.9.3 Over-Voltage Protection ................................................................. 3-30
3.9.4 Fire Protection ................................................................................ 3-31
3.9.5 Quakeproof Protection ................................................................... 3-31
3.9.6 Lightning Protection ....................................................................... 3-32
Chapter 4 Specification for Equipment Grounding ...................................... 4-1
4.1 General Principles .................................................................................. 4-1
4.2 General Rules ........................................................................................ 4-1
4.3 Grounding of Switch ............................................................................... 4-1
4.4 Earth Resistance Value .......................................................................... 4-4
Chapter 5 Installation Preparation ................................................................. 5-1
5.1 Technical Documents for the Project ..................................................... 5-1
5.2 Tools and Instruments ............................................................................ 5-1
5.3 Inspection of Equipment Building ........................................................... 5-2
Chapter 6 Open Box Inspection (OBI) ........................................................... 6-1
6.1 Opening Requirements .......................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Opening .................................................................................................. 6-2
6.2.1 Wooden case ................................................................................. 6-2
6.2.2 Carton ............................................................................................ 6-4
Chapter 7 Installation of Assembled Cabinet ............................................... 7-1
7.1 Introduction to Assembled Cabinet ........................................................ 7-1
7.1.1 General Introduction ...................................................................... 7-1
7.1.2 Busbar ............................................................................................ 7-1
7.1.3 Frame............................................................................................. 7-2
7.1.4 Backplane ...................................................................................... 7-3
7.2 Installing Supports and Guide Rails ....................................................... 7-3
7.2.1 Introduction to Supports and Guide Rails ...................................... 7-3
7.2.2 Quantity Calculation of Supports and Guide Rails ......................... 7-5
7.2.3 Installation Flow ............................................................................. 7-7
7.2.4 Locating Supports .......................................................................... 7-7
7.2.5 Installing Supports ......................................................................... 7-11
7.2.6 Insulation Test for Support ............................................................. 7-12
7.2.7 Installing Guide Rails ..................................................................... 7-13
7.2.8 Installing Racks .............................................................................. 7-15
7.2.9 Installing Floor bracket and Cover Plate ........................................ 7-15
7.2.10 Insulation Test for Floor bracket .................................................. 7-16
7.2.11 Flooring ........................................................................................ 7-16
7.3 Installing Foot-Anchor Plate ................................................................... 7-16
7.3.1 Function of Foot-Anchor Plate ....................................................... 7-16
7.3.2 Components of Foot-Anchor Plate Assembly ................................ 7-16
7.3.3 Installing Foot-Anchor Plate Assembly .......................................... 7-17
7.4 Installing Assembled Racks ................................................................... 7-21
7.4.1 Connecting Structure of Assembled Racks ................................... 7-21
7.4.2 connecting Assembled Rack and Base or Foot ............................. 7-21
7.4.3 Connecting and Securing Assembled Racks and Guide Rails ...... 7-23
7.4.4 Connecting and Securing Adjacent Assembled Racks .................. 7-27
7.4.5 Installing Cabling Trough ............................................................... 7-30
7.4.6 Installing Rodent-Resistant Net ..................................................... 7-40
7.4.7 Installing Cabling Rack .................................................................. 7-40
7.4.8 Installing Shockproof and Securing Measures of Assembled
Racks ...................................................................................................... 7-60
7.4.9 Inter-Row Fixing of Assembled Racks ........................................... 7-61
7.5 Installing Door ........................................................................................ 7-63
7.5.1 Installing Upper Pulling-Plate, Middle Pulling-Plate and Lower
Pulling- Plate ........................................................................................... 7-63
7.5.2 Installing Upper Beam and Lower Beam ....................................... 7-65
7.5.3 Installing Front Top Cover and Back Top Cover ............................ 7-69
7.5.4 Installing Side Panels..................................................................... 7-70
7.5.5 Installing Row and Column Alarm Indicators ................................. 7-72
7.5.6 Installing Front Doors and Back Doors .......................................... 7-74
7.6 Installing Air Filter ................................................................................... 7-77
7.7 Labels ..................................................................................................... 7-79
7.8 Installation Completion Check ................................................................ 7-80
7.9 Installing Boards ..................................................................................... 7-81
7.9.1 Board Description .......................................................................... 7-81
7.9.2 Replacement of Board ................................................................... 7-83
7.10 Numbering Cabinet and Frame ............................................................ 7-85
Chapter 8 Installing BAM Cabinet .................................................................. 8-1
8.1 Introduction to BAM Cabinet .................................................................. 8-1
8.2 Installing Supports and Guide Rails ....................................................... 8-1
8.2.1 Introduction to Supports and Guide Rails ...................................... 8-1
8.2.2 Quantity Calculation of Supports and Guide Rails ......................... 8-3
8.2.3 Installation Flow ............................................................................. 8-4
8.2.4 Locating Supports .......................................................................... 8-4
8.2.5 Installing Supports ......................................................................... 8-5
8.2.6 Insulation Test for Support ............................................................. 8-7
8.2.7 Installing Guide Rails ..................................................................... 8-7
8.2.8 Installing BAM Racks ..................................................................... 8-8
8.2.9 Installing Floor Bracket .................................................................. 8-8
8.2.10 Insulation Test for Floor Bracket .................................................. 8-9
8.2.11 Flooring ........................................................................................ 8-10
8.3 Installing Foot-Anchor Plate ................................................................... 8-10
8.3.1 Function of Foot-Anchor Plate ....................................................... 8-10
8.3.2 Components of Foot-Anchor Plate Assembly ................................ 8-10
8.3.3 Installing Foot-Anchor Plate Assembly .......................................... 8-11
8.3.4 Connecting Feet and Cabinet ........................................................ 8-12
8.4 Installing BAM Racks ............................................................................. 8-13
8.4.1 Connecting and Securing BAM Racks and Guide Rails ................ 8-13
8.4.2 Installing Fixing Bar and Fixing Plate ............................................. 8-14
8.4.3 Installing Shockproof Parts ............................................................ 8-16
8.4.4 Installing Top Cover, Cover Plate and Barrier ............................... 8-16
8.5 Installing Internal Components of BAM Cabinet ..................................... 8-18
8.5.1 Installing Internal Components ...................................................... 8-19
8.5.2 Internal Cabling of BAM Cabinet .................................................... 8-19
8.6 Installing Doors....................................................................................... 8-29
8.6.1 Installing Side Panel ...................................................................... 8-29
8.6.2 Installing Front and Back Doors ..................................................... 8-29
8.7 Label ....................................................................................................... 8-30
Chapter 9 Installing Cables and Optical Fibers in the Cabinet ................... 9-1
9.1 Installing Cables in AM/CM .................................................................... 9-1
9.1.1 Types and Functions of Cables ..................................................... 9-1
9.1.2 Installing HDLC Signal Cables ....................................................... 9-1
9.1.3 Installing HW Signal Cables ........................................................... 9-22
9.1.4 Installing Clock Signal Cables ........................................................ 9-29
9.1.5 Installing Control Serial Port Cables of CKM Frame ...................... 9-34
9.1.6 Installing Emergency Serial Port Cables ........................................ 9-35
9.1.7 Installing Row and Column Alarm Indicator Control Cables .......... 9-41
9.1.8 Installing Fan Power Signal Cables ............................................... 9-41
9.1.9 Installing Secondary Power Alarm Cables ..................................... 9-42
9.1.10 Installing DT8K Reference Clock Cables ..................................... 9-42
9.1.11 Installing 2-Mbit/s Reference Clock Cables ................................. 9-42
9.1.12 Installing 2-MHz Reference Clock Cables ................................... 9-43
9.1.13 Installation Specifications for HW Cables and Clock Cables ....... 9-43
9.2 Installing Optical Fibers in AM/CM ......................................................... 9-44
9.2.1 Brief Introduction to Optical Fibers in AM/CM ................................ 9-44
9.2.2 Connecting Optical Fibers in AM/CM ............................................. 9-45
9.2.3 Identification Specifications for Optical Fibers in AM/CM .............. 9-48
9.2.4 Installation Specifications for Optical Fibers in AM/CM ................. 9-48
9.3 Installing Cables in SM ........................................................................... 9-50
9.3.1 Types and Functions of Cables ..................................................... 9-50
9.3.2 Installing HW Cables ...................................................................... 9-51
9.3.3 Installing NOD Cables .................................................................... 9-57
9.3.4 Installing Clock Cables ................................................................... 9-60
9.3.5 Installing Alarm Cables for Secondary Power Supply .................... 9-60
9.3.6 Installing Test Subscriber Cables .................................................. 9-61
9.3.7 Binding HW Cables and NOD Cables ............................................ 9-61
9.3.8 Check Points after Installing Cables in Cabinet ............................. 9-61
9.3.9 Connecting Internal Cables in 32-Channel Subscriber Frame ....... 9-62
9.4 Installing Cables on the BTU board ........................................................ 9-63
Chapter 10 Installing Optical Fibers and Cables between Modules ........... 10-1
10.1 Installing Inter-Module Optical Fibers (SM) .......................................... 10-1
10.2 Installing Inter-Module Cables (RSM and RSA) ................................... 10-5
10.3 Installing External BITS Clock Cables .................................................. 10-6
10.3.1 Installing 75 Ohm Coaxial Cables ................................................ 10-7
10.3.2 Installing 120 Ohm Twisted Pairs ................................................ 10-7
Chapter 11 Installing Subscriber Cables ....................................................... 11-1
11.1 16-Channel Subscriber Frame ............................................................. 11-1
11.1.1 Types of Subscriber Cables ......................................................... 11-1
11.1.2 Connecting Subscriber Cables .................................................... 11-10
11.2 32-Channel Subscriber Frame ............................................................. 11-10
11.3 User Sequence Numbers (USN) and User ID on Main Distribution
Frame ( MDF) ............................................................................................... 11-16
11.4 Meaning of Labels and Pasting Method ............................................... 11-18
11.5 Bundling Cables inside the Rack .......................................................... 11-19
11.5.1 Handling Excessive Subscriber Cables ....................................... 11-20
11.5.2 Bundling Specifications ................................................................ 11-21
11.5.3 Specifications for Cable Bundling ................................................ 11-22
11.5.4 Specifications for Cabling ............................................................ 11-23
11.5.5 Specifications for Downward Cabling .......................................... 11-23
11.5.6 Specifications for Cabling in Cabling Trench ............................... 11-24
11.5.7 Specifications for Upward Cabling (Welded Cabinet) .................. 11-25
11.6 Connecting Subscriber Cables with Terminal Block on MDF ............... 11-29
11.6.1 Clamping Connection of Cables .................................................. 11-31
11.6.2 Winding Connection of Cables ..................................................... 11-31
11.6.3 Installing MDF .............................................................................. 11-32
Chapter 12 Installing Trunk Cables ................................................................ 12-1
12.1 Overview .............................................................................................. 12-1
12.2 Installing Digital Trunk Cables in TSM ................................................. 12-1
12.2.1 Structure of Digital Trunk Cables ................................................. 12-1
12.2.2 Connecting 75 ohm Coaxial Cable .............................................. 12-2
12.2.3 Connecting 120 ohm Twisted Pairs ............................................. 12-4
12.3 Installing Digital Trunk Cables in SPM ................................................. 12-4
12.3.1 Structure of Digital Trunk Cables ................................................. 12-4
12.3.2 Distribution of ET16 Digital Trunk Cables .................................... 12-5
12.3.3 Connecting Trunk Cables ............................................................ 12-6
12.4 Meaning and Pasting of Labels ............................................................ 12-7
12.5 Bundling Digital Trunk Cables .............................................................. 12-7
12.5.1 Specifications for Cabling ............................................................ 12-7
12.5.2 Specifications for the Cabling in the Rack ................................... 12-8
12.5.3 Specifications for Cabling along Cabling Ladder (Trough) .......... 12-16
12.5.4 Specifications for Downward Cabling .......................................... 12-18
12.5.5 Specifications for Upward Cabling ............................................... 12-19
12.6 Connecting Digital Trunk Cables to Digital Distribution Frame(
DDF) ............................................................................................................. 12-20
12.7 Installing Analog Trunk Cables ............................................................. 12-21
Chapter 13 Installing Terminal System .......................................................... 13-1
13.1 Introduction to Terminal System ........................................................... 13-1
13.1.1 Terminal System Structure .......................................................... 13-1
13.1.2 Centralized Maintenance ............................................................. 13-2
13.2 Installing BAM System ......................................................................... 13-3
13.3 Installing Workstation ........................................................................... 13-3
13.4 Installing Terminal Network System ..................................................... 13-4
13.5 Installing Inverter .................................................................................. 13-10
Chapter 14 Installing the Alarm Box .............................................................. 14-1
14.1 Installing CC11 Alarm Box ................................................................... 14-1
14.1.1 Fixing the Alarm Box .................................................................... 14-1
14.1.2 Connecting Cables of Alarm Box ................................................. 14-2
14.1.3 Installing the Lock ........................................................................ 14-5
14.2 Installing the GM12 Alarm Box ............................................................. 14-6
14.2.1 Fixing the Alarm Box .................................................................... 14-6
14.2.2 Connecting Cables of Alarm Box ................................................. 14-7
14.2.3 Setting Sound Volume of the Alarm Box ...................................... 14-12
14.2.4 Installing the Lock ........................................................................ 14-13
Chapter 15 Installing Grounding Cable and Power Cable ........................... 15-1
15.1 Grounding Requirements of C&C08 Switch ......................................... 15-1
15.1.1 DC Power Supply and Grounding Cable Connection .................. 15-1
15.1.2 Grounding of AC Power Distribution System ............................... 15-2
15.2 Installing Power Cable .......................................................................... 15-3
15.2.1 Details of Connecting Terminals of Power Distribution Box......... 15-3
15.2.2 Connecting Power Cable ............................................................. 15-4
15.2.3 Labels of Power Cables ............................................................... 15-10
15.2.4 Laying Power Cables ................................................................... 15-11
15.3 Installing Power Distribution Box .......................................................... 15-13
15.3.1 Installing the power distribution box ............................................. 15-13
15.3.2 Connecting power cables ............................................................. 15-16
15.3.3 Pasting labels ............................................................................... 15-16
Chapter 16 Hardware Installation Check ....................................................... 16-1
16.1 Overall Check ....................................................................................... 16-1
16.2 Power Supply Check ............................................................................ 16-3
16.3 Power-on Test of Boards ...................................................................... 16-3
Appendix A Labels for Cables ........................................................................ A-1
A.1 Introduction to Labels ............................................................................. A-1
A.1.1 Material .......................................................................................... A-1
A.1.2 Type and Shape ............................................................................ A-1
A.1.3 Printing Labels ............................................................................... A-3
A.1.4 Writing Labels ................................................................................ A-5
A.1.5 Pasting Labels ............................................................................... A-5
A.1.6 Information on Labels .................................................................... A-8
A.1.7 Remarks ........................................................................................ A-9
A.2 Labels for External Cables of Alarm Box ............................................... A-9
A.3 Labels for Ethernet Cables .................................................................... A-10
A.4 Labels for Optical Fibers ........................................................................ A-11
A.4.1 Labels for the Fiber that Connects Two Devices ........................... A-12
A.4.2 Labels for the Fiber that Connects a Device and the ODF ............ A-13
A.5 Labels for Trunk Cables ......................................................................... A-14
A.5.1 Labels for the Trunk Cable that Connects Two Devices ............... A-14
A.5.2 Labels for the Trunk Cable that Connects a Device and the
DDF......................................................................................................... A-15
A.6 Labels for Subscriber Cables ................................................................. A-16
A.7 Labels for Power Cables ........................................................................ A-18
A.7.1 Labels for DC Power Cables ......................................................... A-18
A.7.2 Labels for AC Power Cables ......................................................... A-19
Appendix B ESM Installation .......................................................................... B-1
B.1 Configuration.......................................................................................... B-1
B.2 Connecting Cables in ESM .................................................................... B-6
B.3 Connecting Cables between the ESM and AM/CM ............................... B-17
Appendix C Installing Container-Type Switch Room ................................... C-1
C.1 About Container-Type Switch Room ..................................................... C-1
C.2 Installation Flow ..................................................................................... C-2
C.3 Making Preparations .............................................................................. C-2
C.3.1 Checking Installation Environment ................................................ C-2
C.3.2 Preparing Technical Documents ................................................... C-3
C.3.3 Preparing Tools and Instruments .................................................. C-3
C.4 Installing the Container .......................................................................... C-5
C.4.1 Fixing Positions ............................................................................. C-5
C.4.2 Drilling Holes ................................................................................. C-6
C.4.3 Installing Bases ............................................................................. C-6
C.4.4 Placing the Container .................................................................... C-7
C.4.5 Fixing the Container ...................................................................... C-8
C.5 Installing Equipment .............................................................................. C-9
C.5.1 Installing BAM Components .......................................................... C-9
C.5.2 Installing Storage Batteries ........................................................... C-9
C.6 Installing Power Cables, Signal Cables, and Grounding System .......... C-10
C.6.1 Cable Layout and Running Principles ........................................... C-10
C.6.2 Installation Flow ............................................................................. C-12
C.6.3 Cable Label ................................................................................... C-12
C.6.4 Power Distribution Cabinet ............................................................ C-12
C.6.5 Installing Power Cables of Individual Equipment .......................... C-14
C.6.6 Installing Input Power Cables of AC Distribution Cabinet ............. C-18
C.7 Checking Installation.............................................................................. C-19
C.7.1 Checking Totally ............................................................................ C-19
C.7.2 Checking Power Supplies ............................................................. C-20
C.8 Transportation of Container-Type Switch Room.................................... C-20
C.9 Switch Box in the Container Passage .................................................... C-21
Index .................................................................................................................
HUAWEI
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System

Installation Manual- Volume 1
OVSV610R103
Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Installation Manual
Volume 1
Manual Version T2-010417-20050430-C-4.12
Product Version OVSV610R103
BOM 31040417
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support
and service. Please feel free to contact our local office or company headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.,
Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China
Postal Code: 518129
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: [email protected]

Copyright © 2005 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved
No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any

means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks
, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET, , ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC,

TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium, M900/M1800,
TELESIGHT, Quidview, Musa, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia, VRP, DOPRA,
iTELLIN, HUAWEI OptiX, C&C08 iNET, NETENGINE, OptiX, iSite, U-SYS, iMUSE,
OpenEye, Lansway, SmartAX, infoX, and TopEng are trademarks of Huawei
Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this manual are the property of
their respective holders.
Notice
The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every effort has
been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure accuracy of the contents,
but all statements, information, and recommendations in this manual do not
constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

About This Manual
Release Notes
The product version that corresponds to the manual is C&C08 Digital SPC Switching
System OVSV610R103.
Related Manuals
The following manuals provide more information about the C&C08 Digital SPC
Switching System.
Manual Content
It consists of two volumes. The Troubleshooting
Volume details on how to locate and process
common faults in the C&C08 Digital SPC
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching
Switching System, while the Routine
System Maintenance Manual
Maintenance Volume offers operational methods
and maintenance suggestions for routine
maintenance and special maintenance.
It offers an overall introduction to the C&C08

C&C08 Digital SPC Switching Digital SPC Switching System, including the
System Technical Manual system structure, hardware functions, software
functions, services and applications.
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching It is used for assisting the users in data
System Operation Manual configurations and typical applications.
It provides information for the system installation,
including the installation of the cabinets, cables,
System Installation Manual
power system and various boards.
It introduces almost all the boards available in the

C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System. For each
board, it describes its functions, features,
System Board Manual
interface signal, functional principle and technical
Indexes.
Organization
The manual introduces the hardware installation of the C&C08 Digital SPC Switching
System.

There are fifteen chapters and one appendix in the manual.
Chapter 1 Safety Precautions covers the safety precautions to be observed during

the installation, maintenance, and the related operation of Huawei-developed network
equipment.
Chapter 2 Overview profiles the standardized installation process of the C&C08 SPC
Switching System.
Chapter 3 Requirements for Equipment Building specifies the requirements for

the building, structure, heating, ventilation, power supply, lighting and fire protection
of the equipment room.
Chapter 4 Specification for Equipment Grounding covers the specifications for

the grounding of the C&C08 SPC Switching System.
Chapter 5 Installation Preparation offers the preparation work before the

installation.
Chapter 6 Open Box Inspection introduces how to unpack and inspect the
equipment.
Chapter 7 Installation of Assembled Cabinet elaborates on the procedures for

installing the assembled cabinets in the equipment room.
Chapter 8 Installation of BAM Cabinet presents the procedures for installing the
BAM cabinet in the equipment room.
Chapter 9 Setting of Cables and Optical Fibers in the Cabinet describes the
setting of different kinds of cables and fiber optic in the cabinets.
Chapter 10 Setting of Optical Fibers and Cables between Modules covers how to
connect the fiber optic and cables between modules.
Chapter 11 Setting of Subscriber Cables focuses on the methods of connecting

and binding the subscriber cables.
Chapter 12 Setting of Trunk Cables describes the methods of installing the digital
and analog trunk cables between the C&C08 switch and other offices.
Chapter 13 Installation of Terminal System presents the procedures of installing

the terminal system of the C&C08 switch.
Chapter 14 Installation of Alarm Box describes how to install the alarm box.
Chapter 15 Connection of Grounding Cable and Power Cable specifies how to

connect the ground cables and power cables of the C&C08 switch.

Chapter 16 Hardware Installation Check offers an overall checkup of the previous
installation and powering on the boards on a trial basis in order to prepare for the
overall software debugging.
Appendix A Labels for Cables introduces the engineering labels of all kinds of
cables.
Appendix B ESM Installation covers the installation of the Enhanced Switching

Module (ESM).
Appendix C Installing Container-Type Switch Room covers how to install the

container-type switch room.
Intended Audience
The manual is intended for the following readers:
• Marketing staff
• Installation engineers & technicians
• Operation & maintenance personnel
Conventions
The manual uses the following conventions:
I. General conventions
Convention Description
Arial Normal paragraphs are in Arial.
Boldface Headings are in Boldface.

Courier New Terminal Display is in Courier New.
II. Symbols
Eye-catching symbols are also used in the manual to highlight the points worthy of
special attention during the operation. They are defined as follows:
Caution, Warning, Danger: Means reader be extremely careful during the

operation.
Note, Comment, Tip, Knowhow, Thought: Means a complementary

description.

Environmental Protection
This product has been designed to comply with the requirements on environmental
protection. For the proper storage, use and disposal of this product, national laws and
regulations must be observed.

Installation Manual - Volume 1
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Safety Precautions ...................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 1-1
1.1.1 Symbol Explanation ................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 Toxic Hazardous Articles ................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.1 Beryllium Oxide ....................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.2 Hydrochloride .......................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.3 Hydrofluoride ........................................................................................................... 1-4
1.3 Electrical Safety ................................................................................................................. 1-5
1.3.1 High Voltage............................................................................................................ 1-5
1.3.2 Power Cables and Grounding Cables..................................................................... 1-5
1.3.3 Tools........................................................................................................................ 1-7
1.3.4 Drilling ..................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.3.5 Thunderstorms ........................................................................................................ 1-8
1.3.6 Static Electricity ....................................................................................................... 1-8
1.3.7 Power Labels......................................................................................................... 1-10
1.3.8 Current Leakage.................................................................................................... 1-10
1.3.9 Flammable Air Environment.................................................................................. 1-10
1.4 Fuse ................................................................................................................................. 1-11
1.5 Laser ................................................................................................................................ 1-12
1.5.1 General Laser Information .................................................................................... 1-12
1.5.2 Laser Safety Guidelines ........................................................................................ 1-13
1.5.3 Handling Fibers ..................................................................................................... 1-14
1.6 High Temperature ............................................................................................................ 1-15
1.7 Fans ................................................................................................................................. 1-15
1.8 Working at High Altitudes ................................................................................................ 1-16
1.8.1 General Operations............................................................................................... 1-16
1.8.2 Safety Codes for Using Ladders ........................................................................... 1-16
1.9 Other Items ...................................................................................................................... 1-18
1.9.1 Hoisting of Heavy Objects..................................................................................... 1-18
1.9.2 Handling of Heavy Objects.................................................................................... 1-19
1.9.3 Sharp Edges.......................................................................................................... 1-20
1.9.4 Inserting & Pulling Out the Boards ........................................................................ 1-20
1.9.5 Bundling the Signal Cables ................................................................................... 1-21
1.9.6 Maintenance and Commissioning by a Single Person Not Allowed ..................... 1-21
Chapter 2 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1 Purpose.............................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.2 Hardware Installation Process ........................................................................................... 2-1
i
2.3 Caution............................................................................................................................... 2-5
Chapter 3 Requirements for Equipment Building...................................................................... 3-1

3.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.2 Site Selection of Equipment Room .................................................................................... 3-1
3.3 Layout of Equipment Rooms ............................................................................................. 3-2
3.3.1 SPC Switch Room and Control Room .................................................................... 3-3
3.3.2 MDF Room and Transmission Equipment Room ................................................... 3-4
3.3.3 Power Distribution Room and Storage Battery Room............................................. 3-5
3.4 Architectural Requirements for Switch Room.................................................................... 3-6
3.5 Requirements for Power Supply System of Equipment Building..................................... 3-11
3.5.1 Requirements for AC Power Supply System ........................................................ 3-12
3.5.2 Requirements for DC Power Supply System ........................................................ 3-12
3.5.3 Calculation of Current and Power Consumption................................................... 3-15
3.5.4 Feed System of C&C08 Switch............................................................................. 3-20
3.6 Requirements for Lighting System of Equipment Building .............................................. 3-20
3.7 Requirements for Water Supply and Drainage System of Equipment Building .............. 3-23
3.8 Requirements for Air Conditioning and Ventilation System of Equipment Building ........ 3-23
3.9 Requirements for Protection Systems ............................................................................. 3-26
3.9.1 ESD Prevention..................................................................................................... 3-26
3.9.2 Anti-Interference.................................................................................................... 3-28
3.9.3 Over-Voltage Protection........................................................................................ 3-30
3.9.4 Fire Protection ....................................................................................................... 3-31
3.9.5 Quakeproof Protection .......................................................................................... 3-31
3.9.6 Lightning Protection .............................................................................................. 3-32
Chapter 4 Specification for Equipment Grounding ................................................................... 4-1

4.1 General Principles.............................................................................................................. 4-1
4.2 General Rules .................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.3 Grounding of Switch .......................................................................................................... 4-1
4.4 Earth Resistance Value ..................................................................................................... 4-4
Chapter 5 Installation Preparation............................................................................................... 5-1

5.1 Technical Documents for the Project................................................................................. 5-1
5.2 Tools and Instruments ....................................................................................................... 5-1
5.3 Inspection of Equipment Building ...................................................................................... 5-2
Chapter 6 Open Box Inspection (OBI) ......................................................................................... 6-1

6.1 Opening Requirements...................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Opening ............................................................................................................................. 6-2
6.2.1 Wooden case .......................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.2 Carton...................................................................................................................... 6-4
Chapter 7 Installation of Assembled Cabinet............................................................................. 7-1

7.1 Introduction to Assembled Cabinet.................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.1 General Introduction................................................................................................ 7-1
ii
7.1.2 Busbar ..................................................................................................................... 7-1

7.1.3 Frame ...................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.4 Backplane................................................................................................................ 7-3
7.2 Installing Supports and Guide Rails................................................................................... 7-3
7.2.1 Introduction to Supports and Guide Rails ............................................................... 7-3
7.2.2 Quantity Calculation of Supports and Guide Rails.................................................. 7-5
7.2.3 Installation Flow....................................................................................................... 7-7
7.2.4 Locating Supports ................................................................................................... 7-7
7.2.5 Installing Supports................................................................................................. 7-11
7.2.6 Insulation Test for Support .................................................................................... 7-12
7.2.7 Installing Guide Rails ............................................................................................ 7-13
7.2.8 Installing Racks ..................................................................................................... 7-15
7.2.9 Installing Floor bracket and Cover Plate ............................................................... 7-15
7.2.10 Insulation Test for Floor bracket.......................................................................... 7-16
7.2.11 Flooring ............................................................................................................... 7-16
7.3 Installing Foot-Anchor Plate............................................................................................. 7-16
7.3.1 Function of Foot-Anchor Plate .............................................................................. 7-16
7.3.2 Components of Foot-Anchor Plate Assembly ....................................................... 7-16
7.3.3 Installing Foot-Anchor Plate Assembly ................................................................. 7-17
7.4 Installing Assembled Racks............................................................................................. 7-21
7.4.1 Connecting Structure of Assembled Racks .......................................................... 7-21
7.4.2 connecting Assembled Rack and Base or Foot .................................................... 7-21
7.4.3 Connecting and Securing Assembled Racks and Guide Rails ............................. 7-23
7.4.4 Connecting and Securing Adjacent Assembled Racks......................................... 7-27
7.4.5 Installing Cabling Trough ...................................................................................... 7-30
7.4.6 Installing Rodent-Resistant Net............................................................................. 7-40
7.4.7 Installing Cabling Rack.......................................................................................... 7-40
7.4.8 Installing Shockproof and Securing Measures of Assembled Racks.................... 7-60
7.4.9 Inter-Row Fixing of Assembled Racks .................................................................. 7-61
7.5 Installing Door .................................................................................................................. 7-63
7.5.1 Installing Upper Pulling-Plate, Middle Pulling-Plate and Lower Pulling-Plate....... 7-63
7.5.2 Installing Upper Beam and Lower Beam .............................................................. 7-65
7.5.3 Installing Front Top Cover and Back Top Cover................................................... 7-69
7.5.4 Installing Side Panels............................................................................................ 7-70
7.5.5 Installing Row and Column Alarm Indicators ........................................................ 7-72
7.5.6 Installing Front Doors and Back Doors ................................................................. 7-74
7.6 Installing Air Filter ............................................................................................................ 7-77
7.7 Labels .............................................................................................................................. 7-79
7.8 Installation Completion Check ......................................................................................... 7-80
7.9 Installing Boards .............................................................................................................. 7-81
7.9.1 Board Description.................................................................................................. 7-81
7.9.2 Replacement of Board .......................................................................................... 7-83
iii
7.10 Numbering Cabinet and Frame ..................................................................................... 7-85
Chapter 8 Installing BAM Cabinet................................................................................................ 8-1

8.1 Introduction to BAM Cabinet.............................................................................................. 8-1
8.2 Installing Supports and Guide Rails................................................................................... 8-1
8.2.1 Introduction to Supports and Guide Rails ............................................................... 8-1
8.2.2 Quantity Calculation of Supports and Guide Rails.................................................. 8-3
8.2.3 Installation Flow....................................................................................................... 8-4
8.2.4 Locating Supports ................................................................................................... 8-4
8.2.5 Installing Supports................................................................................................... 8-5
8.2.6 Insulation Test for Support ...................................................................................... 8-7
8.2.7 Installing Guide Rails .............................................................................................. 8-7
8.2.8 Installing BAM Racks .............................................................................................. 8-8
8.2.9 Installing Floor Bracket............................................................................................ 8-8
8.2.10 Insulation Test for Floor Bracket ........................................................................... 8-9
8.2.11 Flooring ............................................................................................................... 8-10
8.3 Installing Foot-Anchor Plate............................................................................................. 8-10
8.3.1 Function of Foot-Anchor Plate .............................................................................. 8-10
8.3.2 Components of Foot-Anchor Plate Assembly ....................................................... 8-10
8.3.3 Installing Foot-Anchor Plate Assembly ................................................................. 8-11
8.3.4 Connecting Feet and Cabinet ............................................................................... 8-12
8.4 Installing BAM Racks....................................................................................................... 8-13
8.4.1 Connecting and Securing BAM Racks and Guide Rails ....................................... 8-13
8.4.2 Installing Fixing Bar and Fixing Plate .................................................................... 8-14
8.4.3 Installing Shockproof Parts ................................................................................... 8-16
8.4.4 Installing Top Cover, Cover Plate and Barrier ...................................................... 8-16
8.5 Installing Internal Components of BAM Cabinet.............................................................. 8-18
8.5.1 Installing Internal Components.............................................................................. 8-19
8.5.2 Internal Cabling of BAM Cabinet........................................................................... 8-19
8.6 Installing Doors ................................................................................................................ 8-29
8.6.1 Installing Side Panel.............................................................................................. 8-29
8.6.2 Installing Front and Back Doors ............................................................................ 8-29
8.7 Label ................................................................................................................................ 8-30
Chapter 9 Installing Cables and Optical Fibers in the Cabinet................................................. 9-1

9.1 Installing Cables in AM/CM................................................................................................ 9-1
9.1.1 Types and Functions of Cables............................................................................... 9-1
9.1.2 Installing HDLC Signal Cables ................................................................................ 9-1
9.1.3 Installing HW Signal Cables.................................................................................. 9-22
9.1.4 Installing Clock Signal Cables............................................................................... 9-29
9.1.5 Installing Control Serial Port Cables of CKM Frame............................................. 9-34
9.1.6 Installing Emergency Serial Port Cables............................................................... 9-35
9.1.7 Installing Row and Column Alarm Indicator Control Cables ................................. 9-41
9.1.8 Installing Fan Power Signal Cables ...................................................................... 9-41
iv
9.1.9 Installing Secondary Power Alarm Cables............................................................ 9-42

9.1.10 Installing DT8K Reference Clock Cables............................................................ 9-42
9.1.11 Installing 2-Mbit/s Reference Clock Cables ........................................................ 9-42
9.1.12 Installing 2-MHz Reference Clock Cables .......................................................... 9-43
9.1.13 Installation Specifications for HW Cables and Clock Cables.............................. 9-43
9.2 Installing Optical Fibers in AM/CM................................................................................... 9-44
9.2.1 Brief Introduction to Optical Fibers in AM/CM....................................................... 9-44
9.2.2 Connecting Optical Fibers in AM/CM .................................................................... 9-45
9.2.3 Identification Specifications for Optical Fibers in AM/CM ..................................... 9-48
9.2.4 Installation Specifications for Optical Fibers in AM/CM ........................................ 9-48
9.3 Installing Cables in SM .................................................................................................... 9-50
9.3.1 Types and Functions of Cables............................................................................. 9-50
9.3.2 Installing HW Cables............................................................................................. 9-51
9.3.3 Installing NOD Cables........................................................................................... 9-57
9.3.4 Installing Clock Cables.......................................................................................... 9-60
9.3.5 Installing Alarm Cables for Secondary Power Supply........................................... 9-60
9.3.6 Installing Test Subscriber Cables.......................................................................... 9-61
9.3.7 Binding HW Cables and NOD Cables................................................................... 9-61
9.3.8 Check Points after Installing Cables in Cabinet .................................................... 9-61
9.3.9 Connecting Internal Cables in 32-Channel Subscriber Frame ............................. 9-62
9.4 Installing Cables on the BTU board ................................................................................. 9-63
Chapter 10 Installing Optical Fibers and Cables between Modules ...................................... 10-1
10.1 Installing Inter-Module Optical Fibers (SM) ................................................................... 10-1
10.2 Installing Inter-Module Cables (RSM and RSA) ............................................................ 10-5
10.3 Installing External BITS Clock Cables ........................................................................... 10-6
10.3.1 Installing 75 Ohm Coaxial Cables ....................................................................... 10-7
10.3.2 Installing 120 Ohm Twisted Pairs........................................................................ 10-7
Chapter 11 Installing Subscriber Cables .................................................................................. 11-1

11.1 16-Channel Subscriber Frame....................................................................................... 11-1
11.1.1 Types of Subscriber Cables ................................................................................ 11-1
11.1.2 Connecting Subscriber Cables.......................................................................... 11-10
11.2 32-Channel Subscriber Frame..................................................................................... 11-10
11.3 User Sequence Numbers (USN) and User ID on Main Distribution Frame (MDF) ..... 11-16
11.4 Meaning of Labels and Pasting Method ...................................................................... 11-18
11.5 Bundling Cables inside the Rack ................................................................................. 11-19
11.5.1 Handling Excessive Subscriber Cables ............................................................ 11-20
11.5.2 Bundling Specifications ..................................................................................... 11-21
11.5.3 Specifications for Cable Bundling ..................................................................... 11-22
11.5.4 Specifications for Cabling.................................................................................. 11-23
11.5.5 Specifications for Downward Cabling ............................................................... 11-23
11.5.6 Specifications for Cabling in Cabling Trench .................................................... 11-24
11.5.7 Specifications for Upward Cabling (Welded Cabinet) ....................................... 11-25
v
11.6 Connecting Subscriber Cables with Terminal Block on MDF...................................... 11-29

11.6.1 Clamping Connection of Cables........................................................................ 11-31
11.6.2 Winding Connection of Cables.......................................................................... 11-31
11.6.3 Installing MDF ................................................................................................... 11-32
Chapter 12 Installing Trunk Cables ........................................................................................... 12-1

12.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 12-1
12.2 Installing Digital Trunk Cables in TSM........................................................................... 12-1
12.2.1 Structure of Digital Trunk Cables ........................................................................ 12-1
12.2.2 Connecting 75 ohm Coaxial Cable ..................................................................... 12-2
12.2.3 Connecting 120 ohm Twisted Pairs .................................................................... 12-4
12.3 Installing Digital Trunk Cables in SPM .......................................................................... 12-4
12.3.1 Structure of Digital Trunk Cables ........................................................................ 12-4
12.3.2 Distribution of ET16 Digital Trunk Cables ........................................................... 12-5
12.3.3 Connecting Trunk Cables.................................................................................... 12-6
12.4 Meaning and Pasting of Labels ..................................................................................... 12-7
12.5 Bundling Digital Trunk Cables ....................................................................................... 12-7
12.5.1 Specifications for Cabling.................................................................................... 12-7
12.5.2 Specifications for the Cabling in the Rack .......................................................... 12-8
12.5.3 Specifications for Cabling along Cabling Ladder (Trough) ............................... 12-16
12.5.4 Specifications for Downward Cabling ............................................................... 12-18
12.5.5 Specifications for Upward Cabling .................................................................... 12-19
12.6 Connecting Digital Trunk Cables to Digital Distribution Frame(DDF).......................... 12-20
12.7 Installing Analog Trunk Cables .................................................................................... 12-21
Chapter 13 Installing Terminal System ..................................................................................... 13-1

13.1 Introduction to Terminal System .................................................................................... 13-1
13.1.1 Terminal System Structure.................................................................................. 13-1
13.1.2 Centralized Maintenance .................................................................................... 13-2
13.2 Installing BAM System................................................................................................... 13-3
13.3 Installing Workstation..................................................................................................... 13-3
13.4 Installing Terminal Network System .............................................................................. 13-4
13.5 Installing Inverter ......................................................................................................... 13-10
Chapter 14 Installing the Alarm Box.......................................................................................... 14-1

14.1 Installing CC11 Alarm Box............................................................................................. 14-1
14.1.1 Fixing the Alarm Box ........................................................................................... 14-1
14.1.2 Connecting Cables of Alarm Box ........................................................................ 14-2
14.1.3 Installing the Lock ............................................................................................... 14-5
14.2 Installing the GM12 Alarm Box ...................................................................................... 14-6
14.2.1 Fixing the Alarm Box ........................................................................................... 14-6
14.2.2 Connecting Cables of Alarm Box ........................................................................ 14-7
14.2.3 Setting Sound Volume of the Alarm Box........................................................... 14-12
14.2.4 Installing the Lock ............................................................................................. 14-13
vi
Chapter 15 Installing Grounding Cable and Power Cable....................................................... 15-1

15.1 Grounding Requirements of C&C08 Switch .................................................................. 15-1
15.1.1 DC Power Supply and Grounding Cable Connection ......................................... 15-1
15.1.2 Grounding of AC Power Distribution System ...................................................... 15-2
15.2 Installing Power Cable ................................................................................................... 15-3
15.2.1 Details of Connecting Terminals of Power Distribution Box ............................... 15-3
15.2.2 Connecting Power Cable .................................................................................... 15-4
15.2.3 Labels of Power Cables .................................................................................... 15-10
15.2.4 Laying Power Cables ........................................................................................ 15-11
15.3 Installing Power Distribution Box ................................................................................. 15-13
15.3.1 Installing the power distribution box.................................................................. 15-13
15.3.2 Connecting power cables.................................................................................. 15-16
15.3.3 Pasting labels .................................................................................................... 15-16
Chapter 16 Hardware Installation Check .................................................................................. 16-1

16.1 Overall Check ................................................................................................................ 16-1
16.2 Power Supply Check ..................................................................................................... 16-3
16.3 Power-on Test of Boards ............................................................................................... 16-3
Appendix A Labels for Cables .....................................................................................................A-1

A.1 Introduction to Labels ........................................................................................................A-1
A.1.1 Material ...................................................................................................................A-1
A.1.2 Type and Shape......................................................................................................A-1
A.1.3 Printing Labels ........................................................................................................A-3
A.1.4 Writing Labels .........................................................................................................A-5
A.1.5 Pasting Labels ........................................................................................................A-5
A.1.6 Information on Labels .............................................................................................A-8
A.1.7 Remarks..................................................................................................................A-9
A.2 Labels for External Cables of Alarm Box ..........................................................................A-9
A.3 Labels for Ethernet Cables..............................................................................................A-10
A.4 Labels for Optical Fibers .................................................................................................A-11
A.4.1 Labels for the Fiber that Connects Two Devices..................................................A-12
A.4.2 Labels for the Fiber that Connects a Device and the ODF...................................A-13
A.5 Labels for Trunk Cables ..................................................................................................A-14
A.5.1 Labels for the Trunk Cable that Connects Two Devices ......................................A-14
A.5.2 Labels for the Trunk Cable that Connects a Device and the DDF .......................A-15
A.6 Labels for Subscriber Cables ..........................................................................................A-16
A.7 Labels for Power Cables .................................................................................................A-18
A.7.1 Labels for DC Power Cables ................................................................................A-18
A.7.2 Labels for AC Power Cables.................................................................................A-19
Appendix B ESM Installation........................................................................................................B-1

B.1 Configuration .....................................................................................................................B-1
B.2 Connecting Cables in ESM ...............................................................................................B-6
vii
B.3 Connecting Cables between the ESM and AM/CM ........................................................B-17
Appendix C Installing Container-Type Switch Room ................................................................C-1

C.1 About Container-Type Switch Room.................................................................................C-1
C.2 Installation Flow.................................................................................................................C-2
C.3 Making Preparations .........................................................................................................C-2
C.3.1 Checking Installation Environment .........................................................................C-2
C.3.2 Preparing Technical Documents ............................................................................C-3
C.3.3 Preparing Tools and Instruments ...........................................................................C-3
C.4 Installing the Container .....................................................................................................C-5
C.4.1 Fixing Positions.......................................................................................................C-5
C.4.2 Drilling Holes...........................................................................................................C-6
C.4.3 Installing Bases.......................................................................................................C-6
C.4.4 Placing the Container .............................................................................................C-7
C.4.5 Fixing the Container ...............................................................................................C-8
C.5 Installing Equipment..........................................................................................................C-9
C.5.1 Installing BAM Components ...................................................................................C-9
C.5.2 Installing Storage Batteries.....................................................................................C-9
C.6 Installing Power Cables, Signal Cables, and Grounding System ...................................C-10
C.6.1 Cable Layout and Running Principles ..................................................................C-10
C.6.2 Installation Flow ....................................................................................................C-12
C.6.3 Cable Label...........................................................................................................C-12
C.6.4 Power Distribution Cabinet ...................................................................................C-12
C.6.5 Installing Power Cables of Individual Equipment .................................................C-14
C.6.6 Installing Input Power Cables of AC Distribution Cabinet ....................................C-18
C.7 Checking Installation .......................................................................................................C-19
C.7.1 Checking Totally ...................................................................................................C-19
C.7.2 Checking Power Supplies.....................................................................................C-20
C.8 Transportation of Container-Type Switch Room.............................................................C-20
C.9 Switch Box in the Container Passage .............................................................................C-21
Index ................................................................................................................................................ i-1
viii
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 Safety Precautions
Chapter 1 Safety Precautions
1.1 Overview
This section covers the safety precautions to be observed during the installation,
maintenance, and the related operation of Huawei-developed network equipment.
Caution:
Before any operation, please carefully go through the instructions about the operations
and precautions so as to avoid accidents. The signs such as “Caution”, “Attention”,
“Warning” and “Danger” in the manuals are merely the supplements to safety
precautions during operations that have to be followed. It is not necessary to observe
all the safety precautions for each operation. Therefore, personnel engaged in the
installation and maintenance of Huawei-developed products should have a basic
knowledge of safe operations, undergo relevant training and be qualified for respective
operation.
Please abide by the local safety regulations during the operation. The safety
precautions in this manual serve only as supplements to the local safety regulations.
When operating any Huawei-developed products/equipment, please strictly abide by

the precautionary measures and specific safety instructions related to the equipment
provided by Huawei. The safety warnings listed in this manual show only the
precautionary points that Huawei personnel are aware of. Huawei does not bear any
consequence resulting from the violation of any universal regulations for safe
operations, or violation of the safety codes during the design, production and usage of
the equipment.
The personnel responsible for the installation and maintenance of Huawei-developed

products should undergo strict training, know thoroughly the correct methods of
operation and get acquainted with various safety precautions before performing any
operation such as equipment installation and maintenance.
1-1
1.1.1 Symbol Explanation
The signs in this manual, such as the warning signs in the following table, are intended
to remind readers of the safety precautions that are to be observed during installation
and maintenance.
Safety prompts are divided into four levels: Danger, Warning, Attention and Caution.
The format is shown in the following: The text note of the safety level is indicated to the
right of the symbol and the detailed explanation of the safety precaution is shown below
the symbol.
Danger:
Indicates that casualties or serious accident may occur if this safety instruction is
ignored.
Warning:
Indicates that serious or major injuries may occur or the equipment may get damaged if
this safety instruction is ignored.
Attention:
Indicates that major injuries may occur or the equipment may get damaged if this safety
instruction is ignored.
Caution:
Indicates that injuries may occur or the equipment may get damaged if this safety
instruction is ignored.
The types and meanings of safety signs are shown in the Table 1-1.
1-2
Table 1-1 Types and meanings of safety signs
Safety symbol Meaning
Common warning symbol: Indicates general safety precautions.
Anti-static symbol: Indicates that the equipment is sensitive to

static electricity.
Live-line symbol: Indicates dangerous voltage.
Microwave symbol: Indicates powerful electromagnetic field.
Laser symbol: Indicates powerful laser beam.
Scald symbol: Indicates that the equipment surface with high

temperature, which might cause scald or burns on the personnel.
Upon this warning, people should not touch the surface, so as to
avoid any scald or burn.
1.2 Toxic Hazardous Articles
1.2.1 Beryllium Oxide
Warning:
Some components of the equipment carry toxic beryllium oxide and are used because
it is unavoidable.
When the components carrying beryllium oxide are damaged the beryllium oxide may
cause harm to the human body. The personnel who come in contact or handle such
components should be aware of their peculiarity and should take the required
preventive measures before handling them.
The components carrying beryllium oxide should not be discarded freely. To dispose of
the component, the personnel should make necessary chemical treatment or special
waste processing in accordance with the related local regulations.
1-3
1.2.2 Hydrochloride
Warning:
Some components of the equipment carrying hydrochloride are used as it is

unavoidable. Toxic gases will be generated by these components when burned.
Preventive measures should be taken before handling so that the components do not
get burned, and even if the burning occurs, make sure that the toxic gases are not
inhaled into the human body. The components should not be discarded freely. To
dispose of the component, the personnel should make necessary chemical treatment
or special waste treatment in accordance with the related local regulations.
1.2.3 Hydrofluoride
Warning:
Some components of the equipment carrying hydrofluoride are used as it is

unavoidable. Toxic gases will be generated when these components get burned.
Preventive measures should be taken before handling so that the components do not
get burned, and even if the burning occurs, make sure that the toxic gases are not
inhaled into the human body. The components should not be discarded freely. To
dispose of the component, the personnel should make necessary chemical treatment
or special waste treatment for the component in accordance with the related local
regulations.
1-4
1.3 Electrical Safety
1.3.1 High Voltage
Danger:
High-voltage power supply is required for the equipment operation. Direct or indirect
contact through damp objects with high-voltage cables or the mains may be fatal.
Installation of AC power supply equipment must be implemented in compliance with

local safety regulations, and the personnel engaged in AC power supply must be
qualified for high-voltage and AC operations.
Electrical conductors such as watches, bracelets and rings must be removed before the
operation.
If the cabinet is found to be wet, please turn off the power supply immediately.
Keep the equipment dry when operations are carried out under humid environment.
Warning:
Improper high-voltage operations may result in fire accidents and electric shocks.
Therefore, AC power cables must be laid in compliance with the local codes and
regulations. High-voltage operators should be trained and qualified.
1.3.2 Power Cables and Grounding Cables
In order to protect against possible short circuit(s), the power branches of the DC power
system of the Mobile Switching Center (MSC) (including the DC distribution system of
the MSC) must have a protection mechanism. This requires the protection that means
cutting off the current if it exceeds 1.5 times of the rated current within one minute.
1-5
Caution:
Live installation and removal of power cables are prohibited. Electric sparks or arcs
may be generated when power cables get in touch with conductors, which may cause
fire accidents or eye injuries.
Power must be switched off before the installation or the removal of the power cable.
Before connecting a cable, make sure that the cable and the cable label to be used are
matching according to actual installation requirements.
The –48 V power cables of the equipment are blue, the grounding cables (GND) and
cascading grounding cables are black, and the protection grounding cables (PGND)
are olivine.
The following details the item code, description and diameter of the above cables.
Item code Description

Outsourced cable-GND fire-retardant cascading power cable 4 m used
04040366
for the assembled cabinet-10 mm2
Outsourced cable-GND fire-retardant cascading power cable 7.2 m

04040367
used for the assembled cabinet-10 mm2
Outsourced cable-GND fire-retardant power cable 6m used for the

04060216 assembled cabinet-OT25-8/RVVZ25 mm2 black/Cold-end terminal 25
mm2
Outsourced cable-PGND fire-retardant power cable 6m used for the

04060406 assembled cabinet-OT25-8/RVVZ25 mm2 yellow green/Cold-end
terminal 25 mm2
Outsourced cable-Fire-retardant power cable –48 V 6 m used for the
04060210 assembled cabinet-OT25-8/RVVZ25 mm2 blue/Cold-end terminal 25
mm2
The –48 V power cable of the alarm box is blue in color and the grounding cable is
black. No protection grounding cable is needed by the alarm box.

Single cable-DL0945-Suite of power cables 30 m-4PIN
04020199 2
connector/2-core 0.8 mm /2*plugin terminals (0.8 mm^2)
As regards the 110V/220V power cable of the alarm box:
1-6

Purchased cable-GM12 alarm box 220 V power cable 6
04040705
m-SP035/SJT3*18AWG round black/SP023 (0.8 mm2)
1.3.3 Tools
Warning:
High-voltage and AC operations require special tools instead of general-purpose or
makeshift tools.
1.3.4 Drilling
Warning:
Unauthorized drilling on the cabinet is strictly prohibited. Improper drilling may damage
the connections and cables inside the cabinet and the metal filings produced during the
drilling may cause short-circuits of the circuit boards if they fall into the cabinet.
Wear protective insulation gloves and remove the cables inside the cabinet before
drilling any holes on the cabinet.
Take care of your eyes when drilling holes as the splashing metal burrs & scraps may
hurt your eyes.
Prevent metal scraps from entering the cabinet.
Improper drilling may damage the electromagnetic shielding of the cabinet, resulting in
bad performance.
Clean up the metal scraps after drilling.
1-7
1.3.5 Thunderstorms
Danger:
High-voltage and AC operations and operations on the steel towers and the masts are
strictly prohibited in a stormy weather.
Thunderstorms can generate powerful electromagnetic field in the atmosphere.

Therefore, the equipment should be grounded properly, in order to prevent any possible
lightning strikes.
1.3.6 Static Electricity
Caution:
Static electricity generated by the human body may damage the electrostatic-sensitive
parts on the circuit boards, such as large-scale integrated circuit (IC).
In dry climate, the electrostatic charge carried by the human body may go up to 30 kV,
which will remain on the human body for a long period of time. The operator’s contact
with the sensitive component and the resultant electrostatic discharge will bring
damage to the component.
Before contacting/touching any equipment such as holding the plug-in boards, circuit
boards and IC chips, wear the anti-static wrist strap, which is well grounded so as to
prevent sensitive components from getting damaged by static electricity of the human
body.
Before operators touch the board or module, they should release the electrostatic
charge in their body. That is, before the operator touches a board or a module, he or
she must wear an anti-static wrist strap. The connecting line between the wrist and the
grounding point should connect in series with a resistance greater than 1 M ohm to
avoid accidental shocks. The resistance value greater than 1 M ohm is rather low in
terms of electrostatic voltage discharging. The anti-static wrist strap should be checked
1-8
regularly. Replacing the cable of anti-static wrist strap by any other cable is strictly
prohibited.
Electrostatic-sensitive board or module should not be in contact with any other object
having static electricity or any object that may easily generate static electricity. For
instance, packaging bags, delivery boxes and conveyor belts made of insulating
materials will generate static electricity by themselves and can cause electrostatic
charging when in contact with human body or the earth and might thus bring forth
damages.
Electrostatic-sensitive boards or modules can only be in contact with quality

discharging materials, such as anti-static packing bags. The boards in stock or in the
course of transportation should be packaged with anti-static packing bags only.
Before any measuring device/instrument is connected to the boards or modules, first

discharge its static electricity, that is, the measuring device/instrument should be
grounded before connecting to the board.
The boards or modules should not be placed near strong DC magnetic field, for
instance, near the cathode ray tube of the oscilloscope. The safety distance should be
at least 10 cm.
Damage caused by static electricity is accumulative. If the damage is slight, the

component will not malfunction. However, as the number of damages increase, the
components may suddenly fail. The damage caused by electrostatic discharging to the
components is of two types: Obvious damage and hidden damage. Hidden damage is
not visible when the damage occurs, whereas the component may become vulnerable
and easily get damaged under the condition of over-voltage or/and high-temperature.
The correct way of wearing anti-static wrist strap is shown in Figure 1-1.
Plug of anti-static wrist strap
Figure 1-1 Wearing the anti-static wrist strap
1-9
1.3.7 Power Labels
Attention:
Before connecting the power cables, check the correctness of the labels and then
make the connection.
1.3.8 Current Leakage
Warning:
To avoid the occurrence of large current leakage, the equipment must be grounded
before connecting to the power supply.
Before connecting the AC input power supply, the operation and maintenance
personnel should first connect the protection-grounding terminal of the equipment
housing to the earth. The purpose of doing so is to avoid electric shock on human body
resulting from current leakage, which is usually caused by the earth capacitance of the
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) wave filter at the AC power supply input terminal of
the equipment or the Y capacitance of the primary power supply.
1.3.9 Flammable Air Environment
Danger:
The equipment should not be placed in an environment where flammable, explosive air
or smog exists. No operation should be performed under such an environment.
The operation on any electronic equipment under such an environment will pose
absolute threat to the equipment & the operating personnel.
1-10
1.4 Fuse
Warning:
z For the safety of continuous operations, please replace the fuse with that of the
same type and specification if necessary.
z Not to perform the hot-line installation, fuse disconnection, otherwise, at the
moment of touching the conductor, electrospark or electric arc may be produced,
thus causing fire or hurting eyes.
Switch off the power of corresponding equipment before installing and disconnecting
fuse. If it is the fuse of a board, the board should be unplugged in advance; and if it is
that of a backplane, the power socket corresponding to the backplane should be
unplugged.
The following is a list of fuses that will affect safety in the unit/system. Please use fuses
according to this list. There could be a marking near the fuse. If the listed ratings do not
match the markings on the Published Circuit Board (PCB), please make a change
based on the following list in Table 1-2.
Table 1-2 List of critical components
Object/Part No. Technical data standards

FS1 on SPC F 125V-7A UL, CSA
F1 on QSI F 125V-7A UL, CSA
F1 on STU F 125V-7A UL, CSA
F1 on CNU F 125V-4A UL, CSA
F1 on SPT F 125V-4A UL, CSA
F1 on ET16 F 125V-7A UL, CSA
F101 on PWS F 250V-10A IEC
F102 on PWS F 250V-0.5A UL
F1 on BDR F 125V-2A UL, CSA

F1 on CKD F 125V-2A UL, CSA
F1 on CKS F 125V-2A UL, CSA
FP1 on SRC F 125V-2A UL, CSA

F1 on OBC F 125V-2A UL, CSA
1-11
Object/Part No. Technical data standards

F2 on CKS F 250V-5A UL
F1 F2 on PWC F 250V-2A IEC
F3 on alarm box F 250V-2A IEC
F1 on FSN F 125V-4A UL, CSA
F1 on CPC F 125V-4A UL, CSA
F1 on BAC F 125V-4A UL, CSA
F1 on alarm box F 250V-1A IEC
1.5 Laser
Warning:
Laser beams from the laser transceiver or optical fibers will cause eye injury.
When the installation and maintenance operations of optical fibers are performed,
getting close to or looking into the optical fiber outlet directly with unaided eyes is
definitely prohibited.
1.5.1 General Laser Information
The light-wave digital transmission system and associated optical test sets use
semi-conductors that generate lasers. The lasers emit light waves into optical cables,
at or near infrared wavelengths (wavelengths are 850 nm, 1310 nm and 1,550 nm) that
are invisible to the human eyes.
If absorbed by the retinas, the light energy emitted by laser and high-radiating Light
Emitting Diode (LED) may cause damage to the eyes. When a light beam enters the
eyes, they will magnify and focus on the energy and thus may cause a retinal burn.
The damaging factor at the wavelengths used in telecommunications is thermal in

origin, that is, damage caused by heating. Therefore, a specific amount of energy for a
specific time is the precondition to heat an area of retinal tissue.
A conventional laser produces a small beam of light. As the beam is small, the power
density is very high. Lasers used in light-wave systems have a larger beam divergence,
typically 10 to 20 degrees. Generally, viewing an unterminated fiber or damaged fiber
1-12
with the unaided eyes at a distance greater than 150 mm (6 inches) will not cause eye
injury. However, damage may occur if an optical instrument such as a microscope,
magnifying glass or eye loupe is used to view the energized fiber end.
Danger:
Pay attention to eye injuries caused by invisible laser radiation. Light-wave digital
transmission systems and associated optical test sets operate with invisible laser
radiation. Laser radiation can cause damage to the skin and considerable injuries to the
eyes. This applies particularly to the connections of the optical plug in parts of the
system. Never look into the end of an exposed fiber or a plug-in optical connector as
long as the optical source is switched on. Check that the optical source is switched off
by measuring with an optical power meter. Never view any unterminated optical
connector with optical instruments other than indirect image-converting devices, since
viewing optics tend to collimate the energy from an optical connector. The lasers emit
light waves into light-guide cables, at or near infrared wavelengths that are invisible to
the human eyes and, hence, increase the potential risk for injury. Always observe the
laser warning instructions.
In its normal operating mode, a light-wave system is totally enclosed and presents no
risk of eye injury. It is a Class 1/I laser product under the IEC/FDA schemes. Additional
safety is achieved by the implementation of an Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) of the
system. The ALS, however, can be applied for bi-directional transmission only. If the
receiver side does not detect the laser from the transmission side, it will give the
transmission side a signal, so the ALS will shut down the laser emission in less than
100 ms.
1.5.2 Laser Safety Guidelines
In its normal operating mode, a light-wave system is totally enclosed and presents no
risk of eye injury. It is a Class 1/I laser product under the IEC/FDA schemes. The
light-guide cables that interconnect various components of a light-wave system can be
disconnected or broken, and may expose the human body to light-wave emission. In
addition, certain measures and service procedures may expose the technicians to
emission from the laser circuit boards during installation and servicing. Follow the
following instructions to avoid exposing yourself and others to risk:
z Read the relevant descriptions in this manual before taking equipment into
operation or carrying out any installation and maintenance work on the optical
1-13
plug-ins, and follow the instructions. Ignoring the instructions may result in
exposure to dangerous radiation.
z Make sure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber
connectors. Always take care when you open the front door or face the front of the
unit/system.
z Never look into the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector as long as the
optical source is still switched on.
z In the event of doubt, check whether the optical source is switched off by
measuring with an optical power meter.
During operation, maintenance, or restoration, a light-wave transmission system is
considered as unenclosed. Under these conditions, follow the instructions below:
z Under no circumstance shall light-wave/light-guide operations be performed by a
technician before satisfactorily completing an approved training course.
z Only the authorized and trained personnel shall be permitted to carry out service,
maintenance and restoration activities.
z Avoid exposing the eye to emissions from unterminated or energized optical
connectors at a close distance. Connectors associated with light-wave
regenerators are recessed, which limits the exposure distance. However, the
technicians removing or replacing regenerators should not stare at or look directly
into the vacant regenerator slots with optical instruments or magnifying lenses.
z Only the authorized, trained personnel shall use the light-wave test equipment
during installation or servicing since this equipment contains semiconductor
lasers.
z Under no circumstances shall any personnel scan a fiber with an optical test set
without verifying that all light-wave sources on the fiber are turned off.
z All unauthorized personnel shall be excluded from the immediate area of
light-wave transmission systems during installation and service.
1.5.3 Handling Fibers
Cutting and splicing fibers must be followed and performed by trained personnel only.
Read and understand all instructions of the manual for the splicing and cutting
equipment. Before splicing please verify whether the fiber is disconnected from the
optical plug-in unit. After splicing, every splice has to be checked. During installation of
fibers the optical connectors must be equipped with a protection cap.
1-14
1.6 High Temperature
Warning:
It is unavoidable that the temperature of certain parts of the equipment may rise rather
high. Do not touch the equipment surface unnecessarily, else scalding may occur.
When the equipment is running in a tropical environment, the benchmark temperature

of the parts is 45°C and the maximum temperature rise allowed is 30°C and hence the
highest temperature should not exceed 75°C under normal working conditions. When a
fault occurs, the maximum temperature rise allowed is 55°C and the highest
temperature should not exceed 100°C.
1.7 Fans
Warning:
Never dip the finger or tool into a fan that is running. Switch off the fan before any
operation to avoid damage to the equipment or injuries to the human body.
Putting the finger into the fan while it is running will cause injuries.
Do not place any objects such as the removed parts, fixing screws, or tools near a
running fan. If they fall into the running fan, they can damage the fan or the other
equipment in the cabinet.
When replacing the outer casing of the fan, never put the finger or a board into the fan
to avoid any possible injuries to the hands or damage to the equipment.
Warning:
Keep your hands and body away from the running parts to avoid possible injuries.
1-15
1.8 Working at High Altitudes
1.8.1 General Operations
Warning:
When working at high altitudes, beware of falling accidentally and avoid dropping tools
& other objects.
Working at high altitudes should be in accordance with the related national regulations:
z Personnel working at heights must have undergone appropriate training.
z Take care of the mechanical devices and tools and prevent them from falling
down.
z Follow safety precautions and wear helmet and safety belt.
z Put on cold-proof clothes before working at heights in cold areas.
z Check and approve all the lifting devices before working at heights.
1.8.2 Safety Codes for Using Ladders
Before using the ladder, first check if the ladder is in good condition & not having any
damage. Make sure that the ladder is safe for use. Overload on the ladder is strictly
prohibited.
A-shaped ladders should be fully stretched, as shown in Figure 1-3.
Figure 1-2 The angle at which the ladder should be leaned
1-16
Figure 1-3 Stretching the A-shaped ladder
The best slope/angle of the ladder is 75°. The slope can be measured with an angle
square or with arm, as shown in Figure 1-2. When using the ladder, the wider end of the
ladder should be placed against the ground or protective measures should be taken at
the bottom end of the ladder to avoid skidding. Place the ladder against a stable
ground.
Figure 1-4 Climbing and using the long ladder in a safe way
1-17
1m
Figure 1-5 Placing the ladder with the top 1 meter higher above the edge of the
roof-top
When climbing up the ladder, one’s center of gravity should not deviate from the ladder
edge. To avoid danger and ensure safety, the feet should be pressed against the ladder
and one hand should fast grip the ladder, as shown in Figure 1-4. Never climb up the
topmost four rungs of a ladder. If one is about to climb to the roof, the length of the
ladder should be at least 1 meter higher above the roof-edge, as shown in Figure 1-5.
1.9 Other Items
1.9.1 Hoisting of Heavy Objects
Warning:
Walking under the hoisted objects is strictly prohibited when hoisting heavy objects.
Lifting operators should undergo the related training and must be qualified. The lifting
devices should be checked and must be intact. Make sure that the lifting operations are
performed only when the lifting devices are firmly fixed onto the weight-bearing object
or onto the main wall. Use concise command to avoid wrong operations.
The angle between the straps at the point where they are attached to the lifting hook
should not be greater than 90° so as to prevent them from getting broken, as shown in
Figure 1-6.
1-18
Max. 900
Figure 1-6 Hoisting of heavy objects
1.9.2 Handling of Heavy Objects
Warning:
When carrying heavy objects such as the cabinets, please take care to avoid bruises
and wounds.
The installation and maintenance of a cabinet should be best performed with the help of
2 to 3 persons. The operations such as leaning, tilting and erecting the cabinet should
also be undertaken by 2 to 3 persons, as it is heavy. Note that the cabinet may fall down
when the tilt angle of the center of gravity exceeds 10 degrees.
Figure 1-7 shows the process of erecting and laying down a cabinet.
1-19
Figure 1-7 Erecting and laying down the cabinet
1.9.3 Sharp Edges
Warning:
When handling the equipment, please wear protective gloves to prevent cuts and
injuries caused by sharp edges.
1.9.4 Inserting & Pulling Out the Boards
Caution:
z Do not apply too much force when inserting the boards to avoid bending of the pins
on the backplane.
z Insert the boards along the slots properly to avoid short-circuits resulting from their
surfaces contacting each other.
z Keep the hands off the circuit, components, connectors of the board or the cabling
trough.
1-20
1.9.5 Bundling the Signal Cables
Caution:
Signal cables should be bundled separately from strong-current or high-voltage cables,

and the spacing between the adjacent cable ties should be at least 150 mm.
1.9.6 Maintenance and Commissioning by a Single Person Not Allowed
Attention:
One should not attempt to perform the maintenance or commissioning of the

equipment unless another qualified professional who can give help/instructions is
present.
Remember that safety is in your hands!
1-21
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 Overview
Chapter 2 Overview
2.1 Purpose
This chapter of the Installation Manual serves to describe the standardized installation
process of the C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System (shorted as C&C08 Switch
hereinafter).
2.2 Hardware Installation Process
This section deals with the installation flow chart, which outlines the specific operation
standards and working flow so that the installation personnel can be acquainted with
the general steps for installing the C&C08 Switch.
The installation process of the C&C08 Switch is as shown in Figure 2-1.
2-1
Start
02
Engineering 01
information
03
Installation Engineering preparations
environment
checklist Engineering supervisor
04
Survey and 05
design 07
literature 06 In-service
Installation Installation environment protocol
environment check and confirmation
checklist 08
Client confirms
Engineering supervisor installation
09 deployment
plan (CCDP)
10
Unpack and check
goods on the site
Packing list
Engineering supervisor
and client
12 13
11 N Fill in records of goods
Feedback table
shortage and damage of goods
Goods comply with problems
checklist? Engineering supervisor
Y 15
14
Weekly engineering field report
Hardware installation Table of engineering field regular meeting
Hardware engineer Liaison list for fieldwork
Record table of engineering field
17 16 installation process
Engineering
design plan
18 Drawing, drilling
Supporter hole Hardware engineer
position layout
19
Support, guide rail
and footing
installation
Hardware engineer
20
Cabinet installation
Hardware engineer
To 21
Figure 2-1 Installation process of the C&C08 Switch
2-2
From 20
21
22
Wiring rack (trough)
Design installation drawing of wiring rack trough
Hardware engineer
23
Internal cable connection
Hardware engineer
24
Power line connection
Hardware engineer
25
Subscriber layout
Hardware engineer
26
Trunk cable layout
Hardware engineer
27
Optical fiber layout
Hardware engineer
28
Network cable and WS anti-static
line layout
Hardware engineer
29
Alarm box installation
Hardware engineer
30
Hygiene cleaning
Hardware engineer
31
Installation of front , back and side doors
Hardware engineer
To 32
Figure 2-2 Installation process of the C&C08 Switch (Continued)
2-3
From 31
32
WS installation
Hardware engineer
33
Project tag
Hardware engineer
34
Measure resistance of
grounding conductor
Hardware engineer
35
Final check
Hardware engineer
36
Completion acceptance of 37
hardware installation Completion report of
Project supervisor/user hardware installation
38
39 Hardware project and software 40
Contact information of debugging handover
equipment buyer All documents and tables
Hardware supervisor/software
debugging supervisor
41
Field inspection
Project supervisor/software
debugging supervisor
42
Hardware completion summary
Hardware supervisor/engineer
Finish
Figure 2-3 Installation process of the C&C08 Switch (Continued)
2-4
2.3 Caution
Before the installation, read the Installation Manual for the C&C08 Digital SPC
Switching System carefully and proceed with the work by following the specified
procedures.
2-5
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Requirements for Equipment Building
Chapter 3 Requirements for Equipment Building
3.1 Introduction
The primary concern for the installation of the C&C08 Switch is the fact that the switch
has to run in a safe environment, that is, it shall be located in a low temperature room,
away from dust, harmful gas, low pressure and explosion dangers; the room should be
free from any vibrations and loud noise; there should not be any substation and traction
substation around. If the switch is not properly located, it may not meet the design
parameters or specifications even if a lot of protection measures have been taken.
Therefore, when selecting a proper location for the digital SPC switch, it is advisable to
take all the requirements of Communication Network Planning and Communication
Technology into consideration, as well as other factors, such as hydrology, geology,
transportation and possibility of earthquakes.
Once the equipment building is located in a place, it shall stay there permanently. In
addition, in order to keep Telecom Network in normal operation and free from
interruption, the equipment building should be constructed in a robust manner so that it
is durable and need no repairing, and it should meet the fireproof standards as well.
Since the standards stipulated for construction, structure, heating, ventilation, power
supply, lighting and fire protection of the equipment building are very strict, the
equipment building should be designed by an expert architect. Moreover, the design of
the equipment building should conform to other stipulations for environment protection,
fire protection, civil air defense and building construction.
3.2 Site Selection of Equipment Room
The construction, structure, heating and ventilation, power supply, lighting and fire
fighting of the equipment room should be designed by specialized construction
designers. The equipment room shall be designed in accordance with the following
requirements:
z Environment requirements for access equipment running
z Requirements on industrial, environment protection, fire fighting, and civil air
defense
z Current standards or regulations of the local country or region
z Requirements of special technical process for building construction design.
The specific requirements for site selection of equipment room are as follows.
z Keep the site far from pollution sources.
3-1
For heavy pollution sources such as the smeltery and coal mine, keep a distance of 5
km. For medium pollution sources such as the chemical, rubber and galvanization
industrials, keep a distance of 3.7 km. For light pollution sources such as packinghouse
and tanyard, keep a distance of 2 km. If these pollution sources cannot be avoided,
keep the equipment room in the perennial upwind direction of the pollution sources. In
addition, adopt the high-quality equipment room or protection product.
z Keep the air vent of the equipment room away from the exhaust of city waste pipes,
big cesspools and sewage treatment tanks. Keep the equipment room in the
positive pressure state lest the corrosive gases enter the equipment room and
erode components and circuit boards.
z Keep the equipment room away from the industrial and heating boilers.
z It is best to locate the equipment room in or above the second floor. If this cannot
be satisfied, the ground for equipment installation in the equipment room shall be
at least 600 mm above the maximum flood level in the local record.
z Keep the equipment room away from livestock farms. If this requirement cannot be
satisfied, it should be located in the perennial upwind direction of the livestock
farms.
z Keep the equipment room 3.7 km away from the seaside or salt lake. If this
requirement cannot be satisfied, the equipment room should be airtight with
cooling facilities. In addition, the alkalized soil cannot be used as the construction
material. Otherwise, the equipment applicable in atrocious environment must be
adopted.
z The old livestock room or the fertilizer warehouse cannot be used as the
equipment room.
z The equipment room should be solid enough to withstand wind and downpour.
z Keep the equipment room away from the road or sand field with dusts flying
around. If this requirement cannot be satisfied, the windows and doors of the
equipment room should be away from the pollution sources.
3.3 Layout of Equipment Rooms
Generally, the switching equipment, transmission equipment and power supply

equipment are installed in different rooms, so as to facilitate maintenance and
management. The layout plan is as shown in Figure 3-1.
3-2
Diesel generator
Service Control room
station room room
Transmission Main Power

equipment SPC switch room distribution Storage battery room
Distribution
room Frame room room
(MDF room)
Toll semi-automatic Transformer

station room room
Power cable
Communication cable
Figure 3-1 Layout plan of equipment rooms
The transmission equipment, connected with the MDF through the telecom cables,
shall stay in the room next to the MDF room or in the same room as the MDF. The MDF
room shall be as close as possible to the SPC switch room, so as to shorten the cables
between them.
Connected with feeder cables, the power distribution room, storage battery room and
SPC switch room shall be installed on the same floor, with the power distribution room
adjacent to both the storage battery room and the SPC switch room.
In one word, the equipment rooms should be designed in such a way that the
communication cables and power cables are as short as possible to facilitate
maintenance, which can not only reduce the cable cost, but also minimize
communication problems and improve working efficiency.
3.3.1 SPC Switch Room and Control Room
The SPC switch room, being the central part of the equipment building, shall be the first
to be considered in laying out the building. In a two-storey building, the switch shall be
placed on the second floor to facilitate the connection with other equipment and also to
prevent accumulation of dust. In a three-storey building, whether to place the switch on
the second or the third floor depends on the construction of the building. Positioning it
on the third floor is good for dustproof and security reasons. This arrangement makes it
more convenient to arrange the technical personnel’s rooms and other related offices
on the first and second floors. If the building has a wide-span roof structure without
pillars, it facilitates the equipment to be arranged in a flexible and convenient manner.
In this case, the MDF room has to be set on the second floor, which needs longer
external cables. The power distribution room and the central air conditioner room are
still on the first floor, so longer feeder cable and ventilation pipe are required, and the air
conditioner will consume more power to increase the refrigerating output. This is not a
3-3
suitable arrangement for earthquake resistance, either. Therefore, in a three-storey

building, the switch is usually placed on the second floor.
The SPC switch room houses the switch rack, while the control room houses the
terminal equipment, tape drive, alarm box and input/output equipment. Usually the
tapes, disks and input/output equipment in the control room demand a stricter control of
the working temperature and humidity than the switch. The two rooms are closely
related in maintenance and operation, so they shall be adjacent.
One way to prevent accumulation of dust and to maintain moderate temperature is to

build a winding corridor at the entrance to the switch room. A better way is to divide the
room into two parts, placing the switch in the inner room and the control equipment in
the outer room. The partition between the inner and outer rooms shall be an
aluminum-framed glass wall or a brick wall with wide glass windows, so that the
maintenance personnel can observe the running status of the switch inside through the
windows.
If there are difficulties for the above setting, or the environmental requirements of tapes,
disks and input/output equipment are not stricter than those of the switch, these control
equipment can be put in the same room as the switch.
To improve the working conditions and for better management in the office, some
auxiliary rooms may be arranged for the SPC switch room, such as spare boards &
spare parts room, instrument room, reference room, on-duty room and shift room. The
shift room allows the staff to change their shoes and clothes before entering or after
exiting from the switch room. The on-duty room is arranged to avoid the staff clustering
in the control room or switch room, which may affect the clean and quiet environment.
The shift room and the on-duty room shall be close to the switch room and the control
room, and a glass wall shall be placed between the on-duty room and the adjacent
switch room for the on-duty staff and visitors to view the switch without entering the
switch room, so that the environment of the switch room is not affected.
3.3.2 MDF Room and Transmission Equipment Room
The MDF room houses the MDF, measurement station and even some transmission
equipment if there is no dedicated transmission equipment room. The MDF is a hub
collecting all external cables and internal cables. The MDF room shall be placed near
the transmission equipment room and the SPC switch room, since there are a lot of
cables running between them and some of the operations may need their coordination.
The MDF and the SPC switch are usually placed in two neighboring rooms on the same
floor or the MDF is placed in a room downstairs right under the switch room. In the latter
plan, the MDF should be situated under the place where the subscriber equipment and
inter-office equipment are concentrated. In the former plan, the equipment, which is
3-4
directly connected to the subscriber cables and trunk cables, shall be put at the place
near the MDF room.
Either plan has its own advantages and disadvantages. If the MDF room and the SPC
room are on different floors, the length of the MDF room will not be limited by the house
span even for a large-capacity office owing to the fact that the MDF expands in the
same direction as the switch racks. Moreover, the cleanliness of the switch room will
not be affected despite the frequent contacts between the personnel in the MDF room
and the external maintenance personnel. In the other option, the same-floor plan will be
of some help to the communication between the staff working in the MDF room and
those in the switch room during their daily maintenance work. However, the external
maintenance personnel will bring a lot of dust to the switch room as they go upstairs
and downstairs, making it difficult to keep the switch room clean.
Moreover, in the same-floor plan, the extension of the MDF is vertical to the switch
room, so the length of the MDF will be limited by the house span if the office has a large
capacity. The two plans require almost the same amount of inter-office cables, but the
same-floor plan needs more terminating cables and may cause construction problems.
Hence, locating the switch & the MDF on the same floor is not suggested for the
large-capacity offices.
The MDF room can also house the Pulse-Code Modulation (PCM) and optical fiber
transmission equipment. Whether to set a separate transmission equipment room
depends on the final capacity of the PCM and the optical transmission equipment and
on the availability of rooms. In general, the transmission equipment is installed in the
MDF room or in a room as near as possible to the MDF room; or in some cases, it is
located near the switch.
3.3.3 Power Distribution Room and Storage Battery Room
The power supply system is the crucial part of the building, as it is the driving force (by
feeding the required power) for all the equipment to transmit information.
The telecom equipment uses two kinds of power supply sources: the Alternating
Current (AC) power fed by the Mains or by the diesel generators and the Direct Current
(DC) power fed by the storage batteries or the rectifiers.
I. Power distribution room
The distribution room and the storage battery room are connected with feeder cables.
To shorten the cable length between them, the two rooms shall be arranged adjacently
on the same floor or on two floors with one being located right under the other. When
they are on two floors, there should be a staircase nearby between the two floors for the
convenience of maintenance, since the same personnel maintain the equipment in
these two rooms. Because the SPC switch consumes a lot of power, the power
3-5
distribution room should be arranged near the SPC switch room. To save the
non-ferrous metal, the power distribution room should also as close as possible to the
DC load center. Therefore, when the switch room is on the second floor, the power
distribution room may be arranged on the first floor--almost right under the switch room.
Since the power supply equipment is quite heavy, the power distribution room is usually
set on the first floor and it should be away from the road in view of security. If it has to be
set near the road, the windows facing the road should be installed with iron grid or net
for the sake of security. If it cannot be set on the first floor, setting it in the basement is
an option.
As the power distribution room is related to the diesel generator room (when the diesel
generator room is set outside the building), a door should be provided in the power
distribution room to make a passage for the maintenance staff to the diesel generator
room.
II. Storage battery room
The storage battery is usually placed in a room on the first floor, away from direct
sunshine to prevent the evaporation of electrolyte of storage battery. It is better to place
the batteries in the north to avoid the sunshine from the west. The battery shall be kept
cool to preserve its charged current. If the storage battery room is arranged on the first
floor near the road, the windows facing the road shall have iron grid or protection net
installed for the sake of security.
To facilitate maintenance, there should be another room with two doors set between the
storage battery room and the power distribution room, which are not opened
simultaneously. If the acid-resistant and explosion-free batteries are used in the
storage battery room, one door is sufficient between the two rooms.
The maintenance-free storage battery is adopted in the C&C08 Switch. The storage
battery can be placed in the same room as the power supply equipment or the MDF.
The maintenance-free storage battery has lower air exhaust and has compact structure,
so it need not special ventilation equipment.
3.4 Architectural Requirements for Switch Room
I. Room area
The switch room shall be spacious enough to hold all the switching equipment and you
should also take into account the final capacity of the switch. At least 1.2~1.5 m
distance shall be left in front of the cabinets to facilitate door-opening and movement of
the maintenance staff. The front sides of two rows of cabinets shall be spaced by at
least 1.5 m. The side of the cabinet shall be at least 0.8 m away from the wall and the
3-6
side where debugging is necessary shall be at least 1 m way from the wall. The room
shall have a 1 m wide aisle. Figure 3-2 shows the arrangement of the switch room area.
Figure 3-2 Arrangement of switch room area
Dimension of the C&C08 cabinet: 2100 mm (H) * 800 mm (W) * 550 mm (D)
Dimension of the side plate: 2100 mm (H) * 550 mm (W) * 40 mm (D)
Figure 3-3 shows the cabinet dimension (where, "n" refers to the number of cabinets).
……
2100mm
800mm
40mm (n-1) x 800mm 40mm
Figure 3-3 Cabinet dimension
Figure 3-4 shows the cabinet outline dimension.
3-7
Alarm
a) Outline dimension of single cabinet b) Combined cabinets
Figure 3-4 Outline dimension of the C&C08 Switch cabinet
II. Height of the switch room
The minimum height of the room refers to the net height under the beam and the
ventilation pipe. It is required that the interior height should not be less than 3 m.
Figure 3-5 shows the height of the switch room.
Figure 3-5 Switch room height
III. Floor of the switch room
It is required that the floor of the switch room should be semi-conductive and dustproof.
Generally the ESD-preventive floor (ESD refers to Electronic Static Discharge) is
adopted, whose thickness should be 300 mm to 330 mm. The floor blocks shall be laid
firm and tight, with a maximum unevenness tolerance of 2 mm per meter2. If there is no
3-8
ESD-preventive floor installed, the static-conductive floor shall be installed instead.

Both the ESD-preventive floor and the static-conductive floor should be grounded to
discharge their static electricity. They may be connected to the grounding device
through a 1 ohm current-limiting resistance.
The floor of the switch room shall bear a weight of over 400 kg/m2. The lead-acid
storage battery is heavy, so the floor of the storage battery room shall bear a weight of
over 450 kg/m2 if the storage battery below 500 Ah is used. The load-bearing capability
of over 600 kg/m2 is required if the storage battery capacity is between 500 Ah and 800
Ah. The floor of the corridor or staircases shall bear a standard weight of 400 kg/m2,
with an overload coefficient of 1.4. The load-bearing capability of the floor outside the
switch room shall not be less than 300 kg/m2. For an old building, reinforcement
measures should be taken to improve its load-bearing capability.
The C&C08 Switch cabinet is made of steel. A fully configured cabinet (equipped with
boards) weighs 280 kg, with its front and back doors weighing 45 kg and the two side
doors weighing 42 kg.
While installing the cabinet, the weight-bearing area of the floor shall be:
0.064 m2 for the raised floor
0.006 m2 for the non-raised floor.
IV. Window(s) and door(s) of the switch room
The door(s) shall be 2 m high and 1 m wide, and one-panel door is OK. The door(s) and
window(s) should be sealed with rubber-ribbons to prevent dust. The double-layer
windows are recommended.
V. Wall surface of the switch room
The walls of the switch room shall be covered with wallpaper or painted with flat varnish.
Note not to use paint that is prone to pulverization.
VI. Troughs in the switch room
The troughs are used to lay all kinds of cables, so they shall have smooth and clean
interior surface, with proper length, width and holes. The position and size of the
troughs should conform to the requirements of switch arrangement.
VII. Neatness
The equipment room is free from explosive, conducting, permeability magnetic and
corrosive dust. Table 3-1 lists the requirement for dust concentration in the equipment
room.
3-9
Table 3-1 Requirements for dust particles in the equipment room
Mechanical active
Unit Concentration
material
4
≤3 x 10
Particle/m
Dust particle (no visible dust accumulated on the
³
workbench in three days)
The diameter of dust particle is larger than or equal to 5 µm.
To meet the above requirements, take the following measures in the equipment room.
z Apply dustproof materials for ground, wall and ceiling construction.
z Equip screens for the door and windows facing outside. The outer windows should
be dust-proof.
z Clean the equipment room periodically, and clean the air filter quarterly.
z Wear the shoe covers and ESD-preventive clothes before entering the equipment
room.
VIII. Corrosive Gases
Besides the dust, the equipment room should be free from corrosive gases, such as
SO2, H2S, NH3. Table 3-2 lists the requirements for the corrosive gas concentration.
Table 3-2 Requirements for corrosive gas concentration
Chemical active
Unit Concentration
material
SO2 mg/m³ ≤0.20
H2S mg/m³ ≤0.006
NH3 mg/m³ ≤0.05

Cl2 mg/m³ ≤0.01
To meet the above requirements, take the following measures in the equipment room.
z Avoid constructing the equipment room near the place where the corrosive gas
concentration is high, such as a chemical plant.
z Make sure the air intake vent of the equipment room is in the perennial upwind
direction of the pollution source.
z Install the batteries into the room different from the communications equipment.
z Ask the professional institute to monitor the corrosive gas conditions.
IX. Electromagnetic Environment
Table 3-3 lists the requirements for electromagnetic environment.
3-10
Table 3-3 Requirements for electromagnetic environment
Electromagnetic phenomenon Parameter

Frequency (Hz) 50–20000
Low frequency magnetic field
Ampl. A/m (rms) 10–0.025
Amplitude modulation RF electric Frequency (MHz) 0.009–1000

field Ampl. V/m (rms) 3
Frequency (GHz) 1–20

Pulse modulation RF electric field
Ampl. (V/m (peak)) 3
Take the following measures to restrain interference signals:

z Keep the equipment room away from the transformer, high-tension transmission
lines, and heavy current equipment.
z Keep the equipment room away from the high-power broadcasting transmitter.
z If there is mobile communication transmitter installed in the communication
building, its interference degree must comply with the relevant standards and
regulations. If necessary, take measures to screen and isolate the interference.
z Do not use portable wireless devices in the equipment room.
3.5 Requirements for Power Supply System of Equipment

Building
The power supply can be classified into three kinds, namely power supply for factories,
mines and enterprises (Mains Power Supply), power supply from the diesel generator
(Captive Power Supply) and power supply from storage battery. If condition permits, the
Mains Power Supply and the Captive Power Supply shall be designed as 380/220 V
3-phase 5-line system. For the small-capacity office, its power supply can be 220 V
single-phase 3-line system. The power supply from storage battery is designed
according to the specific requirements.
The Mains Power Supply feeds the lighting, heating, ventilation, air conditioning, water
supply and drainage, and this power comes from the low-voltage power distribution
room.
The Captive Power Supply feeds the lighting, partial lighting, fire protection control
room, fire hydrant, automatic fire alarm, automatic fire fighting equipment and air
conditioners in the building. This power comes from the power distribution room or the
diesel generator room.
The storage battery power supply shall be led out from the low-voltage DC switchboard
in the power distribution room.
3-11
The power supply system, as the driving force of the switch, includes AC mains inlet
line, high-/low-voltage transforming station inside the office, diesel generator set,
rectifier, DC converter, AC inverter, storage battery pack and AC/DC distribution
equipment.
3.5.1 Requirements for AC Power Supply System
It is better to use the Mains as the AC power supply system. It is significant for
communication and maintenance to select a reliable and stable AC Mains source and
lead-in line. To ensure the high-quality communication, the diesel generator shall be
used to provide the AC backup power supply. To guarantee the safety of the power
supply, the toll office or large-capacity local office shall have two Mains lead-in lines.
AC voltage and its fluctuation range:

1) Three-phase 380 V ±10%, the frequency range is 50 Hz ±5%, the distortion rate of
line voltage waveform is less than 5%;
2) Single-phase 220 V ±10%, the frequency range is 50 Hz ±5%, the distortion rate of
line voltage is less than 5%;
3) The distortion rate of line voltage of the backup diesel generator set is usually less
than 5%, but should not be greater than 10%.
3.5.2 Requirements for DC Power Supply System
The DC power supply system includes the storage battery, rectifier, DC power
distribution and control panel.
I. Storage battery
As an important part of the DC power supply system of the switch, the storage battery
has the following functions:
z It stabilizes the voltage to maintain a stable operation of the switch.
z It stores electricity and provides backup power supply to the switch for a period of
time whenever there is a failure of the Mains Power Supply.
z It acts as a big capacitor to absorb the surge voltage from the rectifier. It also acts
as a filter to prevent the noise and working frequency interference to affect the
communication equipment.
The low/constant voltage charging mode is used to charge or discharge the storage
battery of the SPC switch. Table 3-4 shows its requirements.
3-12
Table 3-4 DC charge/discharge state and voltage requirements
Type State of Voltage of Number of

Charge/Dischar
of Mains Each Storage
ge State of DC Voltage Value
Power Power Storage Batteries in
Storage Battery
Supply Supply Battery Each Pack
When the Rectifier float
Float charging voltage
Mains is charging the 2.2 V 24
is up to 53.5 V
normal storage battery
When the The storage

Discharging voltage
Mains is battery 1.8 V
reaches 43.2 V
off discharges
DC
When the charging
-48V Automatically voltage reaches 56.4
charges the V, the constant voltage
When the
storage battery charging will
Mains
by the 10 hour automatically start, 2.35 V 24
comes
rate current when that is, the charging
back
the storage state automatically
battery is working changes to the float
charging mode.
II. Rectifier (primary power supply)
z Multiple rectifiers shall run in parallel and have current equalizers in between.
z The rectifiers shall have the current-limiting device.
z The output voltage of the rectifiers shall reach the "first-time charging" value of the
storage battery, that is, when the DC voltage is -48 V, it is 2.65×24=63.6 V.
z The rectifiers must be equipped with the DC Volt meter and Current meter.
z The efficiency of the rectifier should be above 85% and its power factor should be
above 0.8.
z The rectifiers can be cooled down automatically and can run continuously at full
load in a temperature range of 0~40 ˚C.
The output noise voltage (measured by psophometer, plus the weighted network) of the
rectifiers shall meet the requirements stated in Table 3-5.
3-13
Table 3-5 DC power voltage indices
Item DC Power used by the Switch
Nominal value (v) -48 V
Voltage fluctuation range

-40 V~-57 V
(v)
0~300 Hz _ 400 mV peak-peak value
300~3400
_ 2 mV weighted noise of the Psophometer
Hz
3.4
Single frequency 5 mV valid Wide band 100 mV
kHz~150
value valid value
kHz
Noise 150
Single frequency 3 mV valid
voltage kHz~200
value
kHz
200 Wide band 150

Single frequency 2 mV valid kHz~30 MHz
kHz~500
value
kHz 30 mV valid value
500
Single frequency 1 mV valid
kHz~30
value
MHz
III. DC power distribution and control panel
z Each control panel can control at least two packs of storage batteries. When a
storage battery pack fails or is disconnected from the power supply system, the
other pack will be able to supply power normally.
z Each control panel can access at least five rectifiers.
z The power supply equipment shall be fully automatic and unattended.
In addition, the SPC switch has strict restriction on the random transient noise, which is
abnormal working noise of the switch caused by external magnetic interference,
interference between local switch and grounding line. For transient noise, the shorter
the lasting time of the transient pulse is, the higher the allowed value of the transient
noise will be. Refer to Figure 3-6 for the allowed values.
3-14
1000
100 .
10 .
1.0
0.1 A
0.1µs 1µ s 10 µ s 100 µs
Figure 3-6 Allowed values of transient noise
When the rectifiers are float charging the storage batteries, the number of rectifiers in
use can vary according to the load. If one rectifier fails, it will automatically shut down
and the standby rectifier will automatically start running.
If the Mains fails, the storage batteries will discharge. When the Mains returns, it
automatically recharges the discharged storage batteries by the 10 hour rate current.
When the voltage reaches 56.4 V, it automatically changes to the constant voltage
charging mode.
When the storage batteries are fully charged, the charging state will be automatically
changed to the float charging state.
IV. Other requirements
z When the power supply equipment fails or works improperly, it will send out the
audio-visual alarm and the alarm information will be sent to the Operation &
Maintenance Center.
z When a branch line of the power supply system is short circuited, the whole power
distribution system should not be affected by the decrease of the voltage. The
peak voltage arcing that may occur at start does not impose any impact on the
switch.
3.5.3 Calculation of Current and Power Consumption
New parts such as Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), Erasable

Programmable Logic Device (EPLD) and Field Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) and
state-of-the-art design technologies are employed in the C&C08 Switch. Many
Integrated Circuit (IC) chips consume little power during static working state, thus
reducing the power consumption and heat dissipation of the whole system.
3-15
I. Current and power consumption of the boards
Refer to Table 3-6 for the working current and power consumption of the circuit boards
of the C&C08 Switch.
Table 3-6 Current and power consumption of the circuit boards of the C&C08 Switch
Static Dynamic
Static Power Dynamic Power
Board Name Current Consumpt Current Consumpt Remark
(A) ion (A) ion
(W) (W)
+5 V -5 V +5 V -5 V +5 V -5 V +5 V -5 V
CC02NOD(REV:
0.30 1.48 0.30 1.48
C)
CC02NOD 0.27 1.42 0.27 1.42

CC03EMA 0.32 1.70 0.32 1.7
CBC02SIG 0.19 1.01 0.19 1.01

CC034MFC 0.47 2.48 0.50 2.64 Dynamic 7 calls
Estimated
CC02CHD 0.45 2.78 0.57
dynamic value
(1) 16 DTMF
5.70 calls
0.21
1.13 (2) 16 pulse calls
0.21 5.70 1.07
1.13 (3) 8 DTMF calls
CC03AT0 0.54 0.09 2.77 0.47 0.15 5.70 1.07
0.84 (4) Adding 1
0.00 4.27 0.77
0.04 trunk circuit
7
DTMF call on
average
CC01NO.7 0.36 1.88 0.36 1.88
Use Max. value
CC02TST 0.20 0.03 1.04 0.16 0.35 0.06 1.78 0.32
for measurement
Off-hook by 8
0.0003 0.00 pairs of
CB02DSL 0.05 0.26 0.14 0.1 0.60 0.53
31 18 subscribers
dynamically
Off-hook by 16
0.0003 0.00 pairs of
CC07ASL 0.05 0.26 0.11 0.1 0.57 0.53
31 18 subscribers
dynamically
CC05DRV 0.52 0 2.68
3-16
Static Dynamic
Static Power Dynamic Power
Board Name Current Consumpt Current Consumpt Remark
(A) ion (A) ion
(W) (W)
Internal
subscriber line
0.36 1.88 test
CC05TSS 0.28 0 1.46 0 0
0.35 1.88 External
subscriber line
test
0.72 3.62
CB07MPU 0.70 3.63
0.66 3.31
C803DTM 0.27 1.49 0.27 1.49
II. Current and power consumption of the frames
1) Subscriber frame (configured with 2*DRV+19*ALS+1*TSS+2*PWX)

Refer to Table 3-7.
Table 3-7 Current and power consumption of the subscriber frame
Power
Voltage (V) Current (A)
(W)
All free load (before balance) 53.3 1.40 74.6
All free load (after balance) 53.3 1.32 70.4
32 calls 32, the rest are free load
53.05 2.76 146.6
(before balance)
32 calls 32, the rest are free load (after

53.05 2.73 144.8
balance)
32 calls 32, the rest are off- hook

52.07 7.13 371.3
(before balance)
32 calls 32, the rest are off- hook (after

52.07 7.07 368.1
balance)
2) Trunk frame (all trunk boards are activated)

See Table 3-8.
3-17
Table 3-8 Current and power consumption of the trunk frame
Power
(W)
8*DTM+1*PWC 53.0 0.38 20.14
8*DTM+2*PWC 53.0 0.51 27.03
16*DTM+1*PWC 53.0 0.77 40.81
3) Control frame (without ALM or MEM boards)

See Table 3-9.
Table 3-9 Current and power consumption of the control frame
Power
(W)
Just powered on (static) 53.09 2.09 110.9
After balance 53.09 2.12 109.6
Just powered on and running 53.09 2 .12 112.6

32 calls 32 (through the trunk and by
53.06 2.12 112.5
the MFC)
4) RSA frame (with 2*RSA+1*PWX)

See Table 3-10.
Table 3-10 Current and power consumption of the RSA frame
Power
(W)
Local end (after hot balance) 53.34 0.245 13.06
Remote end (after hot balance) 53.34 0.271 14.46
5) AM/CM and SPM

See Table 3-11.
Table 3-11 Current and power consumption of the AM/CM (in full configuration)
Power
(W)
Power distributing box (with a fan) 53.5 0.65 34.8
Fan box (with a fan) 53.5 1.04 55
3-18
Power
(W)
Communication control frame 53.1 2.83 150
Interface frame (E16) 53.1 5.3 280
Clock frame 53.1 0.28 15
Central switching network frame 53.1 16.0 850
Central processing frame 53.1 1.32 70
Shared resource frame 53.1 2.83 150
Service processing frame 53.1 2.83 150
III. Current and power consumption of the switch in full configuration
See Table 3-12.
Table 3-12 Current and power consumption of the SM
-53.5 V Current -53.5 V Power

Configuration Remark
(A) Consumption (W)
26 1390 Idle
4096/DT512
45 2410 Maximum busy
38 2037 Idle
6144/DT1024
52 2795 Idle
8192/DT1536
64 3442 Idle
10240/DT2048
74 3982 Idle
12288/DT2048
87 4630 Idle
14336/DT2560
97 5277 Idle
16384/DT3072
109 5817 Idle
18432/DT3072
3-19
IV. Selection of the capacity for the DC power distribution system
The SPC switch has strict requirements on the reliability, stability and AC working
voltage range of the DC power supply system (primary power supply). When designing
the capacity for the primary power supply, the final capacity of the switch and some
room for future expansion should be considered. In general, an high-efficiency power
supply equipment with high conversion efficiency is adopted, which works in the N+1
hot-backup mode and whose modules shall have equalizing current output devices.
The failure of one power module will not affect the normal operation of the DC power
distribution system.
3.5.4 Feed System of C&C08 Switch
The C&C08 Switch uses the multi-level distributed feed system, as shown in
Figure 3-7.
48V Distribution
Distribution Backplane
box
cabinet
+5V
Power supply cabinet
380V Distribution
Distribution
box Backplane
cabinet
Distribution
cabinet Distribution
Backplane
box
Figure 3-7 The multi-level distributed feed system of the C&C08 Switch
The feed system of a single cabinet consists of the distribution box on the top and the
bus bars on both sides. The current capacity of the power distribution box is 50 A and
that of the bus bar is 30 A. To improve the anti-interference capability of the feeder
cables and to reduce their impedance, the bus bars use the parallel copper strips as
conductor. The bus bars are insulated by filling epoxy resin in between, which is a
simple and safe method. All the connectors are of plug-in type, making the installation
and maintenance easier.
3.6 Requirements for Lighting System of Equipment Building
The equipment building is usually equipped with three kinds of lighting systems, which
are
z Normal lighting: powered by the Mains.
z Standby lighting: powered by the backup power supply (diesel generator).
3-20
z Emergency lighting: powered by the storage batteries after the normal lighting fails
and before the backup power supply starts working.
Table 3-13 lists the requirements for lightning proof grounding.
Table 3-13 Requirements for lightning proof grounding
Items Requirements
Use the reinforced concrete structure for the construction of the
equipment room.
Capital
Install the lightning proof device in the equipment room.
construction
The lightning proof grounding shares the same grounding body
with the protection grounding of the equipment room.
Use a special power transformer for the telecom offices.

Use the metal jacket or steel tube to cover the power cables
before burying them under the ground.
Ground both ends of the metal jacket or steel tube nearby and
properly.
TN-S power
Bury not less than 15 m of the cable under the ground..
system shall be
Install a gapless zinc oxide arrester to each of the three phase
adopted.
lines at the low tension side of the AC power transformer.
Ground nearby and correctly the enclosure of the transformer, the
neutral lines at the low tension side, and the metal steel tubes of
the power cables that connect with the enclosure of the
transformer.
Do not lead the AC/DC power cables in/out the communications
site in aerial mode.
After the low-voltage power cables is led into the equipment room,
install the lightning arrester for the power cables in the AC voltage
stabilizer and the AC power distribution panel (box). Ground the
Power cables arrester nearby and correctly.
leading in the For the equipment room built in the city, install the power supply
communication arrester with the nominal discharging current not less than 20 kA.
s site need to For the equipment room built in the suburbs subject to lightning
be equipped strike, install the power supply arrester with the nominal
with lightning discharging current larger than 60 kA.
arrester. For the equipment room in the mountain areas easily subject to
lightning strike, or in the separate high-rise buildings in the city,
install the power supply arrester with the nominal discharging
current larger than 100 kA.
The ground cable of the lightning arrester shall be one meter long
at most.
Connect the DC working ground (positive pole of the –48 V DC
power supply or the negative pole of the 24 V DC power supply)
Grounding of with the indoor collective ground cable nearby. The total ground
DC power cable shall meet the maximum load of the equipment.
distribution The power equipment must have the DC working ground cable,
which can connect the power equipment to the collective ground
cable.
3-21
Items Requirements
Ground all devices and auxiliary devices in the equipment room
properly.
Connect all protection ground cables to the collective protection
grounding bar.
Join all protection ground cables in one equipment room to one
Equipotential
protection grounding bar.
connection
Share the grounding network for the working ground and
protection ground.
Ground the cabling racks, suspended iron supports, frames or
enclosures, metal ventilation pipe, metal windows and doors
correctly.
Never connect the neutral line of the AC power cable with the
protection ground of any telecom equipment in the equipment
General
room.
requirements
Never install the fuse or switch on the ground cable.
for grounding
Make all ground cables as short as possible, and arrange them as
direct as possible.
The grounding resistance must be smaller than one ohm.

Keep the upper end of the grounding body at least 0.7 meters over
Grounding the ground. In cold areas, bury the grounding body below the
resistance frozen ground.
Measure the grounding resistance periodically to ensure the
effective grounding.
Do not arrange the signal cables overhead in the equipment room.
All signal cables must be led into the site below the ground.
Use the cables with metal jacket or put them into the metal pipe if
Routing of
they come out/in the equipment room.
signal cable
Keep the ground cable of the lightning arrester as short as
possible. Ground the idle lines inside the cable in the equipment
room.
Use the grounding ring or grounding bar for the collective

grounding cable.
Do not use aluminum cables as grounding cables.
Take measures to prevent electrification corrosion when
Collective
connecting different metal parts together.
grounding
Use the copper busbar as the collective grounding cable with the
cable
cross-sectional area not less than 120 mm2, or use the galvanized
flat steel that has the same resistance.
Insulate the collective grounding cable from the reinforcing steel
bars of the building.
Keep the grounding lead-in up to 30 meters long.
Grounding
Use the galvanized flat steel with cross-sectional area of 40 mm ×
lead-in
4 mm or 50 mm × 5 mm.
3-22
3.7 Requirements for Water Supply and Drainage System of

Equipment Building
The water supply and drainage system aims to supplying water to the equipment
building, draining the sewage and rainwater and installing the necessary fire fighting
facilities. The design shall conform to the relevant rules & regulations of the concerned
agencies of the country.
When building a fire fighting water pool according to the fire fighting specifications, you
must ensure that there is enough water in the pool to fight the fire for two hours when a
fire mishap occurs.
The water supply pipe, drainage pipe and rainwater pipe shall not go through the
equipment rooms. The fire hydrants shall not be placed in the equipment rooms,
instead, they shall be located in obvious and easy-to-find places near the corridor or
staircases.
3.8 Requirements for Air Conditioning and Ventilation

System of Equipment Building
I. Humidity and temperature
According to the performance characteristics, the SPC switch requires that the
temperature and humidity in the room shall be kept in a proper range. Over-low/-high
temperature or humidity in the switch room will affect the lifespan and communication
quality of the switch.
The over-high relative humidity for a long time may result in poor performance of some
insulation materials, crosstalk or even leakage. Sometimes the mechanical features of
the materials may be changed and the metal parts of the equipment may be prone to
rusting.
If the relative humidity in the switch room is over-low, the insulation washer will shrink
and the fastening screws will get loose. Moreover, electrostatic may generate easily in
dry conditions, which is harmful to the Complementary Metal-Oxide-Semiconductor
Transistor (CMOS) circuits on the switch.
If the room temperature is exceedingly high, the reliability and lifespan of the switch will
decrease since the high temperature accelerates the aging of the insulation materials.
Generally, the SPC switch shall work strictly within the temperature and humidity range
as listed in Table 3-14.
3-23
Table 3-14 Working environment for the normal operation of the switch
Equipment or
Temperature (˚C) Relative Humidity (%)
Switch Room
Long-term Short-term Long-term Short-term
working working working working
condition condition condition condition
Switch and its
˚ ˚ ˚ ˚
peripheral 15 C~30 C 0 C~45 C 40%~65% 20%~90%
equipment
Note:
z In the normal working environment, the temperature and humidity are measured at
the point that is 2 m above the floor and 0.4 m in front of the equipment (when there
is no protection plate in the front); otherwise, the measurements should be made at
the back of the switch.
z Under the short-term working conditions, the equipment is prohibited from working
continuously for more than 48 hours and 15 days accumulated in a year's time.
II. Heat
In general, the selection of air conditioner depends on the heat generated by the switch,
which is calculated with the formula shown below:
Q=0.82VA (Kcal/h)
Where,
Q – heat generated by the switch
V – DC voltage (V)
A – Average current consumption when busy (A)
0.82 – result of the factor (0.86) of electric energy converted into heat per watt
multiplied by the coefficient (0.95) of electric energy converted into heat in the switch
room, that is, 95% of 0.86
According to the specific average current consumption when busy (A), the heat
generated by the switch is as shown in Table 3-15.
3-24
Table 3-15 Heat generated by the switch
Equipment Capacity
Heat (Kcal/H) Equipment
(Number of Lines)
4000 1969
6000 2915
8000 3950
Maximum busy hour of the
10000 4895 switch
12000 5762 (1/4 of the subscribers talking
concurrently)
14000 6699
16000 7645
18000 8502
III. Air conditioner
The actual capacity of the air conditioner depends on the switch room area and the heat
dissipated by the switch. Refer to the Engineering Design Specifications for the
calculation method.
IV. Heat dissipation
The power distribution box on the top of the switch cabinet contains fans for heat
dissipation. There are open inlets in the front & back doors and the bottom
rodent-resistant net for leading-in the cold air to form cooling channels, as shown in
Figure 3-8. The rotating speed and wind volume of the fans can be adjusted according
to the heat generated. For a frame with high temperature, a fan can be installed on the
top of it. For a cabinet with high temperature, it can be equipped with a fan frame in the
center of it for further cooling. The fans are independent and are separately installed to
facilitate easy dismounting and maintenance.
When the room temperature is ≤30 ˚C and the relative humidity ranges between
40%~65%, the power consumption of the switch is quite low, due to the usage of Very
Large Integrated Circuits (VLSI), CMOS components and high frequency switched
power supply, thus allowing the switch to work in the natural ventilation conditions for a
long time.
3-25
Cabinet
Fan
Figure 3-8 Ventilation and heat dissipation
3.9 Requirements for Protection Systems
3.9.1 ESD Prevention
I. Causes and harms of ESD
In the telephone communication, electrostatic inductance has two kinds of sources: one
is outdoor electric fields such as high-voltage electricity transmission lines and lightning;
the other is internal systems such as indoor environment, floor materials and the switch
structure.
1) Causes of ESD in the switch room
The electric capacitance of the human body is about 200 PF on average. When a
person is walking, the friction between the shoe-sole and the floor makes ESD.
Therefore, the ESD of the human body is closely related to the materials of the
shoe-sole and the floor. It is also related to the state of material surface, indoor
temperature, humidity and the walking speed. For example, if the humidity is high and
the floor is well grounded, the electrostatic generated will be less; on the contrary, the
electrostatic generated will be more. The clothes worn by the maintenance personnel is
another factor. If the maintenance personnel wear chemical fiber clothes (made from
nylon or other synthetic materials), the friction-caused electrostatic accumulated on a
certain part can reach 10,000 V. When discharged in the air, the electrostatic may
generate sound and light. ESD is very harmful to IC chips.
2) Harms to the switch
3-26
More attention should be paid to the harms of ESD to the switch. According to relevant
records, 60% of the damage to the boards is caused by ESD. Moreover, ESD may
result in software failure, causing the electronic switch to function abnormally.
Table 3-16 Electrostatic voltage of human body
Type Voltage Range (V)

When a person is walking on the
12,000~39,000
insulated carpet
When a person is walking on the

4,000~13,000
insulated floor
When a person is sitting in a chair 500~3,000
Table 3-16 shows the rising range of the human body voltage within 40 seconds in three
situations. If the voltage is over 12 kV, it is considered dangerous, as shown in
Figure 3-9.
Body voltage (kV)
18 Standing on the unprocessed nylon floor in rubber shoes

16
14
12 Standing on the nylon type floor in rubber shoes
10
8
6
4 Standing on the polypropylene floor in leather shoes
2
Time (s)
0 10 20 30 40
Figure 3-9 ESD time diagram
The insulated materials can accumulate electrostatic, but the conductive materials
cannot. The insulated materials include plastic floor, nylon & chemical fiber carpet,
leather shoes, plastic shoes, chemical fiber work-suit and low humidity environment
(dry environment). In an environment with 60% humidity, it is preferable to install
semi-conductive floor or cement floor to prevent ESD.
Table 3-17 shows the sensitivity of different electronic components to ESD damage.
Table 3-17 The sensitivity of electronic components to ESD damage
Component Damage voltage (V)

MOS (IC) 100 — 200
CMOS (IC) 250 — 2,000
TTL circuits 300 —1,500
3-27
Component Damage voltage (V)

Field effect pipe 380 — 7,900
Mixed PCB 500
SCR 680 — 1,000
From Table 3-16 and Table 3-17, we can see the harms of ESD to the electronic
components. If a person is walking in a room without any ESD-preventive facilities, 12
kV electrostatic or above will be generated. At this time, if he/she touches any
electronic equipment, the electrostatic accumulated on his/her body can cause severe
damage to the equipment.
II. ESD-preventive measures
1) The foremost thing to be ensured is that the equipment should be well grounded.
The room must be floored with ESD-preventive carpet, plastic floor or terrazzo
floor. The plastic floor plated with semi-conductive materials must be grounded
with copper foils (the copper foils are placed between the cement floor and the
semi-conductive plastic floor and connected with the grounding line).
2) Dust is another nuisance to the switch. Dust or particles of other materials in the
switch room may result in poor contact of the plug-in units and metal connectors.
In high-humidity environment, dust may cause leakage. Equipment failures
caused by the accumulated dust occur frequently. Electrostatic adhesion may
occur, especially when the relative humidity of the switch room is somewhat low.
3) Appropriate temperature and humidity in the switch room is important for ESD
prevention. The over-high/-low relative humidity is harmful to the switch. The
over-high relative humidity will cause the metals to rust, while the over-low relative
humidity will cause ESD.
4) When contacting the circuit boards, you must wear the ESD-preventive wrist strap
and ESD-preventive work-suit.
3.9.2 Anti-Interference
I. Causes and harms of the interference
With the development of science and technology, more and more interfering signals
have emerged, causing crosstalk and noise and affecting the quality of the
communication. Serious interference may interrupt the normal operation of the switch.
These interference sources include:
z Interference from the corona discharge of the transmission lines;
z Electromagnetic Interference of the transformer;
z Interference from the switches;
3-28
z Interference from the power supply network waveform distortion during the
operation of large equipment;
z Radio Frequency Interference;
z Natural interference such as the earth’s magnetic field and external radiation.
The interference coming from both inside and outside of the switch or an application
system can affect the equipment in the following modes: capacitance coupling,
inductance coupling, electromagenetic wave radiation, public impedance (including the
grounding system) and conducting cables (power cable, signal cable and output cable).
The interference affects the switch through the input signal cable, output cable, power
cable, the grounding system and electromagnetic wave.
II. Anti-interference measures
Although the ICs have the anti-interference capability to some extent, they may
function abnormally when the outside noise goes beyond their anti-interference
tolerance limit, which may make the whole equipment not working properly. It is
impossible to eliminate all the interference sources or to shield all of them, but some
measures could be taken to suppress them.
z The high-frequency interference from the power supply network can affect the
switch by coupling from the initial coil of the transformer through the distributed
capacitor into the next coil. The solution to such a problem is to choose an
appropriate transformer and add a low-pass filter to the lead-in power cable.
z The interference caused by the transient changes in the power supply network
may be suppressed by directly leading the power supply into the switch from the
main transformer and adding a filter capacitor.
z When a switch is powered by the 50 Hz Mains with an interference mentioned
above, the voltage of the power supply network can change dramatically and will
generate over-voltage in case of lightning strike. This interference goes through
the power supply network to the power boards of the switch, which usually causes
the erroneous operation of processors of the switch. Only when effective
measures are taken to prevent the interference from power supply network, can
the switch use the power supplied by the Mains directly. A small-capacity switch
can be powered by a serial and steady-voltage power supply; a large-capacity
switch can be powered by the special electric generator set.
z The key to eliminate the interference caused by the ground system is to prevent
the formation of loops by the various ground wires, such as signal ground (both
analog and digital grounds) wire, power ground wire, protection ground wire,
shield ground wire, etc. The big loops are formed by the ‘distributed capacitor
effect’ and the common impedance of the grounding system which interferes with
the proper operation of the switch.
3-29
z If the building is not a high-rise one, the working ground of the switch shall be laid
down separately and far away from the grounding of the power equipment and the
lightning protection grounding.
z The electromagnetic interference caused by the surrounding environment has to
be prevented. In some communication equipment buildings, if there are
high-frequency radiation transmitters, their interference shall not go beyond the
preset limits. To prevent the noise of the electromechanical switch from affecting
the SPC switch (if they are housed nearby or in the same room), a wall should be
placed between the two kinds of switches and they should have separate power
supply equipment.
It is unnecessary to install the anti-interference metal net for the switch room. For
small offices, normally the rectifiers can be placed inside the switch room, but
should keep a distance from the SPC switch. The AC power cables shall be led in
from different directions or shielded by passing through metal pipes.
z The electromagnetic interference from the communication cables shall be
suppressed. With the high-frequency magnetic field (outdoor interference), the
sheath and core of cable will induct considerable longitudinal voltage. As the cable
core is asymmetric, the longitudinal voltage will generate a horizontal noise
voltage at the ends of the core, which causes interference. The two ends of the
metal skin of the cable sheath should be grounded for shielding, which can greatly
reduce the longitudinal voltage. As a result, the interference voltage is also
suppressed.
In addition, the following are effective measures to suppress the electromagnetic
interference.
a) Lower the voltage or current of the interference source.
b) Shorten the length of the cables or the distance between the conducting cables
so as to minimize the loop area to be interfered.
c) Place the insulated conducting cable under interference directly on the

grounding floor.
d) Use the dedicated grounding loopback cable to avoid public impedance.
e) Twist the signal cable and the loopback cable to eliminate the electromagnetic
interference mutually.
3.9.3 Over-Voltage Protection
The C&C08 Switch has a two-level over-voltage protection mechanism: The first level
is the protection device on the MDF, used to prevent the ill-effects of lightning; the
second level is the over-voltage and over-current protection circuits on the subscriber
boards and trunk boards, which conforms to the requirements stated in CCITT K.20
3-30
about resisting the lightning impact, power cable induction and contact experiments. In
the experiment, the C&C08 Switch resumes normal operation automatically without
manual intervention after the impact.
Exposure environment: 4000 V; 10 µs/1000 µs
Non-exposure environment: 1000 V; 10 µs/1000 µs
Power cable induction: Longitudinal electromotive force - 650 Vrms, 0.5 s
Power cable contact: 220 Vrms, 15 min, 600 ohm and 10 ohm.
3.9.4 Fire Protection
Fire hazard will cause communication breakdown, therefore, the fire protection system
in the equipment building must be well designed.
For small-capacity offices, a number of portable fire extinguishers should be placed in

easy-to-get locations in each room. For large-capacity offices, the SPC switch rooms
shall be facilitated with fixed fire fighting equipment.
The switch room shall have the automatic fire alarm system. In all the telecom buildings
with automatic fire alarm systems, the emergency lighting systems shall be well
planned and facilitated and the evacuation instructions shall be displayed on the
corridors, entrances or other vantage points in the building.
3.9.5 Quakeproof Protection
The quakeproof capability of a telecom building shall be one degree higher than that of
the local construction. The telecom buildings, which do not meet this standard, shall be
reinforced. The Architecture and Design Department shall be requested to implement
the reinforcement work.
When the C&C08 Switch is installed, the following measures can be taken to enable the
switch to resist earthquakes measured 7 degrees or above on the Richter scale.
z Pack the C&C08 Switch in multi-level aluminum alloyed racks, which are light but
firm. There are lockers for the circuit boards inserted, so the switch can be
transported with the boards installed.
z Fasten the racks to the ground through the glide rail and support.
z Connect the racks side by side with bolts in a row. In case two rows are required,
use bolts, nuts and angles to integrate them together.
z Firm the racks to the wall or to the ceiling if necessary for stability. The racks shall
be integrated with the building as a whole.
The maximum net weight of the C&C08 Switch is 200 kg. The rack should be designed
to withstand vibrations or earthquakes even though it does not bear such a large weight
3-31
in normal conditions. For special quakeproof requirements, two rows of racks can be
reinforced by connecting with one another or by connecting them to the wall. (See
Figure 3-10).
Connection rib
Figure 3-10 Illustration of the quakeproof reinforcement connection
3.9.6 Lightning Protection
If the equipment building is 15 meters high or above, its chimney and antenna should
be designed in accordance with the Lightning Protection Requirements for Civil
Buildings and Constructions.
In the lightning protection design, measures shall be taken to prevent the direct
lightning strike and the break-in of lightning current. In case of high-rise equipment
buildings, lightning strike from the side of the building shall be prevented, especially in
areas with frequent lightning. The lightning protection design is based on actual
situations. For example, connect the metal windows with the downlead, or install the
metal lightningproof belt on the outside walls at a certain interval to prevent the lightning
strike.
The main building housing the SPC switch shall have the following lightning protection
measures:
z Install lightning protection net or belt in parts of the building which are prone to
lightning strikes.
z Install the overhead lightning protection line or lightning arrester on the chimneys
or antenna.
z The downlead of the lightning protection devices shall not be less than 2 mm2, and
the interval should be more than 30 m.
3-32
z The concussion grounding resistance of the lightning grounding device shall not
be more than 10 ohm.
z Ground the outdoor cables and metal pipes before they enter the equipment
building.
z Install a lightning arrester at the entrance where the outdoor overhead line enters
the room.
z Use the reinforced concrete walls, beams, pillars and the base reinforcing steel
bars in buildings & constructions as the downleads of the lightning protection
devices.
Originally, the lightning protection grounding was separated from the grounding
systems of the telecom and power supply equipment and it was required that a large
space should be left between the three kinds of grounding systems. However, in a small
building, there is no enough area for this requirement. In practice, the three grounding
systems cannot be separated in many situations, so a joint grounding system should be
adopted, which combines the working ground, protection grounding, lightning
protection grounding and the grounding of industrial frequency AC power supply
system. The joint grounding value is higher, which should be determined according to
the minimum value of each grounding device.
The grounding body shall be the metal components (reinforcing steel bar in walls,
pillars) of the building, which are used as the downleads of the lightning protection
devices. The downleads shall be electrically connected to maintain a balanced electric
potential of the building.
3-33
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Specification for Equipment Grounding
Chapter 4 Specification for Equipment Grounding
4.1 General Principles

1) This specification applies to the lightning protection and grounding design for the
C&C08 Switch made by Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2) The lightning protection and grounding design shall take into consideration the
personnel & equipment safety and normal operation of communication equipment.
3) Besides, this design shall comply with relevant national regulations.
4) In case of difficulty in implementing some of the specification, a full statement of
the reasons shall be given in the design document. Resolution should be prepared
and submitted to related authorities for approval.
5) Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. is entitled to the power of interpretation regarding
this specification.
4.2 General Rules

1) The grounding cable, as thick and short as possible, shall be made of copper wire
so as to minimize high-frequency impedance.
2) The grounding terminal should be secured with bolts to ensure good contact.
3) To reduce mutual interference, the grounding cables shall not be in parallel or
twisted up with the signal cables.
4) The switch shall adopt joint grounding; the grounding cables of the cabinets of the
same module shall be securely connected to create an equipotential body.
4.3 Grounding of Switch
I. Grounding interconnection in the cabinet
1) To ensure equipotentiality between the digital grounding (+5 V GND), working

ground (GND) and protection grounding (PGND) in the cabinet, three kinds of
grounding cables shall be combined into one on the top of the cabinet (which is
already completed before delivery).
2) Grounding of rack
The rack and PGND shall be connected by a short conducting cable before delivery.
The cross-sectional area of the conducting cable shall not be less than 6 mm2. One end
of the conducting cable is secured to the GND terminal with nut and the other end to the
rack with fastening bolt.
4-1
II. Grounding interconnection between cabinets
1) Interconnection between adjacent racks

During installation, the racks in the same row shall be securely connected with bolts
and washers.
2) Grounding interconnection of adjacent racks
To ensure equipotentiality between the grounding of all the cabinets of the same
module, the GNDs of the cabinets shall be interconnected with copper conducting
cable on the top of cabinets. The connecting cable shall be 25 mm2 in cross-sectional
area and 1500 mm in length, as shown in Figure 4-1
3) Inter-cabinet busbar connection
The grounding cables of the cabinets of the same module shall be interconnected with
a busbar not less than 2 mm2 in cross-sectional area and 200 mm in length. The two
ends of the busbar are plugged in the GND of the busbars of adjacent cabinets
respectively, as shown in Figure 4-1.
4) Inter-cabinet grounding connection
When assembled cabinets and welded cabinets are in the same module and are placed
side by side, the +5 V GND terminal of the power distribution box of the welded cabinet
shall be connected with the GND terminal of the power distribution box of the
assembled cabinet by a short conducting cable.
5) Cabinet grounding
For each cabinet, one GND cable and one PGND cable shall be led out and connected
to the GND copper bar terminal and the PGND copper bar terminal of the DC power
distribution cabinet (or power distribution box) respectively.
The GND copper bar of the DC power distribution cabinet (or power distribution box)
shall be connected to the GND terminal of the DC power distribution panel through the
black plastic insulated copper core GND busbar. The PGND copper bar of the DC
power distribution cabinet (or power distribution box) shall be connected to the GND
terminal of the DC power distribution panel through two-color (yellow & green) plastic
insulated copper core PGND busbar.
The grounding cable of the cabinet shall not be less than 25 mm2 in cross-sectional
area. The cross-sectional area of the grounding busbar shall be calculated based on
engineering design, but that of the grounding busbar of the DC power distribution
cabinet shall not be less than 240 mm2 and that of the power distribution box shall not
be less than 90 mm2.
4-2
High-impedance DC
-48 V1
cabinet or power
-48 V1
-48 V2
PGND
-48 V1
-48 V2
PGND
-48 V2
PGND
distribution box
GND
GND
GND
To DC switchboard
-48 V2
-48 V1
Assembled Assembled Assembled

GND
cabinet cabinet cabinet
PGND
Equipment room PGND busbar
Figure 4-1 Grounding of assembled cabinets
III. Grounding of signal cables
The shielding layer of the HW cables or DT8K cables shall be grounded at both ends.
IV. Grounding of BAM
The power supply to the embedded industrial-computer BAM shall be led directly from
the -48 V and GND of DC power distribution cabinet, sharing GND with the switch.
Standalone server BAM, which operates on 220 V power supply, shall share the GND
with the switch through an inverter.
V. Grounding of alarm box
The power supply to the alarm box shall be led directly from the -48 V and GND of the
switch busbar, sharing GND with the switch.
VI. Grounding of terminal equipment and their connection cables
For the terminals connecting the switch, their AC power supply PGND shall be
connected with the shell of the switch. In other words, the PE end of the connector
board shall be disconnected from the AC neutral line and connected to the PGND cable
of the switch.
VII. Connection between the switch and transmission equipment
The shielding layer of the cable connecting the switch and transmission equipment
shall be grounded at both ends (the transmitting end shall be securely grounded while
the receiving end can be disconnected).
4-3
4.4 Earth Resistance Value
Usually, the earthing resistance of the telecommunication site where the base station
equipment is located is recommended to be less than 10ohm. And it also should
conform to the relative stipulation of the country..
4-4
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 5 Installation Preparation
Chapter 5 Installation Preparation
5.1 Technical Documents for the Project
The design unit entrusted by the customer shall provide the design of the equipment
building and the detailed construction drawing. The related documents and the
equipment are to be delivered by the manufacturer.
Project engineer of the contractor (HUAWEI) shall fill out the Survey Report of C&C08
Digital SPC Switching System on site.
The contract, agreement, equipment configuration list and the packing list shall be
provided.
5.2 Tools and Instruments
I. Common tools
Tools Material
Marking tools Long tape Ruler (1m) Marking pen Marking pin
Percussion drill
Hydraulic
hammer Φ6,
Drilling tools pressure Cleaner
Φ8, Φ10, Φ12,
percussion drill
Φ14, Φ16
Straight Double offset

Cross Socket
screwdriver ring spanner
Firming tools screwdriver 2#, wrench 10,
100, 150, 200, 10, 13, 16,
3#, 4# 13, 16, 18
250 18
Measuring Industrial
Tape Ruler Angle square
tools horizontal ruler
Brush Nipper Paper knife Bellows
Auxiliary tools
Electric iron Solder wire Ladder Forklift
Hand-held
Sharp-nose
Locksmith Diagonal pliers Vice electric drill
pliers
tools Handsaw Ripping bar Rubber
File
hammer
500 V megohmmeter (used to measure the

Instrument Multimeter
insulation resistance)
5-1
II. Special tools
1) Optical multimeter, optical connector and pigtail fiber

2) SMB coaxial trunk self-loop cable
3) SMB coaxial cable installation tool
4) Earth resistance tester
5) ESD-preventive wrist strap
6) Clamping pincers
7) Cable winding gun
8) Cable stripper
9) Crimper
5.3 Inspection of Equipment Building
The installation engineers shall make final confirmation on site in accordance with the
Engineering Technical Criterion of C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System, then fill out
the Installation Environment Inspection Form according to actual conditions. If all the
conditions are in conformity with the criteria, they would fill out the Project
Commencement Protocol and Project Milestone.
I. Inspection of contruction conditions
Check the area, height, bearing, trench layout of the equipment rooms and other
relevant items. If some items are not up to the criteria, the installation engineers shall
instruct the customer to alter or to do them again.
II. Inspection of environment conditions
Items to check:
1) If the lighting conditions of the equipment rooms are in conformity with the
equipment maintenance requirements; if the normal lighting, standby lighting and
emergency lighting systems are all facilitated.
2) If the air conditioning and ventilation system can maintain sound temperature and
humidity of the equipment building.
3) If there are effective ESD-preventive measures.
4) If the equipment building is facilitated with sufficient fire fighting equipment.
5) If the equipment building is designed to be quakeproof enough; if the floor is solid
enough for firm installation of the C&C08 Switch cabinets.
6) If the equipment building has lightning protection facilities.
III. Inspection of power supply conditions
Items to check:
5-2
1) If there is a complete set of AC power supply system. Apart from the Mains lead-in
lines, the diesel generator shall be there to provide backup power.
2) If the DC power distribution equipment is up to the requirements of the switch, with
stable voltage and its output value is within the specified range.
3) If there are storage batteries with sufficient capacity, keeping the switch running in
case of power down.
4) The AC power distribution system shall have independent AC safety ground.
IV. Inspection of auxiliary equipment
The switch is a part of the network equipment. Before installing the switch, check if the
transmission equipment has been installed. For example, check if the optical
transceiver has been installed and debugged, if the optical fiber has been laid and if the
cabling rack and cable distribution frame have been installed.
V. Inspection of other facilities
Tables, chairs, power sockets and a telephone set are essential during the installation
and all other facilities that might be of use on site should be made available.
VI. Inspection of grounding cables
A good grounding is the basic condition for the switch to run well, and it is also
important for lightning protection and anti-interference. It is required to inspect the site
grounding to check if it complies with the Grounding Criterion.
5-3
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 6 Open Box Inspection (OBI)
Chapter 6 Open Box Inspection (OBI)
6.1 Opening Requirements
After the project begins, the project supervisor should check the products together with
the customer.
Check the following points:

z Whether the total number of products is consistent with the packing list attached to
the packing case.
z Whether the arrival place is the installation site.
z Whether the packing case is good condition.
z Whether the cabinet is placed upside down.
If the outer package is damaged or soaked; or the equipment is soaked and becomes
rusty, stop unpacking and find the cause. Feed back the situation to the local Huawei
representative office.
Note:
To protect the equipment and find out the cause, move the unpacked equipment indoor
for proper storage, and take a photo for the storage site, the rusty or corroded
equipment, packing cases, packaging materials. Keep these photos and store the
unpacked packing cases and packaging materials.
If the outer package is in good condition, follow the procedure below to unpack and
check the equipment:
1) Unpack the case labeled "contains Packing List”, and take out the Packing List.
Check the case according to the Packing List.
2) If shortage and miscarriage occur, fill in the Cargo Shortage and Miscarriage
Report.
3) If cargo damage occurs, fill in the Cargo Replacement Application Form.
4) Sign the Packing List together with the customer.
6-1
Warning:
In transporting and moving equipment, components or parts, to avoid their colliding

with doors, walls or shelves.
Never touch the uncoated surface of equipment, parts or components with sweat
soaked or dirty gloves.
6.2 Opening
Warning:
Do not put the wooden case upside down. Otherwise, the equipment will suffer severe
damages.
To unpack a case, follow the procedure below:
6.2.1 Wooden case
Wooden cases are generally used to pack heavy objects like racks, batteries, and so on.
A rack is usually packed with wooden boards, steel edges, tongues and foamed angle
wraps.
It is recommended to move the packing case into or near the equipment room (if
possible) to avoid damage to the cabinet during the transportation. The unpacking
procedure is as follows:
1) Insert one end of the ejector lever into a hole of the tongue on the cover of the
wooden case.
2) Turn the ejector lever to straighten the tongue, as shown in Figure 6-1. You can
also use a screwdriver or a hammer to handle the tongue.
6-2
Woodenboard Steeledge
Tongue
Spanner
Figure 6-1 Straighten the tongues
3) After straightening all the tongues on the cover, remove the cover, as shown in
Figure 6-2.
Figure 6-2 Remove the cover
6-3
4) Straighten all the tongues that join the wooden boards around the wooden case
and remove the wooden boards, as shown in Figure 6-3.
Figure 6-3 Remove all left wooden boards
Unpack other cases in the same way.
When handling the cabinet, hold on the solid places such as the upper cable rack or
bone frame. Do not use too much force on places with poor rigidity, such as cable
supports, cable fixing beams, to avoid any damage to the cabinet or any accident.
Remove the lining board of the rack at the place where the cabinet is to be installed.
Otherwise, boards and signal cables may be damaged in the conveyance.
6.2.2 Carton
Cartons are usually used to pack cables, circuit boards and terminal devices. During
transportation, these circuit boards are usually put in anti-static bags. When unpacking
the circuit boards, you need to take anti-static measures to avoid any damage to these
boards.
Meanwhile, pay attention to the temperature and humidity of the environment. To keep
the anti-static bag dry, you need to put desiccant in the bags so that it can absorb
moisture in the bags. After transporting the equipment to a place with higher
temperature and humidity, do not unpack it immediately until 30 minutes later.
6-4
Otherwise, moisture will condense on the surface of the equipment, causing damage to
it.
To open a carton, do as follows:

1) Check the types and quantity of boards inside the carton according to labels.
2) Cut the straps using diagonal pliers.
3) Cut the tapes along the seams of the carton cover using a knife. To avoid
damaging equipment inside, do not apply too much force.
4) Open the carton and take out the foam materials.
5) View the labels of boards, and check whether the number of boards is consistent
with what is specified on the label of the carton. Then, take out the boards.
6) Check the number and type of boards against the Packing List, and then accept
them.
Figure 6-4 shows the carton packed with boards.
(1) Board label (2) Foam materials (3) Boards

(4) Anti-static bag (5) Board box
(6) Pressure-sensitive Adhesive Tape (7) Carton label (8) Strap (9) Carton
Figure 6-4 The carton packed with boards.
6-5
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 7 Installation of Assembled Cabinet
Chapter 7 Installation of Assembled Cabinet
7.1 Introduction to Assembled Cabinet
7.1.1 General Introduction
Compared with welded cabinet, assembled cabinet is a new type of cabinet, which
can keep off the dust more effectively. It has a pleasant look, as its cabling is done in
an appropriate way, and the rack is coated with zinc electroplating with iridescent
yellow chromate conversion coating.
7.1.2 Busbar
The busbars are equipped at both sides inside the standard cabinet, as shown in
Figure 7-1.
PGND is the grounding for current discharge.
S-48 V is the negative polarity of the secondary power supply board.
GND is the positive polarity of -48 V power supply, that is, working ground.
GND** is the grounding interconnection terminal between racks.
1B-48 V, 2B-48 V and 3B-48 V are negative polarities of the –48 V feed.
7-1
Figure 7-1 Schematic diagram for the busbar of assembled rack
7.1.3 Frame
The frame is used to combine various boards into an independent unit.
The types of frames include main control frame, trunk frame, clock frame and
subscriber frame.
A frame is made up of circuit boards, backplane, front/back beam, left/right side plates
and guide rail, as shown in Figure 7-2.
7-2
(2)
(1)
(3)
(4)
(10)
(5)
(9)
(8)
(6)
(7)
(1) Upper front beam (2) Left side plate (3) Upper Guide rail
(4) Upper back beam (5) Right side plate (6) Lower Guide rail
(7) Dummy panel (8) Board (9) Lower front beam
(10) Board nameplate
Figure 7-2 Schematic diagram of frame
7.1.4 Backplane
Generally, a backplane is a four-layer Printed Circuit Board (PCB). The boards in the
same frame are interconnected through the printed lines on the backplane. Thus, the
cables at the back of the backplane are substantially reduced and the reliability of the
overall system is greatly enhanced.
7.2 Installing Supports and Guide Rails
P550 series supports are used for installing assembled cabinet in the switch room
with antistatic floor.
7.2.1 Introduction to Supports and Guide Rails
The supports are used to raise the rack so as to facilitate the flooring and cabling in
the switch room. The supports are welded by steel plates. Insulating pad should be
placed under the supports and insulation covering around the expansion bolts, so that
the equipment is insulated from the ground before grounding cable is connected,
which efficiently meets the insulation requirement.
7-3
Guide rails are installed to slide the rack back and forth, facilitating position
adjustment. The guide rails can connect several supports and several racks together
to provide stability and proper alignment. Due to their elastic property, the guide rails
can absorb the vibrations.
I. Types of the supports
P550 series supports are of two kinds: side supports and shared supports.
Side supports are used to prevent protrusion of horizontal supports at both sides so
as to facilitate combination with other racks.
Shared supports are used to combine racks, which have the merits of on-site
installation convenience and cost saving.
The profile of side support and shared support is as shown in Figure 7-3.
1
1
2
2
3 4
4 3 5
6 7
(1) Connecting hole (2) Upper support (3) Silk-screen mark of antistatic floor height
(4) Lower support (5) Mounting hole (6) Side support
(7) Shared support
Figure 7-3 Profile of P550 series supports
II. Support assemblies
There are four types of P550 series support assemblies, namely three adjustable
assemblies and one fixed assembly. For the adjustable heights of each assembly,
refer to the table below.
7-4
Table 7-1 Table of adjustable heights of P550 series support assemblies
Assembly Applicable height of antistatic floor (mm)

I 230~270
II 271~350
III 351~510
Customized based on the actual floor height (the min. height:
IV
160 mm)
Note:
The antistatic floor height refers to the distance between the upper surface of the
antistatic floor and the cement floor.
The heights of the P550 series assembly I, II, III can be adjusted steplessly within their
adjustable ranges. The adjustment is achieved by the relative movement of the upper
and lower supports.
P550 series IV assemblies are fixed supports. They apply to ultra-high and ultra-low
floors. The lowest applicable floor height of this assembly is 160 mm.
7.2.2 Quantity Calculation of Supports and Guide Rails
I. Quantity of supports
N+1 supports are used for the installation of N combined cabinets. Two adjacent
cabinets use one shared support, that is, N cabinets are supported by N+1 supports,
including two side supports and N-1 shared supports, as shown in Figure 7-4.
7-5
L(
L= (1)
n×
80
0)
(1) Support
Figure 7-4 Schematic diagram of support quantity
II. Quantity of guide rails
The outer dimensions of guide rails are shown in Figure 7-5. The length of a single
guide rail is 1,600 mm or it can be cut to 800 mm. One guide rail is attached to each
cabinet and it is shipped with the supports.
Figure 7-5 Schematic diagram of the outer dimensions of guide rails
7-6
7.2.3 Installation Flow
Start
Locate the support
Install the support
Insulation test N
of Support
Install the guide rail
Install the rack
Install the floor bracket
Insulation test of N
the floor bracket
Recover the floor
End
Figure 7-6 Installation flow chart
7.2.4 Locating Supports
I. Drawing
Determine the installation position of the supports according to the benchmark

dimensions specified in the construction plan and the support dimensions. Mark
several points for line drawing with steel tape and draw two straight lines parallel to
the benchmarks, with the spacing of 460 mm. Then determine the hole positions for
the first support on the two lines as designed. With these holes as reference, mark the
mounting hole positions for the second support. To ensure the accuracy of the hole
size, repeated measurements are required when all the hole positions are marked.
7-7
Figure 7-7 illustrates the mounting hole positions for support; Figure 7-8 illustrates the
mounting hole positions for a single cabinet; Figure 7-9 illustrates the mounting hole
positions for two cabinets; Figure 7-10 illustrates the mounting hole positions for
multiple combined cabinets.
(1)
(3)
(2)
(4)
(1) Position for expansion bolt M12 (2) Position for expansion bolt M12
(3) Side support (4) Shared support
Figure 7-7 Schematic diagram of mounting hole positions for support
7-8
(1)
(2)
(4) (3)
(1) Cabinet edge line (side panel excluded) (2) Position for expansion bolt M12
(3) Edge line of cabinet door (4) Inner wall or reference property
Figure 7-8 Schematic diagram of mounting hole positions for single cabinet
7-9
(1)
(2)
(4)
(3)
Figure 7-9 Schematic diagram of mounting hole positions for two cabinets
(1)
(2)
(4)
(3)
Figure 7-10 Schematic diagram of mounting hole positions for multiple combined
cabinets
7-10
II. Drilling
The support is firmed onto the ground with expansion bolts M12. A percussion drill is
used to drill holes and the bit should be Φ14.
Note to keep the drill bit vertical to the ground during drilling. Hold the drill tightly with
two hands to ensure it in the right direction; otherwise, vibrations may damage the
ground and make the hole not straight.
Before measuring the depth of the hole, remove the dust with a cleaner. The depth of
the hole should be the length of the expansion bolt tube plus that of the drill bit. The
depth of all the holes should be the same.
If the ground is too hard or smooth to settle the drill bit, punch a pit with a center punch
before drilling.
Drawing lines and drilling holes are the fundamental work for hardware installation. If
the accuracy cannot be ensured, the future work will be greatly affected. Thus, good
quality of this procedure is the precondition to guarantee the quality of the overall
construction.
7.2.5 Installing Supports
I. Mounting expansion bolts
Before mounting the expansion bolts, clean up the dust inside and around the holes
with a cleaner. Then measure the diameter of the holes and place the supports on the
marked points to check whether they match respectively. For the holes with large
deviation, you need locate and drill them again.
Remove the washer and nut from the expansion bolt, put the expansion bolt and its
tube into the hole and strike directly on the bolt with a rubber hammer until the tube of
the expansion bolt is completely driven into the ground.
II. Adjusting support height
Adjust all the supports to the prescribed heights according to the floor height
measured and with reference to the silk-screen mark of the antistatic floor height on
the support. Tighten the height-locking bolt to 45 Nm with a Torque spanner. Fasten
the bolts in the middle first and then those at both sides, as shown in Figure 7-11.
III. Installing and firming supports
Clean the surface of the ground and the support. Add the insulation pads and
coverings for the support in accordance with Figure 7-11. Align the support mounting
7-11
holes with the expansion bolts and then firm the support onto the ground with the nuts
and the washers. The tightening Torque should be 45 Nm.
The nuts should be tightened one by one to reduce the stress between the bolts and
support and to facilitate the adjustment of the support during the installation. The
other supports should be installed and firmed as mentioned above. Figure 7-11 shows
the schematic diagram of securing the support onto the ground.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(2) (2)
(4) (3)
(1)
(5) (2)
(6) (4)
(7)
(8)
(5)
(9)
(9) (6)
(10)
(7)
(10)
(11)
(8)
(12) (11)
(13)
(1) Silk-screen mark of antistatic floor height

(2) Height-locking bolt (3) Sides
(4) Middle (5) Nut M12 (6) Spring washer 12
(7) Washer (8) Support insulation covering (9) Support insulation pad
(10) Expansion bolt (11) The sequence of fastening the height-locking bolts: first those
M12×80 in the middle, then those at both sides
(12) Side support (13) Shared support
Figure 7-11 Schematic diagram of the connection between support and ground
By adding insulation pad under the support and insulation covering onto the
expansion bolt (see Figure 7-11), the equipment is insulated from the ground before
the grounding cable is connected.
7.2.6 Insulation Test for Support
Set the multimeter to the ohm range. Contact the support and the expansion bolt with
the two probes of the multimeter respectively to measure the resistance between
them. If the multimeter shows that the circuit is disconnected, proceed with the next
step of installation. Otherwise, it means that the support is not insulated from the
ground. Then check whether the insulation covering and the insulation pad are
7-12
installed or whether there is any damage to the insulation parts. Repeat 2.5 III
Installing and firming supports and perform the insulation test again.
7.2.7 Installing Guide Rails
I. Mounting square nuts
Before installing the guide rails, mount the square nuts used for fixing the floor bracket
components and guide rails into the lower trough of the guide rails. The guide rail of
each side of each cabinet should be mounted with five square nuts (three of which are
used to fix the floor bracket components). Note that the square nuts must be mounted
before the guide rails are installed. For the profile of the square nut, see Figure 7-12.
Each cabinet is equipped with six sets of floor bracket components, among which
three sets are placed on the guide rail at each side of the cabinet.
II. Leveling and fastening guide rails
Fasten the guide rails on the support with square nuts, flat washers, spring washers
and bolts M12*20. The installation is as shown in Figure 7-12.
First screw the bolts M12*20 with spring washers and flat washers (not to screw down
them, but to an extent that the bolts will not fall), then insert them into the mounting
holes of the support. Next, measure the level at different segments of the guide rails
with an industrial horizontal ruler (both horizontally and vertically) to see whether the
bubble in the horizontal ruler stays in the middle. If not, adjust the guide rail by adding
or removing washer. If the guide rail is horizontal, screw down the bolts and then
check if it is still horizontal, as shown in Figure 7-13. If not, loosen the bolts and adjust
by adding or removing washers until the guide rail is horizontal again. The procedure
is the same as above. After the guide rails are fastened, the following requirements
should be met:
z Single guide rail must be horizontal in its longitudinal direction.
z Two parallel guide rails must be horizontal in the traverse direction.
z The distance between the centers of the two parallel guide rails should be 460
mm ± 1 mm.
z If there are multiple guide rails installed end to end, align them with a straight
string to ensure that all these guide rails are in the same line. Two adjacent guide
rails should be of the same height and there should be no seam at the joint.
7-13
(1)
(1) (2)
(3)
(2) (4)
(3) (5)
(6)
(7)
(1) Guide rail (2) Installation direction (3) Washer

(4) Square nut (5) Flat washer 12 (6) Spring washer
(7) Bolt M12*20
Figure 7-12 Schematic diagram of fastening guide rails onto the support
(1) (3) (1) (3)

(2)
(4)
(6)
(1)
(7)
(5)
(7)
(6)
(1) Industrial horizontal (2) Measurement in longitudinal (3) Bubble in industrial

ruler direction horizontal ruler
(4) Guide rail (5) Measurement in traverse direction (6) Side support
(7) Shared support
Figure 7-13 Schematic diagram of leveling guide rails on the support
7-14
7.2.8 Installing Racks
Refer to 7.4.
7.2.9 Installing Floor bracket and Cover Plate
The floor bracket is used to support the antistatic floor. The purpose of installing cover
plate is to insulate the support and antistatic floor and to shield the seams on the
bottom of the cabinet.
I. Fixing floor bracket
Determine the location of the floor bracket and secure the fixed angle plates onto the
guide rails with bolts M12*20, flat washers and spring washers, as shown in
Figure 7-14.
II. Installing cover plate and adjustable angle plates
Secure the cover plate and adjustable angle plates onto the fixed angle plates with
bolts M8*30, flat washers, spring washers and insulation coverings, as shown in
Figure 7-14.
(1) Cover plate (2) Nut M8 (3) Bolt M12*20

(4) Spring washer 12 (5) Flat washer 12 (6) Fixed angle plate
(7) Square nut (8) Guide rail (9) Adjustable angle plate
(10) Flat washer 8 (11) Spring washer 8 (12) Bolt M8*30
(13) Insulation covering
Figure 7-14 Schematic diagram of firming floor bracket, cover plate and guide rail
7-15
III. Determining the location of adjustable angle plate
Loosen the bolt M8*30. Move the adjustable angle plate upward or downward so that
its top surface is at the same level as the antistatic floor. Then screw down the bolt
M8*30.
7.2.10 Insulation Test for Floor bracket
Set the multimeter to the ohm range. Contact the support and the adjustable angle
plate with the two probes of the multimeter respectively to measure the resistance
between them. Normally the circuit should be in disconnected status; if not, it means
that the support is not insulated from the antistatic floor. Then disassemble the floor
bracket assemblies to check whether the insulation plate and the insulation covering
have been installed or whether there is no damage to them. Repeat the second and
the third step of 2.9 to reinstall the floor bracket and perform the insulation test again.
7.2.11 Flooring
Cut the antistatic floor around the cabinet according to the actual condition and
recover the floor.
7.3 Installing Foot-Anchor Plate
Foot-anchor plate assembly M16 is used for the installation of assembled cabinet in
the switch room without antistatic floor.
7.3.1 Function of Foot-Anchor Plate
If the switch room is not installed with antistatic floor, cabinets have to be installed on
the cement floor. In this case, foot-anchor plate assembly M16 is used to support and
secure the cabinets. Considering that the ground of the switch room is uneven, the
feet adopted are height-adjustable.
There are insulation parts in the foot-anchor plate assembly so that the equipment is
insulated from the ground before grounding cable is connected.
7.3.2 Components of Foot-Anchor Plate Assembly
The components of foot-anchor plate assembly are shown in Figure 7-15.
7-16
(1 ) (9 )
(2 ) (1 0 )
(3 )
(4 )
(5 )
(6 )
(7 )
(8 )
(1) Nut M12 (2) Spring washer 12 (3) Big flat washer
(4) Support insulation (5) Anchor plate
(6) Insulation plate
covering
(7) Expansion bolt M12*80 (8) Expansion tube (9) Foot M16
(10) Nut M16
Figure 7-15 Schematic diagram of foot-anchor plate assembly
7.3.3 Installing Foot-Anchor Plate Assembly
I. Drawing
Determine the position of the mounting hole of the anchor plate according to the
benchmark dimensions specified in the construction plan and the foot position. Mark
several points for line drawing with steel tape and draw two straight lines parallel to
the benchmarks and with the spacing of 460 mm using a carpenter's ink marker. Then
determine the mounting hole positions and the foot positions for the first cabinet on
the two lines according to the design. With these holes as reference, mark the
mounting hole positions and foot positions for other racks. To ensure the accuracy of
the hole size, repeated measurements are required after all the hole position lines are
marked. Figure 7-16 illustrates the mounting hole and foot position for a single cabinet;
Figure 7-17 illustrates the mounting hole and foot position for two cabinets;
Figure 7-18 illustrates the mounting hole and foot position for multiple or multi-row
cabinets.
7-17
(1)
(2)
(3)
(5)
(4)
(1) Cabinet edge line (side panel (2) Expansion bolt M12 (Drill bit Φ16 is recommended)
excluded)
(3) Cabinet foot position (4) Edge line of cabinet door
(5) Inner wall or reference property
Figure 7-16 Schematic diagram of mounting hole and foot positions for a single
cabinet
7-18
(1)
(2)
(3)
(5)
(4)
(1) Cabinet edge line (side panel (2) Expansion bolt M12 (Drill bit Φ16 is recommended)
excluded)
(3) Cabinet foot position (4) Edge line of cabinet door
(5) Inner wall or reference property
Figure 7-17 Schematic diagram of mounting hole and foot positions for two cabinets
7-19
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(6)
(5)
(1) Cabinet edge line (side (2) Expansion bolt M12 (Drill (3) Φ50 (all)
panel excluded) bit Φ16 is recommended)
(5) Edge line of cabinet door (6) Inner wall or reference
(4) Cabinet foot position
property
Figure 7-18 Schematic diagram of mounting hole and foot positions for multiple and
multi-row of cabinets
II. Drilling
At the mounting hole positions marked on the ground, drill holes to the depth of 70 mm
with drill bit Φ16.
III. Mounting expansion bolts
Remove the washer and nut from the expansion bolt. Put the expansion bolt and the
tube vertically into the hole and strike the bolt with a rubber hammer until the tube of
the expansion bolt is completely stricken into the ground.
IV. Installing anchor plate
The cabinet foot shall be installed before the cabinet is positioned. For foot installation,
refer to 7.4 Installation of Assembled Racks.
7-20
If the four feet of the cabinet match the marks on the ground, it indicates that the
cabinet is in right position. Add insulation plate, anchor plate, insulation covering and
washers onto the expansion bolt. The opening of the anchor plate should be pressed
against the foot. Then screw down the nut. The profile of the fixed anchor plate is as
shown in Figure 7-23 (b).
7.4 Installing Assembled Racks
7.4.1 Connecting Structure of Assembled Racks
The connecting sequence of various mechanical parts is as follows:

1) Determine whether to install base or feet according the installation environment.
If the racks are to be installed on the antistatic floor, install the base first, then fix
the assembled racks onto the supports; If the racks are to be installed on the
cement floor, install the foot-anchor plate assembly M16 first, then fix the
assembled racks on the ground, as is shown in Figure 7-19 (a)~Figure 7-23 (b).
2) Adjust the assembled racks and connect them from the top and the bottom, as is
illustrated in Figure 7-24 (a) and Figure 7-24 (b).
3) If upward cabling is adopted, install the cabling rack; if downward cabling is
adopted, install the cabling trough, as illustrated in Figure 7-25 (a)~Figure 7-69.
4) Install the reinforcement parts of the assembled racks, as illustrated in Figure
7-70~ Figure 7-72.
5) Connect and secure several rows of assembled racks, as illustrated in Figure
7-73 (a) and Figure 7-73 (b).
6) Install the assembled racks and the doors, as illustrated in Figure 7-74 (a) ~
Figure 7-83 (b).
When all the above steps are completed, check again to ensure that the installation is
secure, correct and reliable.
7.4.2 connecting Assembled Rack and Base or Foot
To install assembled racks on the antistatic floor, first you need install the base, which
connects the rack and the guide rail on the support. If the assembled racks are
installed on the cement floor, first you need install the foot-anchor plate assembly M16.
During the installation, make sure that the distance between the foot bottom and the
rack bottom is 55 mm. The installation of base and foot is as shown in Figure 7-19(a)
~ Figure 7-20(b).
7-21
(1 ) (2 )
(3 )
(4 )
(1) Base (2) Flat washer 16 (3) Bolt M16*35

(4) Spring washer 16
Figure 7-19 (a) Schematic diagram of connecting assembled rack and base
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Base (2) Rack (3) Bolt M16*35

Figure 7-19 (b) Schematic diagram of completed connection between assembled
rack and base
7-22
(1 )
(2 )
(3 )
(1) Rack (2) Fastening nut (3) Foot M16

Figure 7-20 (a) Schematic diagram of connecting assembled rack and foot
(1)
(2)
(1) Fastening nut (2) Foot M16

Figure 7-20 (b) Schematic diagram of completed connection between assembled
rack and feet
7.4.3 Connecting and Securing Assembled Racks and Guide Rails
After the assembled racks have been installed with base or feet, they will be installed
on the guide rails of the supports or the cement floor.
In the case of the installation on the support, use bolt M16*20, spring washer 16, flat
washer 16, square nut M16 to secure the base of the assembled rack onto the guide
rails, as shown in Figure 7-21 (a) and Figure 7-21(b).
1) Uplift the assembled racks onto the supports one by one. Align the four mounting
holes of the base with the fixing trough of the guide rails. Inset the square nut
7-23
M16 through the trough opening of the guide rail into the mounting hole of the
base, and then use bolt M16*20 to secure the connection.
2) First secure the connection between the outermost assembled rack and the
guide rails. Adjust the level and check the perpendicularity. Then, take the first
assembled rack as benchmark, adjust and secure other assembled racks one by
one.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(8)
(4)
(7)
(6)
(5)
(1) Bolt M12*20 (2) Spring washer 12 (3) Flat washer 12

(4) Guide rail (5) Support (6) Square nut M12
(7) Base (8) Rack
Figure 7-21 (a) Schematic diagram of connecting rack and guide rail
7-24
(1) Rack (2) Base (3) Guide rail

(4) Support (5) Bolt M12*20
Figure 7-21 (b) Schematic diagram of the completed connection between rack and
guide rail
For the installation of assembled rack on the cement floor, install the feet onto the rack
first and then place the rack on the marked position on the ground, as shown in
Figure 7-22.
(1)
(2)
(1) Fastening nut M16 (2) Leveling nut M16

Figure 7-22 Schematic diagram of assembled rack installed on the cement floor
7-25
After a row of racks are in position, turn the leveling nuts of the feet to adjust the
distance between the assembled racks and the ground starting from the first
assembled rack on the left. Then the racks in the same row will be in the same height
and ensure that the perpendicularity deviation between the assembled racks and the
ground not more than 3 mm. To get the proper alignment, adjust each assembled rack
from the left to the right and the same method is applied to the second and the third
row of assembled racks. Then screw down the fastening nuts M16 of the feet so that
the feet are pressed against the racks. Make sure that the connection between the
feet and the assembled racks is secure and reliable.
Next, use anchor plate assembly to secure the feet onto the ground with expansion
bolts. Add spring washer, flat washer, insulation covering, anchor plate and insulation
plate onto the expansion bolt. Press against the foot with anchor plate and then screw
down the nut to secure the foot. Follow the same method to secure all the other feet
as illustrated in Figure 7-23 (a) and Figure 7-23(b). Check the weight bearing of each
foot. If any foot is not secure enough, adjust it so that it can bear the weight.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(1) Nut M12 (GB6170-86) (2) Spring washer 12 (GB93-87) (3) Flat washer
(4) Insulation covering (5) Anchor plate (6) Insulation plate
(7) Expansion bolt M12×80
Figure 7-23 (a) Schematic diagram of securing assembled rack onto the ground
7-26
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Rack (2) Foot-anchor plate assembly (3) Foot

Figure 7-23 (b) Schematic diagram of the completed secure of assembled rack on
the ground
7.4.4 Connecting and Securing Adjacent Assembled Racks
After all the assembled racks are in position, they should be lined up and connected
with each other. Insert the bolt into the connecting hole (there are four holes totally,
two on the top and two at the bottom) at one side of the assembled rack. Then add flat
washer, spring washer and nut onto the bolt to connect two assembled racks. Bolts
M3×10 are used to connect and secure the cover and the decorating plate as well as
the top decorating plate and the side panel of the adjacent assembled racks.
During the installation, take care to avoid the scratches on the racks by the tools and
make sure that the racks are kept in good condition.
The connection of the assembled racks is illustrated in Figure 7-24 (a) and
Figure 7-24 (b).
7-27
(1)
(2)
(3) (6)
(4) (3)
(5) (4)
(5)
(7)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(1) Rack (2) Bolt M8*170 (3) Flat washer 8

(4) Spring washer 8 (5) Nut M8 (6) Bolt M8*90
(7) Bolt M8*30
Figure 7-24 (a) Schematic diagram of connecting two assembled racks both at the
top and the bottom
7-28
(1)
(3)
(2)
(1) Bolt M8*90 (2) Bolt M8*170 (3) Bolt M8*30

Figure 7-24 (b) Schematic diagram of the completed connection of two assembled
racks
7-29
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 7 Installing Assembled Cabinet
7.4.5 Installing Cabling Trough
I. Function of cabling trough
The cabling trough at the top of cabinets in a row carries power cables.
The inter-row cabling trough for signal cables carries HW cables and fiber optics which
are between rows of cabinets. Both ends of the cabling trough should be against the top
leading-out holes on cabinets and are movable. You can adjust the length of the cabling
trough.
The inter-row cabling trough for power cables just carries power cables. You can adjust
the length of the cabling trough. Both ends of the cabling trough are movable.
II. Profile and structure of cabling trough
The inter-rack cabling trough comprises a trough and two cable-shielding rings. Its
profile and structure is shown in Figure 7-25 (a) and Figure 7-25(b).
(1 )
(2 )
(3 )
(1) Cable-shielding ring (2) Cabling trough (3) Bolt M5*10

Figure 7-25 (a) Schematic diagram of installing cabling trough and cable-shielding
rings
7-30
(1 )
(2 )
(3 )
(1) Cable-shielding ring (2) Cabling trough (3) Bolt M5*10

Figure 7-25 (b) Schematic diagram of the completed installation of cabling trough and
cable-shielding rings
Inter-row cabling trough is made by two cabling troughs connected together, whose
length can be adjusted in accordance with the inter-row distance between two rows of
racks. The adjustable range is 1150 ~1550 mm. Its profile and structure is shown in
Figure 7-26.
(1 )
(2 )
(3 )
(4 )
(5 )
(6 )
(1) Cabling trough 2 (2) Cabling trough 1 (3) Flat washer 8

(4) Spring washer 8 (5) Bolt M8*25 (6) Bracket
Figure 7-26 Schematic diagram of the structure of inter-row cabling trough
III. Sizes of the mounting holes on the top of assembled rack
There are mounting holes on the top of the assembled rack for installing the cabling
trough and the shockproof support. Its structure and size are given in Figure 7-27.
7-31
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Bolt M8 for connecting with shockproof support

(2) Four in all
(3) Match with bolt M5×10 for fixing cabling trough
Figure 7-27 Schematic diagram of the mounting holes on the top of the assembled
rack
IV. Installing cabling trough
The inter-rack cabling trough is fixed on the top of the assembled racks with bolts
M5*10, as shown in Figure 7-28 (a) and Figure 7-28 (b).
7-32
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Cabling trough (2) Bolt M5×10 (3) Rack

Figure 7-28 (a) Schematic diagram of installing inter-rack cabling trough
7-33
(1)
(2)
(1) Cabling trough (2) Rack

Figure 7-28 (b) Schematic diagram of the completed installation of the inter-rack
cabling trough
To install cabinets in two or more rows, it is necessary to install inter-row cabling

troughs. Generally install inter-row cabling troughs on the top of side cabinets. There
may be open inter-row cabling trough or enclosed inter-row cabling trough.
The open cabling trough is fixed by brackets and bolts M8*25 on the top of cabinets, as
shown in Figure 7-29 (a).
The enclosed cabling trough is fixed by supports. To install the trough, first install
supports and then use bolts to fix the cabling trough on supports. After the installation,
openings of the trough should be connected with top leading-out holes of cabinets, as
shown in Figure 7-29 (b).
7-34
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)

(4) Cabling trough
Figure 7-29 (a) Schematic diagram of installing open inter-row cabling trough
7-35
(1) Cabling trough (2) Flat washer (3) Spring washer (4) Bolt M8*25
Figure 7-29 (b) Schematic diagram of installing enclosed inter-row cabling trough
V. Installing downward cabling trough
In the case of downward cabling, the protective cabling trough is installed beneath the
antistatic floor, used to protect the HW cable, optical fiber and NOD cable between two
rows of racks against rodents. The both ends of the protective cabling trough should be
close to the downward cabling outlets of the racks. The height of the protective cabling
trough can be changed by adjusting the adjustable cabling trough, and the applicable
height range of the antistatic floor is 150 ~ 500 mm. Moreover, the length of the
protective cabling trough can be adjusted by moving the middle cabling trough back
and force, and the applicable length range is 1150 ~1550 mm. The structure of the
protective cabling trough is shown in Figure 7-30.
7-36
(1 )
(2 )
(3 )
(4 )
(5 )
(6 )
(7 )
(8 )
(1) Adjustable cabling trough (2) Cabling trough (3) Middle cabling trough
(4) Holder (5) Nut M8 (6) Flat washer 8
(7) Spring washer 8 (8) Expansion bolt M8×60
Figure 7-30 Schematic diagram of the protective cabling trough structure
The three holders under the cabling trough are optional parts. When the height of the
antistatic floor is less than 355 mm, holders are not needed. Just use wooden bolts and
plastic expansion tubes to secure the cabling trough onto the ground, as shown in
Figure 7-31 (a) and Figure 7-31 (b). If the height of antistatic floor is less than 210 mm,
the adjustable cabling trough is not needed and the cabling trough can be cut at both
ends in accordance with the actual condition.
(1) Adjustable cabling trough (2) Wooden bolt M6×25 (3) Cabling trough
(4) Plastic expansion tube
Figure 7-31 (a) Schematic diagram of installing protective cabling trough
7-37
(1 )
(2 )
(3 )
(1) Cover plate (2) Bolt (3) Cabling trough

Figure 7-31 (b) Schematic diagram of the completed installation of protective cabling
trough
For the rodent-proof purpose, the protective cabling trough should be as close to the
downward cabling outlet of the rack as possible. In addition to the HW cable, optical
fiber and NOD cable, the subscriber cable may also be led out from the downward
cabling outlet, however, subscriber cable is not led from the protective cabling trough,
so you need arrange the location of the protective cabling trough properly. As illustrated
in Figure 7-32, adjust the location of the cabling trough to change the overlap area
between the cabling trough and the downward cabling outlet, that is, set a proper value
for "L" in the diagram to achieve both rodent-proof function and subscriber cable
cabling requirement. Adjust the height (h) of the cabling trough and press it against the
downward cabling outlet. The relation between h (height of the cabling trough) and H
(the height of the antistatic floor) is as follows: h=H+15 mm. The schematic diagram of
the completed installation of the protective cabling trough and the assembled rack is
shown in Figure 7-33.
7-38
(1 ) (2) (3)
(4)
(5)
(1) Rack (2) Downward cabling outlet of the rack (3) Antistatic floor
(4) Support (5) Protective cabling trough
Figure 7-32 Schematic diagram of the location relation between protective cabling
trough and downward cabling outlet
(1 )
(1) Protective cabling trough

Figure 7-33 Schematic diagram of the completed installation of the protective trough
and the assembled rack
7-39
7.4.6 Installing Rodent-Resistant Net
There are cable-through holes for optical fiber and subscriber cable on the top and at
the bottom of the assembled rack. To keep rodent, dust and other sundries from
entering the rack, cover the cable-through hole except the area for optical fiber and
subscriber cable with rodent-resistant net.
Proceed as follows to install the rodent-resistant net.

1) Take the rodent-resistant net down from the cabinet.
2) Put all cables through the cable-through hole and tie them tidily.
3) Put the rodent-resistant net on the cable-through hole and outline the area that
should be cut.
4) Cut that area.
5) Install the rodent-resistant net.
In some cases, the power cable goes through the bottom of the cabinet. There are six
cable-through holes for power cable at the bottom and the top at each side of the
assembled cabinet. You need to cover these holes with rodent-resistant nets following
the same procedures as above.
7.4.7 Installing Cabling Rack
When upward cabling is adopted, the cabling rack shall be installed. Various types of
the cables can be laid on the cabling rack. The installation of the cabling rack can
enhance the shockproof performance of the equipment. The cabling rack in the switch
room can be installed in four ways. It should be noted that the cabling rack must be
insulated from the ground, the roof and the wall.
z Install a suspender on the ceiling to hang the cabling rack (hereinafter referred to
as the ceiling-suspending installation mode).
z Install a support pole on the ground to support the cabling rack (hereinafter
referred to as the ground-supporting installation mode).
z Install a shockproof holder or a ladder on the rack top to support the cabling rack
when it has to pass over the racks.
z Install a triangular bracket on the wall to support the cabling rack when it has to
lean against the wall.
The cabling rack is present in the form of the cabling ladder; cabling trough is optional.
The cabling ladder and the cabling trough have the following specifications:
z 200 mm-wide cabling ladder matches 200 mm-wide cabling trough.
z 400 mm-wide cabling ladder matches 400 mm-wide cabling trough.
z 400 mm-wide cabling ladder matches the cabling trough whose width is 400
mm+200 mm.
7-40
It is recommended to adopt the 400 mm-wide cabling ladder over the rack and the
cabling trough is not installed so as to facilitate cabling and heat-dissipation of the
system.
I. The needed data for project survey
The customer or the engineering design department shall provide the layout plan of
the switch room, which should contain the following information and data specifically.
z The cabling ladder specification and its length, with the statement of the
installation mode adopted.
Note:
The cabling ladder installed on the top of the rack should be considered as the
ceiling-suspending installation mode or ground-supporting installation mode.
z The cabling ladder specification and its length when the triangular bracket
installation mode is adopted.
z The specification and length of the selected cabling trough.
z The total length of the channel section steel needed for shockproof purpose and
equipment reinforcement when the cabling rack is not installed in the switch
room.
II. Introduction to the parts of the cabling rack
The installation parts of the cabling rack are shown in Figure 7-34 ~Figure 7-52.
Figure 7-34 Schematic diagram of channel section steel
7-41
Figure 7-35 Schematic diagram of channel section connecting piece
Figure 7-36 Schematic diagram of crosspiece (200 mm)
7-42
Figure 7-39 Schematic diagram of angle connecting piece
Figure 7-40 Schematic diagram of cable-through rack
Figure 7-41 Schematic diagram of triangular bracket (for 200 mm-wide cabling
ladder)
7-43
ladder)
ladder)
Figure 7-44 Schematic diagram of connecting clip for cabling trough
7-44
Figure 7-45 Schematic diagram of fixing clip for cabling trough
Figure 7-46 Schematic diagram of cabling trough (200 mm wide)
Figure 7-47 Schematic diagram of cabling trough (400 mm wide)
7-45
Figure 7-48 Schematic diagram of insulation covering
Figure 7-49 Schematic diagram of insulation plate
Figure 7-50 Schematic diagram of end cover
7-46
Figure 7-51 Schematic diagram of bolt B (M8*20)
Figure 7-52 Schematic diagram of movable bushing
III. Procedures of installing cabling rack
The installation procedure of the cabling rack is shown in Figure 7-53.
7-47
Start
Mark the drilling position
Assemble the cabling ladder
Check the drilling position
Drill the holes (Φ 8, 60 mm-deep)

-
Secure the cabling ladder onto the

ground or ceiling or the wall
Install the Y
cabling trough
Install and secure

N the cabling trough
Install accessories, such as

cable-through rack, cable -
shielding ring, end cover and
cable bushing
End
Figure 7-53 Procedures of installing cabling rack
IV. Assembling the cabling ladder
The cabling ladder adopts the channel section steel and the crosspiece as its
framework. The channel section steel acts as the vertical beam of the cabling ladder
and the crosspiece functions as the horizontal beam. During the assembly, use the
fastener to connect the crosspiece with the channel section steel. The spacing
between two crosspieces is 250 mm. Since the space between two holes on the
channel section steel is 50 mm, one crosspiece should be installed every five holes.
When the assembled cabling ladder is used for the horizontal installation of the
cabling rack in the switch room, the bolt head of the cabling ladder should face down,
so as to facilitate the installation of the cabling trough since there is no protrusion on
the cabling ladder. The basic structure of the cabling ladder is as shown in Figure
7-54.
7-48
(3 )
(2 )
(1 )
(1) Fastener (2) Channel Section steel (3) Crosspiece

Figure 7-54 The basic structure of cabling ladder
When a long cabling ladder is required, many segments of cabling ladder can be
joined end to end. The channel-section connecting piece will be used for connection,
as shown in Figure 7-55. When the length of the cabling ladder is not an integral
multiple of 2.5 m in the actual installation, cut out the extra part. Apply the touch-up
painting with the brush at the cross section area to ensure the antirust effect and to
give it a pleasant look.
(1) (2)
(1) Channel section steel (2) Channel-section connecting piece

Figure 7-55 The connection of cabling ladders
V. Installing the cabling trough
For the connection of cabling troughs, insert the smaller end of the cabling trough into
the bigger end of another cabling trough. The depth of the insertion is 250 mm.
When the 200 mm-wide or 400 mm-wide cabling trough is selected, directly place the
cabling trough on the cabling ladder. Then, secure it on the cabling ladder with the
cabling trough fixing clip. For each segment of the cabling trough, four clips are used
7-49
and they should be symmetrical at both sides. Figure 7-56 is the schematic diagram of
the inter-trough connection and installation.
(1 )
(2 )
(3 )
(4 )
(1) Cabling trough (2) Cable-shielding ring

(3) Cabling ladder (4) Fixing clip of the cabling trough
Figure 7-56 Connection and installation of cabling troughs (200 mm-wide or 400
mm-wide)
When a 600 mm-wide cabling ladder is used, a 200 mm-wide cabling trough and a
400 mm-wide trough can be placed together. Then, use connecting clip to connect the
two cabling troughs. For each segment of cabling trough, three connecting clips are
used. At the same time, secure the cabling trough on the cabling ladder with fixing
clips. When the cabling trough needs to be lengthened, the connecting method is the
same as the aforementioned. Here, follow the "lengthen first and fix next" principle.
The specific connection is as shown in Figure 7-57.
(2) Cabling ladder (600 mm wide) (3) Cabling trough

(1) Cabling trough (400 mm wide)
(200 mm-wide)
(4) Connecting clip of the cabling (5) Fixing clip of the cabling
trough trough
Figure 7-57 The combination of 400 mm-wide and 200 mm-wide cabling troughs
VI. Installing the turning cabling rack
1) The turning of cabling rack on a surface level

When the cabling rack needs to turn a right angle on a surface level, two installation
modes can be used based on whether the cabling trough is selected for the cabling
rack.
7-50
z The cabling trough is not selected

When the intersecting cabling rack consists of only cabling ladders, use angle
connecting piece and fastener to join the two cabling ladders. Make sure that the two
cabling ladders are on the same surface level. Figure 7-58 is the schematic diagram
for this case of installation.
1
(1) Angle connecting piece
Figure 7-58 The cabling ladder turns on the surface level
z The cabling trough is selected

When one of the intersecting cabling racks adopts the cabling trough but the other
does not (or both racks adopt cabling troughs), the cabling rack without cabling trough
should be raised to the height of cabling trough (in the case of both racks adopting
cabling troughs, the cabling trough of one cabling rack should be in the same height
as that of the other). This ensures that the cables will not encounter any hindrance
when running on the cabling rack. The installation is shown in Figure 7-59. The angle
connecting piece and the fastener are used here for the connection, whereas the
installation method of the angle connecting piece is slightly different from that shown
in Figure 7-59.
(1 )

Figure 7-59 The cabling rack with cabling trough turns on the surface level
7-51
2) The joining of the cabling ladders

When the cabling ladder needs to be raised or lowered, one segment of cabling
ladder can be made as a climbing ladder (refer to Figure 7-60). Angle connecting
pieces and fasteners are used for the connection. Figure 7-60 shows the
perpendicular joining of the cabling ladders, in which the left figure shows the joining
at the end and the right figure shows the joining at the side. Pay attention to the
installation method of the angle connecting piece. Figure 7-61 is schematic diagram
of the inclined joining of the cabling ladders.
(1) Cable bushing (2) Cabling trough (3) Cabling ladder

(4) Angle connecting piece (5) Angle connecting piece (6) End cover
Figure 7-60 The perpendicular joining of the cabling ladders
(1)
(1)

Figure 7-61 The inclined joining of the cabling ladders
VII. Installing the attachment of cabling rack to the wall
The installation mode for attaching the cabling rack to the wall is as shown in
Figure 7-62. The connecting parts used are the angle connecting piece, insulation
plate, insulation covering, fastener and expansion bolt. The purpose of using
insulation plate and insulation covering is to insulate the cabling rack from the wall.
7-52
Meanwhile, the big flat washer 8 (GB96-85) is used to replace the washer for the
expansion bolt so as to increase the contacting area of the washer and the insulation
covering.
(3 )
(2 ) (4 ) (5 )
(6 )
(7 )
(1 )
(8 )
(1) Expansion bolt (2) Insulation plate (3) Insulation covering

(4) Big flat washer (5) Spring washer (6) Nut
(7) Channel section steel (8) Angle connecting piece
Figure 7-62 The attachment of the cabling rack to the wall
VIII. Ceiling-suspending installation or ground-supporting installation
When the cabling rack is not attached to the wall, the ceiling-suspending or
ground-supporting installation mode can be adopted. For the ceiling-suspending
installation, the cabling rack is connected to the ceiling, while for ground-supporting
installation, the cabling rack is connected to the ground. The parts used for the
connection comprise channel section steel, angle connecting piece, fastener and the
expansion bolt. Two pieces of channel section steel are used to connect the cabling
ladder to the ceiling or the ground. The installation method is the same as that of the
cabling rack to the wall.
Each piece of channel section steel is 2.5 meters long. In accordance with the height
of the cabling rack and that of the switch room, the steel can be cut to suitable length.
When the required length is longer than 2.5 meters, two pieces of channel section
steel can be joined to meet the requirements. The connecting method is the same as
that of connecting cabling ladders. The channel-section connecting piece is used for
the connection. The touch-up paint should be applied at the cross-section.
7-53
Since the spacing between two holes on the channel section steel is 50 mm, the
spacing between the suspenders or the support poles should be an integral multiple
of 50 mm. Otherwise, it is impossible to proceed with the installation. It is
recommended that the spacing of the two sets of suspenders or support poles be
1250 mm, that is, each segment of the cabling ladder will be supported by two sets of
suspenders or support poles.
When the ceiling-suspending installation or ground-supporting installation mode is

adopted, the suspenders or the support poles have to be installed at the outer side of
the cabling ladders to facilitate the placement of cabling trough. At the same time, the
insulation between the ceiling-suspending/ground-supporting parts and the
ceiling/ground should also be considered. Make sure to add the insulation plate and
the insulation covering, as is shown in Figure 7-63.
(2 )
(1 )
(3 )
(4 )
(6 ) (5 )
(1) Angle connecting (2) Channel section steel (3) Washer 8

piece (GB96-85)
(4) Insulation covering (5) Insulation plate (6) Expansion bolt
Figure 7-63 Ceiling-suspending installation mode or ground-supporting installation
mode
IX. Installing triangular bracket
When the cabling rack is connected to the wall, the triangular bracket will be used.
The triangular bracket adopts the welded structure and it is fixed onto the wall by
expansion bolts. On its horizontal beam, holes are provided for installing cabling
ladder. The triangular bracket has three specifications, corresponding to the
200-mm-wide, 400-mm-wide and 600-mm-wide cabling ladder installations
respectively (the triangular bracket of bigger size can be used to support the cabling
ladder of smaller size, but it is not recommended here). Their installation size on the
wall is the same.
7-54
When installing the cabling ladder, place the cabling ladder directly upon the
horizontal beam of the triangular bracket. Use the big flat washer 8 (GB96-85) to
replace the flat washer of the expansion bolt. Meanwhile, two pieces of insulation
plates must be installed between the vertical beam of the triangular bracket and the
wall, and the installation pad must be installed between the nut and the vertical beam.
Be sure that each nut is set with an insulation covering. The installation method of the
triangular bracket is shown in Figure 7-64.
(1 )
(2 )
(3 )
(6 )
(4 )
(5 )
(1) Cabling ladder (2) Horizontal beam of the triangular bracket

(3) Triangular bracket (4) Vertical beam of the triangular bracket
(5) Expansion bolt (6) Insulation plate
Figure 7-64 The installation method of triangular bracket
X. Connecting the cabinet-top and cabling rack
When the cabling rack is running over the cabinet top, the cabinet-top connection
mode is adopted.
1) The connection of shockproof support at the cabinet top
The cabinet-top shockproof support is made by welding the angle iron and it can meet
the requirement for the strength. Use two nuts to secure the shockproof support at the
cabinet top. The top plate of the support is used for bearing and fixing the cabling rack
(to improve the heat dissipation of the system, usually, the cabling trough is not
adopted for the cabling rack at the cabinet top). There are bolt holes on the top plate
of the cabinet. Use the fasteners to secure the cabling ladder with the shockproof
support. See the connecting method in Figure 7-65 and Figure 7-66.
7-55
(1 )
(2 )
(3 )
(4 )
(5 )
(1) Shockproof support (2) Rack (3) Spring washer 8

(4) Flat washer 8 (5) Bolt M8*25
Figure 7-65 The connection of assembled cabinets and shockproof support
7-56
(1 )
(3 )
(2 )
(1) Cabling ladder (2) Rack (3) Shockproof support

Figure 7-66 The installation of the cabling rack on the shockproof support
2) The connection of the climbing ladder

When there is no support at the cabinet top, climbing ladder connection can be
adopted. For the specific connecting form of the ladder, refer to Figure 7-60 (the figure
on the right) or Figure 7-61.
XI. Installing accessories
1) The installation of cable-through rack

The installation of cable-through rack is of two types: installation when the cabling
trough is used and that when the cabling trough is not used. Figure 7-67 illustrates the
case when the cabling trough is not used for the cabling rack. Here, the holes of the
upper row of the cable-through rack are used for fixing. When the cabling trough is
used for the cabling rack, the holes of the lower row of the cable-through rack are
used to ensure that the top surface of the cable-through rack stays at the same level
as that of the cabling rack, so as to facilitate the running of the cables. Generally, the
7-57
cable-through rack is installed on the cabling ladder at the cabinet top. Its quantity and
location depends on the actual situations.
(1 )
(2 )
(3 )
(2) The hole of the lower row of (3) The hole of the upper row of
(1) Cable-through rack
the cable-through rack the cable-through rack
Figure 7-67 Installation of cable-through rack when the cabling trough is not adopted
2) The installation of end cover, cable-shielding ring and cable bushing

The cable-shielding rings are directly clipped at both sides of the cabling trough. By
adding the cable-shielding rings, the both sides of the cabling trough are heightened
and the cables cannot easily get across the cabling trough. Figure 7-56 shows the
schematic diagram of its installation. Four cable-shielding rings are used for each
segment of cabling trough and they are evenly spread at both sides.
End covers are installed at the ends of the cabling ladder. It is recommended to install
the end cover as long as the condition permits. The end cover serves two purposes:
one is to make cabling ladder look better and the other is to avoid the unintentional
damage to the cable.
The purpose of installing cable bushing is to avoid any possible damage to the cable.
Any uncovered bottom edge of the cabling trough should be installed with cable
bushing. The installation of the end cover and the cable bushing is shown in
Figure 7-60 (the figure on the left).
3) Shockproof and reinforcement measures when the cabling rack is installed
As shown in Figure 7-68, the cabling rack has formed a network and is connected with
the cabinets, which provides good shockproof performance. You need only connect
the cabling rack to the wall with the channel section steel where it is necessary to
enhance the shockproof performance of the whole network (including the cabinets). It
is recommended to install a piece of channel section steel at every other cabinet. The
connecting method to the wall is the same as that of the ceiling-suspending or of the
ground-supporting installation. The angle connecting pieces are used. Insulation
measures should be considered as well. Ensure the insulation between the whole
network and the wall by adding insulation plates and insulation coverings.
7-58
Figure 7-68 Schematic diagram of the cabling rack installation and the shockproof &
reinforcement for the cabinet
7-59
7.4.8 Installing Shockproof and Securing Measures of Assembled Racks
For single row of racks, use bolts, nuts, shockproof support and the channel section
steel to secure the assembled racks to the wall or the ceiling. This achieves the
shockproof reinforcement of the assembled racks.
When the rack is far away from the wall or the wall is not allowed for the drilling,
ceiling-suspending installation mode can be adopted, which secures the assembled
rack onto the ceiling, as is shown in Figure 7-69.
(1)
(2 )
(3)
(4)
(6 ) (5 )
(7 )
(1) Nut M8 (2) Flat washer 8 (3) Spring washer 8

(4) Bolt M8*25 (5) Shockproof support (6) Angle connecting piece
(7) Rack
Figure 7-69 Schematic diagram of securing assembled rack to the ceiling
7-60
When the rack is close to the wall and the ceiling is not allowed for the drilling,
wall-attaching connection mode can be used, as shown in Figure 7-70.
Ceiling-suspending installation mode and the wall-attaching connection mode are two
typical installation modes for shockproof reinforcement of single rows of racks. These
two modes can be used at the same time, depending on the actual conditions. Care
must be taken to ensure the proper insulation between the cabling rack and the ceiling
or the wall. It is recommended that one piece of channel section steel be installed at
every other rack.
Section 7.4.9 (Inter-Row Fixing of Assembled Racks) briefs about the shockproof
reinforcement for multi-row racks.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Rack (2) Bolt M8*25 (3) Shockproof support

Figure 7-70 Schematic diagram of securing assembled rack to the wall
7.4.9 Inter-Row Fixing of Assembled Racks
Use bolt, nut, shockproof support and channel section steel to interconnect the rows of
assembled racks, so that all the assembled racks in the switch room are connected as
a unity. In this way, the shockproof performance of the assembled racks is greatly
enhanced. The installation of shockproof support is shown in Figure 7-67. The Inter-row
connection of assembled racks is illustrated in Figure 7-71 (a) and
Figure 7-71(b). Generally, a piece of channel section steel is installed between two
rows at every three assembled racks. After various parts for connection are installed
7-61
correctly, tighten all the joints. Refer to the securing measures of the single-row rack to
connect the racks to the wall or the ceiling in accordance with the conditions of the
switch room.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(5)
(4)
(1) Spring washer 8 (2) Flat washer 8 (3) Bolt M8*25

(4) Nut M8 (5) Channel section steel
Figure 7-71 (a) Schematic diagram for the inter-row connection of the assembled
racks
7-62
(1 )
(4 ) (2 )
(3 )

(4) Channel section steel
Figure 7-71 (b) Schematic diagram for the completed inter-row connection of the
assembled racks
7.5 Installing Door
7.5.1 Installing Upper Pulling-Plate, Middle Pulling-Plate and Lower

Pulling-Plate
Installation of the assembled rack on the cement ground is taken as an example to

explain the installation process. The installation of doors are the same for the
installation of assembled racks on both the antistatic floor and the cement floor.
When a row of racks are to be installed with side panels, first install the accessories of
the side panel, including the upper pulling-plate, the middle pulling-plate and the lower
pulling-plate. The installation sequence is as follows (refer to Figure 7-72 (a) and Figure
7-72(b)):
1) Install the upper pulling-plate on the top part of the rack side.
2) Install the middle pulling-plate on the middle part of the rack side.
3) Install the lower pulling-plate on the bottom part of the rack side.
7-63
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1) Rack (2) Upper pulling-plate (3) Middle pulling-plate

(4) Lower pulling-plate
Figure 7-72 (a) Schematic diagram of installing upper pulling-plate, middle
pulling-plate and lower pulling-plate
7-64
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1) Rack (2) Upper pulling-plate (3) Middle pulling-plate

(4) Lower pulling-plate
Figure 7-72 (b) Schematic diagram of the completed installation of upper pulling-plate,
middle pulling-plate and lower-pulling-plate
7.5.2 Installing Upper Beam and Lower Beam
When a row of racks is to be installed with front doors, the upper beams and the lower
beams shall be installed first. The installation sequence is as follows (refer to
Figure 7-73~ Figure 7-75(b)):
1) Install the upper beams on the top of the assembled rack. One beam is installed
on the front side of the rack and one beam on the back side.
2) Install the lower beams at the bottom of the assembled rack. One beam is installed
on the front side of the rack and one beam on the back side.
7-65
(1 )
(1 )
(2 )
(3 )
(3 )
(4 )
(1) Upper beam (2) Bolt M3*8 (3) Lower beam

(4) Bolt M4*10
Figure 7-73 Schematic diagram for the installation of the upper beam and the lower
beam
(1) Upper beam (2) Rack (3) Bolt M3*8

Figure 7-74 (a) Schematic diagram for the installation of the upper beam
7-66
(1)
(2)
(1) Upper beam (2) Upper beam

Figure 7-74 (b) Schematic diagram for the completed installation of the upper beam
(2)
(1)
(3)
(1) Lower beam (2) Lower beam (3) Bolt M4*10

Figure 7-75 (a) Schematic diagram for the installation of the lower beam
7-67
(1)
(1)
(1) Lower beam (2) Lower beam

Figure 7-75 (b) Schematic diagram for the completed installation of the lower beam
7-68
7.5.3 Installing Front Top Cover and Back Top Cover
The installation of the front/back top cover will prevent the outside objects from entering
the rack and gives the assembled rack an aesthetic look. The installation procedure is
as shown in Figure 7-76 (a) and Figure 7-76 (b). Use bolts to install the front top cover
and the back top cover on the cabinet top. For the racks at two ends of a row of racks,
connect the top covers and the side panels to make the top covers more secure.
(1) Bolt M4*10 (2) Back top cover

(3) Rack (4) Front top cover
Figure 7-76 (a) Schematic diagram of the front/back top cover installation
7-69
(1)
(2)
(1) Front top cover (2) Back top cover

Figure 7-76 (b) Schematic diagram of the completed installation of front/back top
cover
7.5.4 Installing Side Panels
Side panels should be installed at two sides of a row of racks. Attach the side panel on
the upper pulling-plate and the lower pulling-plate. Adjust the side panel so as to align
the edge of the side panel with the upper and the lower beam. Put on the side panel
gently and make sure that the upper and the lower part of the side panel match with the
upper and lower pulling-plates respectively. Then, tighten the panel fasteners, as
shown in Figure 7-77 (a) and Figure 7-77(b).
7-70
(1)
(2)
(1) Side panel (2) Panel fastener M6*50

Figure 7-77 (a) Schematic diagram of the side panel installation
7-71
(1)
(1) Side panel

Figure 7-77 (b) Schematic diagram of the completed installation of side panel
7.5.5 Installing Row and Column Alarm Indicators
The alarm indicators are positioned on the top of the rack. They are used to rapidly
locate the rack which gives out alarms.
As illustrated in Figure 7-78, there are two types of alarm indicators: row alarm indicator
and column alarm indicator. The former is installed on the top of the side panel near the
main walkway, indicating which row of racks gives out the alarm; the latter is installed
on the top of each rack and indicates which column of racks gives out the alarm.
Note:
For the RSA cabinet, install the row alarm indicator on only one of the two side panels.
7-72
Red Yellow Green Red Yellow Green

Column alarm
C&C08 C&C08
indicator
Red Yellow Green
Row alarm indicator
Side plate
Figure 7-78 Schematic diagram of the row and column alarm indicators
The meaning of row and column alarm indicators on the assembled rack is the same as
that on the welded rack. Their sole difference lies in the installation method for the
control cable of the row and column alarm indicators. Each assembled rack is equipped
with a CB01AMD board that is used for processing the fan alarm and for driving the row
& column alarm indicators. The board is installed in the power distribution box at the
cabinet top. It is necessary to install the control cable for the row & column alarm
indicators and set the corresponding DIP switches.
One end of the control cable includes three terminals in red, yellow & green and three
black terminals. The other end is a 4-pin connector. During the installation, connect the
terminals in red, yellow & green to the positive polarity of the row/column indicators and
connect the black terminals to the negative polarity. Install the 4-pin connector on the
AMD. Figure 7-79 shows the schematic diagram, in which J7 is for the installation of
column indicators and J6 is for the installation of row indicators.
7-73
Figure 7-79 Schematic diagram for the cable-socket connection on the CB01AMD
7.5.6 Installing Front Doors and Back Doors
Each rack has two front doors and two back doors. Figure 7-80 is the schematic
diagram of the front doors. Various circuit boards and cables should be installed before
assembling the door. In fact, the doors can be installed only after all the hardware
installation work is finished. The schematic diagram of door installation is shown in
Figure 7-81 (a). The installation procedure is as follows:
1) Align the hole in the lower right part of the door with the pin on the rack and then
mount the lower part of the left door.
2) Pull down the triangle hook pin at the top of the left door. Align the hole on the door
with the hole on the rack and then release your hands. With the elastic force, the
hook pin bounces back and installs the door onto the rack.
Note:
The triangle hook pin has already installed on the side panel before delivery; onsite
installation is not necessary.
Figure 7-81(b) is the schematic diagram of front & back door installation after
completion.
7-74
(1)
(2)
(1) Left door (2) Right door

Figure 7-80 Schematic diagram of the front door
7-75
(1 )
(2 )
(3 )
(4 )
(5 )
(7 )
(6 )
(1) Flexible pivot (2) Pressure spring (3) Pin seat

(4) Pulling downward (5) Left door (6) Pivot
(7) Right door
Figure 7-81 (a) Schematic diagram of the door installation
7-76
Figure 7-81 (b) Schematic diagram of the completed installation of the doors
7.6 Installing Air Filter
The fan box is located at the top of the rack. The wind enters the rack from the
ventilation hole at the bottom. To prevent the dust and other small objects from entering
the rack, the air filter has to be installed at the bottom of the rack. Insert two air filters in
parallel. The protruding part of the rack bottom will press against the air filters, thus
effectively secure them. The air filter can be taken out for cleaning and replacement
regularly. The installation process is as shown in Figure 7-82 (a) and Figure 7-82(b).
7-77
(1)
(2)
(1) Air filter (2) Installation direction

Figure 7-82 (a) Schematic diagram of air filter installation
(1)
(1) Air filter (included)

Figure 7-82 (b) Schematic diagram of the completed installation of air filter
7-78
7.7 Labels
I. Functions and types
Rack labels provide accurate equipment position information to the maintenance

personnel, which help in locating the required equipment. The numbering of the labels
corresponds to the position description in the configuration data table, that is, the
corresponding numbers in the configuration data table determine the row number and
column number of the rack.
Two types of the label:
Row number: identifying different rows of racks
Column number: identifying different racks of the same row
II. Pasting labels
1) Appearance of the label

Figure 7-83 illustrates the appearance of the rack label.
Figure 7-83 Illustration of the rack label
2) Position of the pasted labels

a. Position for row number label
As the round label, it is pasted on the side panel beside the walkway.
b. Position for column number label
7-79
As the rectangle label, it is pasted on the beam of the rack, as illustrated in

Figure 7-84.
Figure 7-84 Schematic diagram of label pasting position
7.8 Installation Completion Check
The check covers the following aspects:

1) The cabinets, when combined, should be standing firm and in good order.
2) The vertical deviation of the cabinets should not be more than 3 mm.
3) The cabinet panels at the four sides facing the passage should be installed and
aligned, with the deviation not exceeding 5 mm. The adjacent cabinets should
stand side by side, while the surfaces of all cabinets should be in the same plane.
4) Tighten all the bolts but do not apply too much force to avoid the damage of screw
thread and the screw cap.
5) Parts on the cabinets should not be detached or damaged and the connecting
cables should not be damaged or broken. The labels should be correct, clear and
complete.
6) Clean the cabinet so that there is no finger print on it.
7) While using tools, ensure that the cabinet surface does not get any scratches.
7-80
8) Upon the completion of cabinet installation, measure each cabinet. The

dimensions should be the same as that of the reference property.
The completed installation of a row of cabinets is as shown in Figure 7-85.
Figure 7-85 Schematic diagram showing a row of cabinets
7.9 Installing Boards
Since boards have been pre-installed before delivery, this chapter actually explains
how to change a faulty board.
7.9.1 Board Description
Figure 7-86 illustrates the appearance and structure of a board. Figure 7-87 illustrates
a common board.
z The boards used for the C&C08 switch are usually the four-layer PCBs fabricated
with the Surface Mounting Technology (SMT).
z The connectors at the back of the boards are used to connect with the backplane.
The board has a front panel, on which ejector levers are equipped for pulling out or
inserting the board. Board name marked on the front panel helps to identify the
type of board and indicators on the front panel are used to indicate the running
state of the board.
z PCBs are vertically inserted into the frame, which are interconnected by the
system bus on the backplane.
7-81
Connector
Indicator
Front panel
Elastic Locking Latch needle
Board name
Ejector lever
Figure 7-86 Appearance and structure of the board
Figure 7-87 Example of a common board
7-82
7.9.2 Replacement of Board
Note:
In replacing a board, you must wear ESD-preventive wrist strip and gloves, which
should be grounded reliably (to the switch shell), so as to prevent ESD from damaging
the board.
To pull out a board, press the ejector levers with two hands first, then hold the two ends
of the front panel to slightly pull out the board.
Figure 7-88 illustrates the replacement of a board.
Matters, which need attention:

z Make sure that cabinets and frames are free from dust before inserting the boards.
z Take the board out of the antistatic box, remove the moistureproof plastic bag and
then verify the board name with the label pasted on the box. Check for any visible
damage of the components. Finally, verify the board software with the software
packing list and keep record in the deployment report.
z Boards should be inserted into the right slots. For example, trunk board (the DTF)
must be inserted into the slot which is named as DTF.
z To insert the board, press the ejector levers to release the lock, hold the two ends
of the front panel and slightly insert the board along the slot until it reaches the end
of the slot. Then the lock will secure the board.
z Do not apply much force while inserting the board, which may damage the pins on
the backplane.
z When the board reaches the end of the slot, press the ejector levers until the lock
seizes them.
The board is locked as illustrated in Figure 7-89.
7-83
Front panel
First press downward
Then turn
Frame
Ejector lever
Frame
tio n
d irec
in this
ve
Mo
tio n
d irec
in this
ve
Mo Board
Figure 7-88 Pulling out the board
7-84
Front panel
Lock elastic
Latch needle
frame
Ejector lever
Figure 7-89 Locking the board
Boards with the same name are compatible with each other, that is, any board may be
replaced by another one having the same name. Boards should be inserted from left to
right in the frame and empty slots should be reserved to the right of the occupied slots.
7.10 Numbering Cabinet and Frame
Cabinet labels help maintenance personnel locate specific equipment easily and
quickly. The labels are numbered in accordance with the position description in the
configuration data table, that is, the corresponding numbers in the configuration data
table determine the row number and column number of the cabinet.
When cabinets are arranged in one row, the cabinet beside the main walkway is
generally the DC power distribution cabinet whose column number is "00", pasted on
the upper enclosure frame of the cabinet. The column number of the second cabinet is
"01", that of the third cabinet is "02" and that of the twelfth cabinet is "11". Column
numbers of other cabinets are determined in the same way. The row numbers of all
these cabinets are (A).
When cabinets are arranged in several rows, cabinets containing the AM/CM are
usually positioned in the first row with the row number (A) pasted on both sides of the
row. The row number of the second row is (B) and that of the third is (C).
Frames of each cabinet are numbered from 0 to 5 from bottom up.
7-85
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 8 Installing BAM Cabinet
Chapter 8 Installing BAM Cabinet
8.1 Introduction to BAM Cabinet
BAM cabinet refers to the B-type server cabinet, consisting of racks, supports, guide
rails, top cover and side doors.
8.2 Installing Supports and Guide Rails
B800 series supports are used for installing BAM cabinet in the switch room with
antistatic floor.
8.2.1 Introduction to Supports and Guide Rails
The supports are used to raise the rack so as to facilitate the flooring and cabling in the
switch room. The supports are welded by steel plates. Insulation pad should be placed
under the supports and insulation covering should be placed around the expansion
bolts, so that the equipment is insulated from the ground before grounding cable is
connected, which efficiently meets the insulation requirement.
Guide rails are installed to slide the equipment back and forth, facilitating position
adjustment. The guide rails can connect several supports and racks together to provide
stability and proper alignment. The guide rails also act as a shockproof mechanism for
the equipment.
There are four types of B800 series support assemblies, three of which are the
adjustable type and the last one is a fixed type.
The structure of the B800 series support is shown in Figure 8-1. Refer to Table 8-1 for
the adjustable height values of each type of assembly.
8-1
Connecting hole
Connecting hole
Upper support
Lower support
Silk-screen mark of antistatic floor height
Installation hole
Figure 8-1 Profile of the B800 series support assembly
Table 8-1 Table of adjustable heights of B800 series support assemblies
Assembly Applicable height of antistatic floor (mm)

I 175~215
II 216~295
III 296~455
Customized based on the actual floor height (minimum height:
IV
100 mm)
Note:
The antistatic floor height refers to the distance between the upper surface of the
antistatic floor and the cement floor.
The heights of the B800 series assembly I, II, III can be adjusted steplessly within their
adjustable ranges. The adjustment is achieved by the relative movement of the upper
and lower supports.
B800 series IV assemblies are fixed supports. They apply to ultra-high and ultra-low
floors. The lowest applicable floor height of this assembly is 100 mm.
8-2
8.2.2 Quantity Calculation of Supports and Guide Rails
I. Quantity of Supports
N+1 supports are used for the installation of N BAM cabinets, that is, one BAM cabinet
is supported by two supports.
II. Quantity of Guide Rails
The outer dimensions of the guide rails are given in Figure 8-2. The length of a single
guide rail is 600 mm. Two guide rails are attached to a BAM cabinet and they are
shipped along with the supports.
Figure 8-2 Schematic diagram of the outer dimensions of guide rails
8-3
8.2.3 Installation Flow
Start
Locate the support
Install the support
Insulation test N
of Support
Install the guide rail
Install the rack
Install the floor bracket
Insulation test of N
the floor bracket
Recover the floor
End
Figure 8-3 Installation flow chart
8.2.4 Locating Supports
I. Drawing
Determine the installation position of the supports according to the benchmark

dimensions specified in the construction plan and the support dimensions. Mark
several points for drawing with steel tape, and draw two straight lines parallel to the
benchmarks, with the spacing of 710 mm. Then determine the hole positions for the first
support on the two lines as designed. With these holes as reference, mark the
mounting hole positions for the second support. To ensure the correctness, repeated
measurements are required when all the holes are marked on the lines. The hole size is
also to be taken into account. Figure 8-4 shows the support hole positions.
8-4
Figure 8-4 Schematic diagram of support hole positions for BAM cabinet
II. Drilling
The supports are firmed onto the ground with expansion bolts M12. A percussion drill is
used to drill holes and the bit should be Φ14.
8.2.5 Installing Supports
I. Mounting expansion bolts
Before mounting the expansion bolts, clean up the dust inside and around the hole with
a cleaner. Then measure the diameter of the holes and place the supports on the
marked points to check whether they match respectively. For the holes with large
deviation, you need locate and drill them again. Remove the washer and nut from the
expansion bolt, put the expansion bolt and its tube into the hole and strike directly on
the bolt with a rubber hammer until the tube of the expansion bolt is completely driven
into the ground.
8-5
II. Adjusting support height
Adjust all the supports to the prescribed heights according to the floor height measured
and with reference to the silk-screen mark of the antistatic floor height on the support.
Tighten the height-locking bolt to 45 Nm with a Torque spanner. Fasten the bolts in the
middle first and then those at both sides, as shown in Figure 8-5.
III. Installing and firming supports
Clean the surface of the ground and the support. Add the insulation pads, insulation
coverings, spring washers for the support as shown in Figure 8-5. Align the support
mounting holes with the expansion bolts and then firm the support onto the ground with
the nuts and the washers. The tightening Torque should be 45 Nm.
The nuts are to be tightened one by one to reduce the stress between bolts and
supports and to facilitate the adjustment of the support during the installation. The other
supports should be installed and firmed as mentioned above. Figure 8-5 shows the
schematic diagram of securing the support onto the ground.
Silk-screen mark of
antistatic floor height Height-locking bolts (two sides)
Height-locking bolts (center)
NutM12
Spring washer12
Support insulation
pad
Washer
Expansion bolt M12X80
Insulation covering
The sequence of fastening the height-locking bolts: first those in the middle, then those at both sides
Figure 8-5 Schematic diagram of the connection between supports and the ground
By adding insulation pad under the support and insulation covering onto the expansion
bolt (see Figure 8-5), the equipment is insulated from the ground before the grounding
cable is connected.
8-6
8.2.6 Insulation Test for Support
Set the multimeter to ohm range. Contact the support and the expansion bolt with the
two probes of the multimeter respectively to measure the resistance between them. If
the multimeter shows that the circuit is disconnected, proceed with the next step of
installation. Otherwise, it signifies that the support is not properly insulated from the
ground. Then check whether the insulation covering and the insulation pad are properly
installed or whether there is any damage to the insulation parts. Repeat 8.2.5 III
Installing and firming supports and perform the insulation test again.
8.2.7 Installing Guide Rails
I. Mounting square nuts
Before installing the guide rails, mount the square nuts used for fixing the floor bracket
components and guide rails (both are same) into the lower trough of the guide rails. The
guide rail of each side of each cabinet should be mounted with five square nuts (three
of which are used to fix the floor bracket components). Note that the square nuts must
be mounted before the guide rails are installed. For the profile of the square nut, see
Figure 8-6.
Each cabinet is equipped with four sets of floor bracket components, among which two
sets are placed on the guide rail at either side of the cabinet.
II. Leveling and fastening guide rails
Fasten the guide rails on the support with square nuts, flat washers, spring washers
and bolts M12*20. The installation procedure is as shown in Figure 8-6.
First screw the bolts M12*20 with spring washers and flat washers (not to screw down
them, but to an extent that the bolts will not fall), then insert them into the mounting
holes of the support. Next, measure the level at different segments of the guide rails
with an industrial horizontal ruler (both horizontally and vertically) to see whether the
bubble in the horizontal ruler stays in the middle. If not, adjust the guide rail by adding or
removing washer. If the guide rail is horizontal, screw down the bolts and then check if
it is still horizontal in the same way mentioned above. If not, loosen the bolts and adjust
by adding or removing washers until the guide rail is horizontal again. The procedure is
the same as above. After the guide rails are fastened, the following requirements
should be met:
z Single guide rail must be horizontal in its longitudinal direction.
z Two parallel guide rails must be horizontal in the transverse direction.
z The distance measured between the centers of the two parallel guide rails should
be 710 mm ±1 mm.
8-7
z If there are multiple guide rails installed from end to end, align them with a straight
string to ensure that all these guide rails are in the same line. Two adjacent guide
rails should be of the same height and there should be no seam at the joint.
Guide rail
Guide rail
Floor bracket assemblies
Fastener
Washer
Installation direction
Support
Figure 8-6 Schematic diagram of level adjustment and the fixing of the guide rail and
supports
8.2.8 Installing BAM Racks
Refer to Section 8.4.
8.2.9 Installing Floor Bracket
The floor bracket is used to support the antistatic floor around the rack.
I. Fixing floor bracket
Determine the position of the floor bracket and fasten the fixed angle plate onto the
guide rails with bolts M12*20, flat washers and spring washers, as shown in
Figure 8-7.
II. Determining the location of adjustable angle plate
Loosen the bolt M8*30, as shown in Figure 8-7. Move the adjustable angle plate
upward or downward so that its top surface is at the same level as the antistatic floor.
Then screw down the bolt M8*30.
8-8
Guide rail
Square nut
Fixed angle plate

Adjustable angle plate
Flat washer 12
Spring washer 12 Bolt M8X30
Bolt M12X20 Floor bracket assembly
Figure 8-7 Fixing of floor bracket and guide rail
Fixed angle plate Insulation plate
Adjustable angle plate

Spring washer 8
Bolt M8X30
Nut 8
Flat washer 8
Insulation pad
Figure 8-8 Composition profile of floor bracket
8.2.10 Insulation Test for Floor Bracket
Set the multimeter to the ohms range. Contact the support and the adjustable angle
plate with the two probes of the multimeter respectively to measure the resistance
between them. If the multimeter shows that the circuit is disconnected, proceed with the
next step of installation. Otherwise, it means that the support is not insulated from the
ground. Then disassemble the floor bracket assemblies to check whether the insulation
plate and the insulation covering have been installed correctly, or whether there is no
damage to them. Repeat the steps given in 8.2.9, to reinstall the floor bracket and
perform the insulation test again.
8-9
8.2.11 Flooring
Cut the antistatic floor around the cabinet according to the actual condition and recover
the floor.
8.3 Installing Foot-Anchor Plate
Foot-anchor plate assembly is used for the installation of BAM cabinet in the switch
room without antistatic floor.
8.3.1 Function of Foot-Anchor Plate
Foot-anchor plate assembly is used for securing the BAM cabinet onto the cement floor.
Considering that the ground of the switch room is uneven, the feet adopted are
height-adjustable ranging from 54 mm~74 mm.
Insulation pad is added under the foot and insulation covering is added onto the
expansion bolt, so that the equipment is insulated from the ground before grounding
cable is connected.
8.3.2 Components of Foot-Anchor Plate Assembly
The components of foot-anchor plate assembly are as shown in Figure 8-9.
(1 ) (9 )
(2 ) (1 0 )
(3 )
(4 )
(5 )
(6 )
(7 )
(8 )
(1) Nut M12 (2) Spring washer 12 (3) Big flat washer
(4) Support insulation covering (5) Anchor plate (6) Insulation plate
(7) Expansion bolt M12*80 (8) Expansion tube (9) Foot M16
(10) Nut M16
Figure 8-9 Schematic diagram of foot-anchor plate assembly
8-10
8.3.3 Installing Foot-Anchor Plate Assembly
I. Drawing
Determine the position of the mounting hole of the anchor plate according to the
benchmark dimensions specified in the construction plan and the foot position. Mark
several points for line drawing with a steel tape and draw two straight lines parallel to
the benchmarks and with the spacing of 710 mm using a carpenter's ink marker. Then
determine the mounting hole positions and the foot positions for the first cabinet on the
two lines as designed. With these holes as reference, mark the mounting hole positions
and foot positions for other racks. To ensure the accuracy of the hole size, repeated
measurements are to be carried out after all the hole position lines are marked. Figure
8-10 shows the mounting hole and foot position for a BAM cabinet.
(1) Cabinet edge line (2) Foot position mark 4-Φ50 (3) Expansion bolt M12
Figure 8-10 Schematic diagram of mounting hole and foot positions for a BAM cabinet
II. Drilling
At the mounting hole positions marked on the ground, drill holes to the depth of 70 mm
with drill bit ф14 or ф16.
8-11
III. Mounting expansion bolts
Remove the washer and nut from the expansion bolt. Put the expansion bolt and the
tube vertically into the hole and strike directly on the bolt with a rubber hammer until the
tube of the expansion bolt is completely stricken into the ground.
IV. Installing feet
Adjust the height of all the feet to be 54 mm between the foot upper plane and the
ground. In this way, it can be ensured that the lower surface of the BAM cabinet is at a
height of 55 mm from the ground after it is installed, thus keeping the same height as
the C&C08B cabinet.
Install the feet as shown in Figure 8-9 and Figure 8-11.
Figure 8-11 Schematic diagram of feet installation on the ground
8.3.4 Connecting Feet and Cabinet
Each BAM cabinet is securely connected to the feet with four bolts M10*30. Note to
mount the spring washer and the flat washer in the correct order.
8-12
8.4 Installing BAM Racks
8.4.1 Connecting and Securing BAM Racks and Guide Rails
Secure the rack onto the guide rails with bolts, spring washers, flat washers and
T-shape nuts, as shown in Figure 8-12.
Raise the rack onto the guide rails and determine its front position. Align the four
mounting holes at the bottom of the rack with the corresponding fixing trough of the
guide rails. Insert the T-shape nut through the trough opening of the guide rails into the
mounting hole of the rack, and then use bolt to connect and secure the rack and the
support. The schematic diagram of the completed installation is shown in
Figure 8-13.
Figure 8-12 Schematic diagram of installation and securing between rack and guide
rail
8-13
Figure 8-13 Schematic diagram of the completed installation of the rack and the guide
rail
8.4.2 Installing Fixing Bar and Fixing Plate
The installation of fixing bar and fixing plate is as shown in Figure 8-14 (a) and
Figure 8-14 (b).
z The fixing bars and the fixing plates are installed to hang the side doors.
8-14
z Before installing the top plate and the barrier, the fixing bars and the fixing plates
shall be installed first.
z The fixing bars are mounted at the top of both sides of the rack, while the fixing
plates are mounted at the bottom of both sides of the rack.
z The bolts for mounting the fixing bars and the fixing plates are inserted from the
inside and tightened on the outside.
Bolt
螺螺 M8×M8x180
180
Nut
螺螺
螺螺 8 washer 8
Spring
Flat8 washer 8
螺螺
Side door
Bolt M8x180 Nut 8 Flat washer 8 Spring washer 8
侧侧侧侧
accessories 螺螺 M8× 180 螺螺8 螺螺8 螺螺8
共共共共
Four in total
Figure 8-14 (a) Schematic diagram of fixing bar and fixing plate installation
Figure 8-14 (b) Schematic diagram of fixing bar and fixing plate installation
8-15
8.4.3 Installing Shockproof Parts
Each rack is installed with two connection brackets, fixed either to the wall or onto the
pole with channel section steel. When a cabling rack is installed over the rack, the
cabling rack and connection brackets should be securely connected with channel
section steel and some mechanical parts. Generally, one piece of channel section steel
is installed at every other rack. When connecting channel section steel to the wall or to
the pole with angle connecting piece, insulation plate and insulation pad shall be added.
Refer to the construction plan for the specific location of installation. For installing the
cabling rack, refer to the relevant installation instructions.
8.4.4 Installing Top Cover, Cover Plate and Barrier
The installation of top cover, cover plate and barrier is shown in Figure 8-15.
The top cover is used for preventing dust, falling articles and small animals from
entering the rack, as well as for aesthetic looks. The top cover is made up of front and
back top covers and cover plate. To keep the system cool, the cover plate is designed
like a mesh.
Before mounting the front and back top covers, the upper and lower enclosure frame
barriers are to be installed first onto the top and the bottom of the rack respectively.
The front and back top covers are mounted on the top of the upper enclosure frame,
connected to the rack with round bolts M4. The top cover with alarm indicator hole is the
front top cover, installed on the front side of the rack. The top covers and the side doors
are connected and secured with bolts M3.
Before installing the cover plate of the lower enclosure frame, ensure that the T-shape
nuts between the rack and the guide rails are securely tightened and the spring & flat
washers are put in the correct order.
8-16
Figure 8-15 Schematic diagram of top cover, cover plate and barrier installation
8-17
8.5 Installing Internal Components of BAM Cabinet
Internal components of BAM cabinet include LAN Switch (Ethernet Switch), server,
power distribution box, monitor, keyboard, mouse and display switcher. The general
view of the rack layout is shown in Figure 8-16.
Power distribution box 2U

LAN Switch 4 1U
LAN Switch cabling frame 1U
LAN Switch 3 1U
LAN Switch 2 1U
LAN Switch 1 1U
Dummy panel 8U
LCD 2U
Dummy panel 6U
Key board 1U
Dummy panel 4U
Server 2U
Dummy panel 8U
Figure 8-16 A general view of BAM cabinet
Proceed as follows to install the internal components of BAM cabinet.

1) Insert the components into the BAM cabinet. Figure BAM-1 shows the positions
for each component.
2) Connect the power cables and signal cables of each component. The signal
cables include those for the keyboard, mouse, and the montior.
8-18
8.5.1 Installing Internal Components
I. Installing server
1) Install the lug.

2) Put the server on the slide rail, and push it softly along the slide rail into the
cabinet.
3) Use the panel screw to fix the server into the cabinet.
II. Installing LAN Switch
1) Install the rack-mounting ear onto a LAN Switch.

2) Put the LAN Switch with the rack-mounting ear installed on the slide rail, and push
it softly along the slide rail into the cabinet.
3) Use the panel screw to fix the LAN Switch into the cabinet.
4) Proceed with the above steps for other LAN Switches to be installed.
As shown in Figure 8-16, when three LAN Switches are installed, LAN Switch 1 is used
for communication with the workstation, LAN Switch 2 is used for connection with the
AM/CM, and LAN Switch 3 is used for cold backup. When four LAN Switches are
installed, LAN Switch 1 is used for communication with the workstation, LAN Switches
2 and 3 are used for connection with the AM/CM (LAN Switches 2 and 3 are in
concatenation through Ethernet cable), and LAN Switch 4 is used for cold backup
8.5.2 Internal Cabling of BAM Cabinet
I. Connecting power cables and signal cables
The power cables and signal cables of BAM cabinet are connected as shown in Figure
8-17 to Figure 8-20.
8-19
LAN Switch 4
LAN Switch 3
LAN Switch 2
LAN Switch 1
Figure 8-17 Power cable connection diagram
8-20
LAN Switch 4
LAN Switch 3
LAN Switch 2
LAN Switch 1
Figure 8-18 Signal cable connection diagram
8-21
LANSWITCH (front view)

AX BX
LANSWITCH2
58 60
AX BX
LANSWITCH1
57 59
Figure 8-19 LAN Switch 100 Mbit/s network port diagram
Cabinet front view Cabinet rear view Cabinet left view Cabinet right view
Cabinet
grounding
point
40 Front door 41 Rear door Left side
grounding grounding door 43 42 Right side door
point point grounding grounding
Figure 8-20 Grounding cable connection diagram for BAM front/back doors and side
panels
The types of power cables and signal cables illustrated in Figure 8-17 to Figure 8-20
are as shown in Table 8-1.
Table 8-1 Types of power cables and signal cables used in BAM cabinet
SN Name Qty Remark

1 Server power cable 2 Cable No.68 & 69
2 LCD power cable 1 Cable No. 70
3 LAN Switch power cable 4 Cable No. 18~21
4 2 m crossover cable 2 Cable No. 61 & 62
5 3 m straight through cable 4 Cable No. 57-60

6 Grounding cable of front and back door 2 Cable No. 40 & 41
7 Grounding cable of side panel 2 Cable No. 42 & 43
8 PGND power cable 12 Cable No. 25-37
8-22
Note:
Other cables are all outsourced parts with cables.
Specifications for cable connection in BAM cabinet:

1) When a piece of cable is properly connected, stick the label on it (see label
location table for specific sticking locations). If the labels are to be stuck at two
ends of the cable, the distance between the labels is 50±5 mm. Except for full
configuration, some labels are to be left after sticking is finished.
2) The cables numbered as 18 to 22 are power cables; 26 to 43 are grounding cables;
and 46 to 66 are signal cables.
3) The cable numbered as 61 and 62 are crossover cables, used for interconnection
between LAN Switches, which are no need for installation.
4) The connection point of grounding cable on the rack is illustrated in Figure 8-17.
The grounding cable is connected to the nearest grounding point as shown in
Figure 8-17.
5) Select only one of the cable No. 2 and 9 at a time. The selection principle is: select
cable No. 2 for welded cabinet and cable No. 9 for assembled cabinet and main
control cabinet.
6) LAN Switch 4 is used for backup, and cable No. 21 is normally not connected.
7) In single-server setting, ConvertBox is not used. The monitor, keyboard and
mouse are plugged to the corresponding ports of the server.
8) For functional modules such as LAN Switch, server, one end of their PGND cables
is connected to the grounding bar of the cabinet, and the other end is connected to
their own grounding points. If no grounding point is found, connect the end to the
fastened screw on the shell. If the shell is plastic, PGND is not required.
9) In non-full configuration, the PGND power cable (SN 8) in Table will be surplus.
10) The spare cables are bound on the beam.
II. Sticking labels
Figure 8-21 shows the network separation label. Stick this label on the cabling frame of
the LAN Switch for internal network as shown in Figure 8-22.
Refer to Appendix A “Labels for Cables” for making labels and sticking them on the
cables in the BAM cabinet.
8-23
Figure 8-21 Network separation label
Figure 8-22 Position of the network separation label
Caution:
Internal network refers to the network comprising the BAM and the AMP, CDP, ISP,
SPC and SUB boards of the switch. When three LAN Switches are installed, stick the
network separation label on the cabling frame of LAN Switch 2. When four LAN
Switches are installed, stick two such labels on the cabling frames of LAN Switches 2
and 3 respectively.
III. Cabling and binding of power cables and signal cables
The rack and column structure of BAM is as shown in Figure 8-23 & Figure 8-24.
8-24
(1) Left column (2) BAM-rack.diagram (rear.view) (3) Binding.bar 1

(4) Binding.bar 2 (5) Binding.bar 3 (6) Binding.bar 4
(7) Right column
Figure 8-23 BAM rack diagram
Inner side of flange Outer side of flange

Outer side of flange Inner side of flange
Main cabling trough Main cabling trough
Inner side of square shaped bar Inner side of square shaped bar
Cross section of left column

Cross section of left column
Left column(3D view) Schematic diagram of column
Figure 8-24 BAM rack column diagram
Generally, the cabling between functional modules routes at the back of the cabinet.
The main cabling and connection principles are:
8-25
1) Connect the cables according to Figure 8-17 and the corresponding description.
Avoid any mistake or negligence in cable connection.
2) In upward or downward cabling, proceed alongside and bind the cables on the
columns of the rack. See Figure 8-23 for details.
3) Cables of different types are to be laid and bound separately. The 200 V power
cables of servers or LAN Switches are laid and bound by the inside of mount angle
of the rear two columns. Other signal cables as network cables are bound along
the main cabling trough, or inner & outer side of it. The minimum distance between
power cables and signal cables is 30 mm.
4) Make sure the cables are neatly and properly tied.
5) The plugging device shall be closely plugged to ensure good contact.
6) Label each piece of cable before distribution.
Below are the installations of different cables:
z Inverter
The devices inside the BAM cabinet are powered by two inverters.
1) Input power cable
The –48 V power cable is bound on the rack. See Figure 8-17 and plug the connector
into the corresponding socket of the inverter.
2) Output power cable
The 200 V AC power is outputted from inverter and controller, and supplies electricity to
the components such as server in the cabinet through socket. The three sockets are
distributed and bound in the cabinet. Refer to Figure 8-17, and plug the socket to the
output end of the inverter.
Both inverters output 200 V AC power respectively to the inverter controller. See Figure
8-17 for end plugging. The remnant of cables can be bound with the nearby 200 V
power cables. The synchronous cable (cable No. 8 in Figure 8-17) from inverter1 to
socket2 is bound with other power cables along the inner side of the rear left column.
3) The cabling of alarm signal cables of inverter controller: Bind the cable to the
upper part of the lowest binding bar, proceed to the rear left column, through the
main cabling trough and bind all the way through it.
z Cabling of server, keyboard, mouse and inverter
4) Power cable
The three lines of server power are inputted through three busbars. The power cables
are bound on the rack. They are cabled from right to left across the rear frame of the
server and connected to the relevant socket of the server.
Plug the power connector of the monitor into the socket. Align the monitor power
transformer with the cable-binding bar at the rear side of the rack. Bind the cable at the
end of tray of monitor. The remnant cables are bound to the binding bar. Make sure that
8-26
the remaining cables are sufficient in length when the tray is pulled out. Use cable tie in
binding cables in monitor tray.
5) Signal cable
It includes keyboard cable, mouse cable and monitor cable. See Figure 8-18 for details.
When only one server is installed, connect the keyboard, mouse and monitor to the
corresponding port of the server.
When two servers are installed, an inverter shall be used. The keyboard, mouse and
monitor connect to the port “keyboard 1”, “mouse 1” and “monitor” of the inverter
separately. They connect to the two servers through the ports and video signal cable.
Keep sufficient length of remnant cables of keyboard, mouse and monitor, so that the
latter three can be properly pulled out. The redundant part can be bound to the nearby
binding bar. When binding the signal cables, be sure to keep proper distance away
from power cables.
z LAN Switch
6) Power cable
Refer to Figure 8-18 to connect the power cable of LAN Switch. Lay the cable along the
inside of rear left column. The redundant part shall be tied to the nearby binding bar.
7) Network cable
Connect the two 100 Mbit/s network ports of LAN Switch to the corresponding network
ports of the server, using two strings of straight through cables. When three LAN
Switches are configured, LAN Switch No.4 is for connecting to the background, No.3 is
for connecting to the foreground switch and No.2 is for backup. When four LAN
Switches are configured, No.4 is used to connect the background, No.2 & 3 are used to
connect the foreground switch and No.1 is for backup.
z -48 V external power cable and external network cable
The entrance and exit for BAM cabinet cabling are as shown in Figure 8-25.
8-27
(1) Cabling hole (Top of side panel) (2) Cabling entrance (Upper left)
(3) Cabling hole (Upper right) (4) Cabling hole (lower left)
(5) Cabling hole (lower right) (6) Cabinet cabling entrance & exit for external cables
Figure 8-25 BAM cabinet cabling entrance & exit
There are two cabling holes on the rear left & right side of the frames in the cabinet.
There are side panels on the two sides of BAM cabinet, with cabling holes on the upper
and lower parts.
8) Downward cabling
External -48 V power cables:
As you can see from Figure 8-25, the cables enter the cabinet at the left side panel
(from rear view), and are connected to the top power distribution frame in the shortest
path. The cables are bound with cable ties on their cabling route.
External network cables:
They enter through the right cabling hole of the upper frame, forward along the right
column of the cabinet and reach the corresponding LAN Switch cabling frame. Then,
they cross LAN Switch panel and connect to LAN Switch in the relevant sockets. Make
sure that the cables are neatly tied on their way.
Adjust the air deflector at the top cabling entrance of the cabinet, so that the entrance
size matches the cross-section area of the cables.
8-28
9) Upward cabling
External -48 V power cables:
As you can see from Figure 8-25, they enter the cabinet from the lower cabling hole at
the left side panel. They forward upward vertically, and finally, connect themselves on
the power distribution frame. Be sure to tie the cables on their way.
External network cables:
They enter through the right cabling hole of the lower frame, forward by the main
cabling trough of the right column of the cabinet and reach the corresponding LAN
Switch cabling frame. Then, they cross LAN Switch panel and connect to LAN Switch in
the relevant sockets. Make sure that the cables are neatly tied on their way.
Adjust the air deflector at the bottom cabling entrance of the cabinet, so that the
entrance size matches the cross-section area of the cables.
8.6 Installing Doors
8.6.1 Installing Side Panel
Before installing the side panels, complete the installation of all the devices and laying
of all types of cables (that is, all the hardware) in the rack. While installing the doors, the
side panels are installed first and then the front door & finally the back door.
The side panels of the BAM cabinet are very wide and quite heavy. Usually, they need
two persons to lift and complete the installation. During installation, each person should
grasp one side of the side panel and align it with the top & bottom ends of the rack and
then complete the mounting of the door onto the rack.
8.6.2 Installing Front and Back Doors
A BAM cabinet has one front door and one back door. The installation procedure is as
follows:
1) Hold the door so that the cross-pin on the rack is in line with the hole at the lower
right side of the door and then put the lower part of the left side also in position.
2) Pull down the triangular hook pin of the upper part of the left side of the door. Align
the hole on the door with the hole on the top of the rack and release the hook pin,
so that with the elastic force the hook pin locks into the hole and fastens the door
onto the rack. Repeat the same for the back door also.
Refer to Figure 8-26 for the view of the rack after completion of the front & back doors
installation.
8-29
8.7 Label
The installation procedure for the labels is the same as that carried out while installing
the assembled rack.
Figure 8-26 Profile of BAM Server Cabinet after the doors are installed
8-30
Installation Manual - Volume 1 Chapter 9 Installing Cables and Optical Fibers
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System in the Cabinet
Chapter 9 Installing Cables and Optical Fibers in

the Cabinet
9.1 Installing Cables in AM/CM

9.1.1 Types and Functions of Cables
The cables in the AM/CM and Service Processing Module (SPM) are of the following
types:
HDLC cable: This connects the HDLC links (Signaling HW) between the frames in the
AM/CM and the SPM.
HW signal cables: They are the service links (Service HW) between the SPM frame,
the Shared Resource Module frame (SRM frame) and the Cable Interface Module
frame (LIM frame: LIM12# and LIM13#).
Clock cable: This provides the 8 KHz and 2 MHz Clock reference sources for each
frame.
Serial port control cable of Clock frame: This connects the Central Processing Module
frame (CPM frame) to the Clock frame, enabling the Host to perform the management
and control function over the Clock frame.
Emergency serial port cable: This establishes a serial port path between the CPM
frame and other frames, for achieving alarm information report and equipment
maintenance in emergency.
Other signal cables: These include row/column indicator signal cable, row indicator
cascading cable, alarm cable for the secondary power supply and fan power signal
cable.
9.1.2 Installing HDLC Signal Cables
In the AM/CM and SPM, HDLC cable serves as the physical path of HDLC links
(Signaling HW) between the frames. HDLC link hereinafter is called HW for short. The
information exchange between the frames is performed by the Communication Control
Module frame (CCM frame), therefore all HDLC cables are connected to the CCM
frame. The frames connected by HDLC cables include: CPM frame, Central Network
frame (CNET frame), LIM frame, CCM frame and SPM frame. The CCM frame can
provide two completely independent communication planes and connect other frames
in the same topology structure.
9-1
I. Cable structure
HDLC cable is the twisted pair with one 2*5pin connector on each end. HW cables are
inserted into the jacks of the upper row (refer to Figure 9-1).
1 2 3 4 5
图3-1
Figure 9-1 Illustration of HDLC cable structure
II. Illustration of backplane sockets and cable connections
In the AM/CM and SPM, there are five types of backplanes that require the HDLC
cables to be connected on, namely, Backplane of Communication Control Frame
(CCB), Backplane of Network Frame (CNB), Backplane of Central Processing Frame
(CPB), Backplane of Line Interface Frame (LIB) and Backplane of Service Processing
Frame (SPB). The illustration of cable connections and sockets of each backplane are
shown in the Figure 9-2. The pin positions marked with "HWXX" indicate the HWs led
out from the local frame and the corresponding HW numbers, while marked with
"CLKX" indicate the system clocks led into the local frame.
9-2
CCB:
FSN FSN FSN BAC BAC FSN FSN FSN

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
A re a w ith o u t
. . . . . . . .
d istrib u tio n . . . . . . . .
. JB 31 . JB 2 7 . JB 2 3 . JB 19 . JB 15 . J B 11 . JB 7 . JB3
. . . . . . . .
24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26
27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27
28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28
29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29
30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31
32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33
34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34
35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35
36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36
37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37
T h re e ro w s 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38
JB 32 JB 2 8 JB 2 4 JB 20 JB 16 JB12 JB 8 JB4
of p in s le ft id le 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39
40 40 40 CLK0 C LK0 40 40 40
41 41 41 41 41 41 41 41
42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42
43 43 43 CLK1 C LK1 43 43 43
44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44
45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45
46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46
47 47 47 47 47 47 47 47
48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48
49 49 49 49 49 49 49 49
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
H o t-p lu g g a b le
so cke t
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
HW 55 HW 39 HW 23 2 2 HW 23 HW 39 H W 55
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
HW 54 HW 38 HW 22 5 5 HW 22 HW 38 H W 54
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
HW 53 HW 37 HW 21 8 8 HW 21 HW 37 H W 53
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
HW 52 HW 36 HW 20 11 11 HW 20 HW 36 H W 52
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
T h re e ro w s 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
JB 33 JB 2 9 JB 2 5 JB 21 JB 17 JB13 JB 9 JB5
of p in s le ft id le 1 4 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
HW 51 HW 35 HW 19 15 15 HW 19 HW 35 H W 51
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17
HW 50 HW 34 HW 18 18 18 HW 18 HW 34 H W 50
19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
HW 49 HW 33 HW 17 21 21 HW 17 HW 33 H W 49
22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22
23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23
HW 48 HW 32 HW 16 24 24 HW 16 HW 32 H W 48
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26
HW 47 HW 31 HW 15 HW 7 HW 7 HW 15 HW 31 H W 47
28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28
29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29
31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31
32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34
35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35
37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37
T h re e ro w s 38 JB 34 38 JB 3 0 38 JB 2 6 38 JB 22 38 JB 18 38 JB14 38 JB 10 38 JB6
of p in s le ft id le 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39
HW 43 HW 27 H W 11 HW 3 HW 3 H W 11 HW 27 H W 43
41 41 41 41 41 41 41 41
42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42
44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44
45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45
47 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 L o ck e r
48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
C o m m u n ica tio n p la n e 1 C o m m u n ic a tio n p la n e 0
FSN: Frame Switching Network Board BAC: Bus Administration Control Board
9-3
CNB:
3# frame distribution diagram

1 1
2 2
Area without distribution 3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
JB105 7 JB102 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 HW4
HW5 14
15 15
16 16
2# frame distribution diagram 17 17
18 18
37 37 37 37 19 19
38 38 38 38 20 20
39 39 39 39 21 21
40 40 40 40 22 22
41 41 41 41 23 23
42 42 42 42 24 24
Area without 43 43 43 43 25 25
distribution 44 44 44 44 26 26
45 45 45 45 27 27
46 46 46 46 CLK0 CLK0
47 47 47 47 29 29
JB77 JB74 48 JB71 48 JB68 48
48 30 30
49 49 49 49 31 31
50 50 50 50 CLK1 CLK1
51 51 51 51 33 33
52 52 52 52 34 34
53 53 53 53 35 HW6
Clock 54 54 54 54 HW7 36
distribution 55 55 55 55 37 37
56 56 56 56 38 38
area 57 57 57 57 JB106 39 JB103 39
CLK0 58 58 CLK0 40 40
59 59 59 59 41 41
60 Locker 60 60 60 Locker 42 42
CLK1 61 61 CLK1 43 43
62 62 62 62 44 44
63 63 63 63 45 45
64 64 64 64 46 46
65 65 65 65 47 FHW6
JB78 66 JB75 66 JB72 66 JB69 66 FHW7 48
Left half frame Right half frame Left half frame Right half frame
9-4
CPB:
BCP BCP CDP1 CDP1 CDP0 CDP0 Unused Unused AMP AMP
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
13 HW4 13 HW4 13 HW4 13 HW4 13 HW4
HW5 14 HW5 14 HW5 14 HW5 14 HW5 14
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17
18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21
10 slots in 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22
23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23
the left half 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 MTX0
frame are 25
26
25
26
25
26
25
26
25
26
25
26
25
26
25
26
25
26
25
26 Locker
not used 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27
CLK0 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28
29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29
30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31
CLK1 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33
34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34
35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35
36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36
37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37
38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38
39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39
40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
41 41 41 41 41 41 41 41 41 41
42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42
43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43
44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44
45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45
46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46
47 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 47 47
48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48
JB24 JB22 JB20 JB18 JB16 JB14 JB12 JB10 JB8 JB6
BCP: Bus Control Processing Board CDP: Central Database Process

AMP: Administration Processor Board
9-5
LIB:
QSI QSI
1 1
2 2
Area without 3 JB13 3 JB11
4 4
distribution 5 5
6 6
7 7
8 CLK0
Clock 9 9
distribution 10 10
11 CLK1
area 12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
18 18
19 19
20 HW0
21 21
22 22
23 HW1
24 24
25 25
26 HW2
27 27
HW 28 28
29 HW3
distribution 30 30
31 31
area 32 HW4
33 33
34 34
35 HW5
36 34
37 37
38 HW6
39 39
40 40 Locker
41 HW7
42 42
QSI: High-Speed System Interface Board
9-6
SPB (right half frame in the rear view):

CPC1 BCC1 Standby BCC0 Active CPC0 SPC1 Standby SPC1 Active SPC0 Standby SPC0 Active
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
13 13 HW 0 HW 0 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
14 HW 1 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
HW 0 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17
18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21
22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22
23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23
24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26
27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27
28 CLK0 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28
29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29
30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31
32 CLK1 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33
34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34
35 35 35 35 35 35 HW 0 35 35 35 HW 0
36 36 36 36 HW 1 36 36 36 HW 1 36 36
37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37
38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38
39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39
40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
41 41 41 41 41 41 41 41 41 41 41
42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42
43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43
44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44
45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45
46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46
47 47 47 47 47 47 HW 2 47 47 47 HW 2
48 48 48 48 HW 3 48 48 48 HW 3 48 48
JB26 JB24 JB22 JB20 JB18 JB16 JB14 JB12 JB10 JB8 JB6
Slot position:13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
CPC: Central Processing Unit BCC: Bus Communication Control Board

SPC: Service Processing Board
9-7
SPB (left half frame in the rear view):

S P C 3 S ta n d b y S P C 3 A c tive S P C 2 S ta n d b y S P C 2 A c tive
CPC2 CPC3 CPC4 CPC5 CPC6 CPC7 CPC8 CPC9 CPC 10 C P C 11
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
13 HW 0 13 HW 0 13 HW 0 13 HW 0 13 HW 0
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
HW 0 17 HW 0 17 HW 0 17 HW 0 17 HW 0 17
18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21
22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22
23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23
24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26
27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27
28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28
29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29
30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31
32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33
34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34
35 35 35 35 35 HW 0 35 35 35 HW 0
36 36 36 HW 1 36 36 36 HW 1 36 36
37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37
38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38
39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39
40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
41 41 41 41 41 41 41 41 41 41
42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42 42
43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43 43
44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44 44
45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45
46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46
47 47 47 47 47 HW 2 47 47 47 HW 2
48 48 48 HW 3 48 48 48 HW 3 48 48
JB46 JB44 JB42 JB 40 JB 38 JB 36 JB34 JB32 JB 30 JB 28
S lo t p o s itio n : 2 3 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14
Figure 9-2 Illustration of cable connections and sockets on respective backplanes
III. HW cable connection and configuration description
In the AM/CM and SPM frames, the CPM is always configured with 6 HWs, three on
each plane. The CNET is always configured with 2 HWs, one on each plane. The LIM is
configured with 2~8 HWs, 1~4 on each plane. The SPM is configured with 6~10 HWs,
3~5 on each plane. Before delivery, cables are connected in the frames to the
maximum configuration. One end of the cable is connected to the backplane and the
other end disconnected and left free. Part of HW cables will be inserted into the
distribution trough on the backplane of the CCM frame on site according to the
configuration data. The configuration table will be completed by Engineering Design
9-8
Department. HW configuration principle is described below to help understand the

content of the table:
z The Administration cabinet is always connected to the 16 HWs provided by the
BAC board, 8 on each plane. The default connection is shown in Table 9-1.
z The LIM frame that provides Switching Module (SM) and Remote Switching
Module (RSM) interfaces is SM interface.
z The LIM frame that provides SPM and SM interfaces is always configured with 8
HWs, 4 on each plane. SM interface includes SM and RSM modes. It should be
noted that the SPM interface provided by the MHI board is always inserted into
12# and 13# LIM frames in the AM/CM.
z In the CCM, the 56 HWs are divided into 14 groups with 4 HWs forming a unit on
each Communication plane. The 4 HWs in the above two types of LIM frames
should be in the same group, for example, HW8-HW11, HW12-HW15,
HW16-HW19. Trans-group distribution should be avoided.
z The LIM frame providing the pure trunk interface should be configured with 2 HWs,
one on each plane. The other 6 HW cables should be tied together and kept for
future use. The valid HWs in the LIM frame with different configurations are shown
in Table 9-2.
z The SPM frame can be configured with 2 pairs, 3 pairs or 4 pairs of SPCs; the
corresponding HW configurations are 6, 8 and 10 HWs. If the configured HWs are
fewer than 10, the remained HWs are bound together and kept for future use. The
valid HWs in the SPM frame with different configurations are shown in
Table 9-3.
Table 9-1 HDLC cable connection and default configuration in the main control cabinet
HW Number and Pin Position

HW Type Pin Position
of CCM Frame
JB18: Row 24 and Row 25 (0# CCM frame 0#BAC - Distribution is
plane HW0) BHW unnecessary
JB18: Row 21 and Row 22 (0# CPM frame AMP -
JB6: Row 13 and 14
plane HW1) HW4
JB18: Row 18 and Row 19 (0#
Reserved
plane HW2)
Reserved
plane HW3)
JB103: Row 35 and
Row 36 (the Network
Communication
JB18: Row 11 and Row 12 (0# CNET frame NCC - Control Board (NCC)
plane HW4) HW6 is the SPC).
JB103: Row 13 and
Row 14 (the NCC is
the CPC).
9-9
HW Number and Pin Position

HW Type Pin Position
of CCM Frame
Reserved
plane HW5)
JB18: Row 5 and Row 6 (0# CPM frame CDP0 - JB14: Row 13 and
plane HW6) HW4 Row 14
JB22: Row 24 and Row 25 (1# CCM frame 1#BAC - Distribution is

plane HW0) BHW unnecessary
JB22: Row 21 and Row 22 (1# CPM frame AMP - JB8: Row 14 and Row
plane HW1) HW5 15

Reserved
plane HW2)

Reserved
plane HW3)
JB103: Row 47 and

Row 48 (the NCC is
JB22: Row 11 and Row 12 (1# CNET frame NCC - the SPC).
plane HW4) FHW6 JB103: Row 14 and
Row 15 (the NCC is
the CPC).

Reserved
plane HW5)
Note:
HW cables of the main control cabinet have been connected before delivery. Generally,
no adjustment is needed.
Table 9-2 HDLC cable connection and configuration in the LIM frame
Pin Position in LIM

HW Type Remarks
Frame
0#LIM (4#frame) - JB11: Row 20 and Row
Obligatory
HW0 21
0#LIM (4#frame) - JB11: Row 23 and Row Configured if the SM interface is
HW1 24 provided
9-10
Pin Position in LIM

HW Type Remarks
Frame
HW2 27 provided

HW3 30 provided
0#LIM (4#frame) – JB11: Row 32 and Row

Obligatory
HW4 33

HW5 36 provided

HW6 39 provided

HW7 42 provided

Obligatory
HW0 21

HW1 24 provided

HW2 27 provided

HW3 30 provided

Obligatory
HW4 33

HW5 36 provided

HW6 39 provided

HW7 42 provided

Obligatory
HW0 21

HW1 24 provided

HW2 27 provided

HW3 30 provided

Obligatory
HW4 33

HW5 36 provided
9-11
Pin Position in LIM

HW Type Remarks
Frame
HW6 39 provided

HW7 42 provided

Obligatory
HW0 21

HW1 24 provided

HW2 27 provided

HW3 30 provided

Obligatory
HW4 33

HW5 36 provided

HW6 39 provided

HW7 42 provided

Obligatory
HW0 21

HW1 24 provided

HW2 27 provided

HW3 30 provided

Obligatory
HW4 33

HW5 36 provided

HW6 39 provided

HW7 42 provided

Obligatory
HW0 21

HW1 24 provided
9-12
Pin Position in LIM

HW Type Remarks
Frame
HW2 27 provided

HW3 30 provided

Obligatory
HW4 33

HW5 36 provided

HW6 39 provided

HW7 42 provided

Obligatory
HW0 21

HW1 24 provided

HW2 27 provided

HW3 30 provided

Obligatory
HW4 33

HW5 36 provided

HW6 39 provided

HW7 42 provided

Obligatory
HW0 21

HW1 24 provided

HW2 27 provided

HW3 30 provided

Obligatory
HW4 33

HW5 36 provided
9-13
Pin Position in LIM

HW Type Remarks
Frame
HW6 39 provided

HW7 42 provided

Obligatory
HW0 21

HW1 24 provided

HW2 27 provided

HW3 30 provided

Obligatory
HW4 33

HW5 36 provided

HW6 39 provided

HW7 42 provided

Obligatory
HW0 21

HW1 24 provided

HW2 14 provided

HW3 30 provided

Obligatory
HW4 33

HW5 36 provided

HW6 39 provided

HW7 42 provided

Obligatory
HW0 21

HW1 24 provided
9-14
Pin Position in LIM

HW Type Remarks
Frame
HW2 27 provided

HW3 30 provided

Obligatory
HW4 33

HW5 36 provided

HW6 39 provided

HW7 42 provided

Obligatory
HW0 21

HW1 24 provided

HW2 27 provided

HW3 30 provided

Obligatory
HW4 33

HW5 36 provided

HW6 39 provided

HW7 42 provided

Obligatory
HW0 21

Obligatory
HW1 24

Obligatory
HW2 27

Obligatory
HW3 30

Obligatory
HW4 33

Obligatory
HW5 36
9-15
Pin Position in LIM

HW Type Remarks
Frame
Obligatory
HW6 39

Obligatory
HW7 42

Obligatory
HW0 21

Obligatory
HW1 24

Obligatory
HW2 27

Obligatory
HW3 30

Obligatory
HW4 33

Obligatory
HW5 36

Obligatory
HW6 39

Obligatory
HW7 42
Remarks:
z The HDLC bandwidth resource configured by the CCM for each LIM frame that
provides SM interface can be distributed to a maximum of 31 modules.
z The DIP switch setting on the LIM frame backplane must correspond to the
configured frame number (frame numbers are given in brackets in Table 9-2).
Table 9-3 HDLC cable default configuration and connection in the SPM frame
HW Type Pin Position Remarks

0#SPM frame
0#SPM frame JB6: Row 35 and

Obligatory
SPC0 - HW0 Row 36

Obligatory
SPC0 - HW2 Row 48

Obligatory
SPC1 - HW0 Row 36

Obligatory
SPC1 - HW2 Row 48
9-16

0#SPM frame BCC JB22: Row 13 and
Obligatory
- HW0 Row 14

Obligatory
- HW1 Row 15
0#SPM frame JB30: Row 35 and Configured if the third pair of SPCs is
SPC2 - HW0 Row 36 configured in a frame.
0#SPM frame JB38: Row 35 and Configured if the fourth pair of SPCs is
1#SPM frame
Obligatory
SPC0 - HW0 Row 36
Obligatory
SPC0 - HW2 Row 48
Obligatory
SPC1 - HW0 Row 36
Obligatory
SPC1 - HW2 Row 48
Obligatory
- HW0 Row 14
Obligatory
- HW1 Row 15
2#SPM frame
Obligatory
SPC0 - HW0 Row 36

Obligatory
SPC0 - HW2 Row 48

Obligatory
SPC1 - HW0 Row 36
9-17

Obligatory
SPC1 - HW2 Row 48

Obligatory
- HW0 Row 14

Obligatory
- HW1 Row 15
3#SPM frame
Obligatory
SPC0 - HW0 Row 36
Obligatory
SPC0 - HW2 Row 48
Obligatory
SPC1 - HW0 Row 36
Obligatory
SPC1 - HW2 Row 48
Obligatory
- HW0 Row 14
Obligatory
- HW1 Row 15
4#SPM frame
Obligatory
SPC0 - HW0 Row 36

Obligatory
SPC0 - HW2 Row 48
9-18

Obligatory
SPC1 - HW0 Row 36

Obligatory
SPC1 - HW2 Row 48

Obligatory
- HW0 Row 14

Obligatory
- HW1 Row 15
5#SPM frame
Obligatory
SPC0 - HW0 Row 36
Obligatory
SPC0 - HW2 Row 48
Obligatory
SPC1 - HW0 Row 36
Obligatory
SPC1 - HW2 Row 48
Obligatory
- HW0 Row 14
Obligatory
- HW1 Row 15
6#SPM frame
Obligatory
SPC0 - HW0 Row 36
9-19

Obligatory
SPC0 - HW2 Row 48

Obligatory
SPC1 - HW0 Row 36

Obligatory
SPC1 - HW2 Row 48

Obligatory
- HW0 Row 14

Obligatory
- HW1 Row 15
7#SPM frame
Obligatory
SPC0 - HW0 Row 36
Obligatory
SPC0 - HW2 Row 48
Obligatory
SPC1 - HW0 Row 36
Obligatory
SPC1 - HW2 Row 48
Obligatory
- HW0 Row 14
Obligatory
- HW1 Row 15
8#SPM frame
9-20

Obligatory
SPC0 - HW0 Row 36

Obligatory
SPC0 - HW2 Row 48

Obligatory
SPC1 - HW0 Row 36

Obligatory
SPC1 - HW2 Row 48

Obligatory
- HW0 Row 14

Obligatory
- HW1 Row 15
9#SPM frame
Obligatory
SPC0 - HW0 Row 36
Obligatory
SPC0 - HW2 Row 48
Obligatory
SPC1 - HW0 Row 36
Obligatory
SPC1 - HW2 Row 48
Obligatory
- HW0 Row 14
Obligatory
- HW1 Row 15
9-21

9.1.3 Installing HW Signal Cables
The Multi-HW Interface Boards (MHI) of 12# and 13# LIM frames in the AM/CM
distribute the signaling and shared resources (service HWs) to the SPM and SRM
frames, among which the 2 Mbit/s HWs are connected to the CPC of the SPM frame
and the 8 Mbit/s HWs are connected to the Special Voice Board (SPT)/Resources
Sharing Board (SRC) of the SRM frame.
I. Cable structure
There are two types of HW signal cables: 2 Mbit/s HW and 8 Mbit/s HW. The 2 Mbit/s
HW signal cable is used to connect the SPM to the LIM frame and the 8 Mbit/s HW
signal cable is used to connect the SRM to the LIM frame.
The 2 Mbit/s HW signal cable terminates on the LIM frame side with an 8*3PIN
connector, which outleads two 2 Mbit/s HW signals. The other end has two 2*5PIN
connectors, each one providing one 2 Mbit/s HW. The pins of the upper rows of
connectors are the connection points for 2 Mbit/s HW signal cables. The cable structure
is shown in Figure 9-3.
Figure 9-3 Illustration of 2 Mbit/s HW signal cable for connecting the SPM frame and
the LIM frame
The 8 Mbit/s HW signal cable connecting the SRM frame with the LIM frame consists of
eight twisted pairs, terminated with an 8*3PIN connector, each cable providing two 8
Mbit/s HWs. The cable structure is shown Figure 9-4.
Figure 9-4 Illustration of 8 Mbit/s HW signal cable for connecting the SRM frame and
the LIM frame
9-22
The setting of HW signal cables on the backplane is shown in Figure 9-5.
Figure 9-5 Illustration of HW signal cable installation on the backplane of the LIM
frame.
II. Illustration of backplane sockets of LIM frame (12# and 13#)
The 12# and 13# LIM frames are exclusively used to connect the SRM and the SPM. To
meet the cabling requirement, eight Outlet Transfer Boards (HBC) are fixed on the
backplane of the LIM frame. The HBCs multiplex the signals of the active/standby MHIs
and provide eight sockets, numbered 0#~7# from top downward, as shown in Figure
9-6. Sockets 0#, 1#, 2# and 4# can provide HW interfaces of 8 Mbit/s and 2 Mbit/s.
Sockets 3#, 5#, 6#, 7# can only provide HW interfaces of 2 Mbit/s.
There are a total of thirty-two 2 Mbit/s HWs on the MHI, which are numbered by HW
group number 0~31 in the software setting. The MHI can be set in three working modes:
eight 8 Mbit/s HWs, sixteen 4 Mbit/s HWs, eight 2 Mbit/s HWs+ six 8 Mbit/s HWs. The
interfaces and HW group numbers in the three modes are shown in
Table 9-4. Each SPT/SRC in the SRM frame should be configured with two 8 Mbit/s
HWs while each CPC in the SPM frame should be with one 2 Mbit/s HW. Due to
different configurations in different offices, there is no pre-fixed corresponding
relationship between HW sockets of the HBC and the boards of the SPM frame & SRM
frame. Therefore, all sockets that may be cabled on the backplanes of the SRM and the
SPM are connected with cables during delivery of the switch. During the onsite
installation, Engineering Design Department will work out a configuration table
according to the actual office configurations. The installers may insert the necessary
cables into the sockets of the HBC, referring to the configuration table and the labels on
the other ends of the cables. At the same time, the data are set in the background
according to the configuration table to match the software and hardware.
9-23
Figure 9-6 The complete view of HWs in the LIM frame (12# and 13#)
Table 9-4 HW interface table of the MHI in different modes
Pure 2 Mbit/s HW Pure 8 Mbit/s HW 6×8 Mbit/s HW+8×2

Socket
Mode Mode Mbit/s HW Mode
0# 16, 17 0-3, 4-7 0-3, 4-7
1# 18, 19 8-11, 12-15 8-11, 12-15
2# 20, 21 16-19, 20-23 16-19, 20-23
3# 22, 23 Invalid Invalid
4# 24, 25 24-27, 28-31 24, 25
5# 26, 27 Invalid 26, 27
6# 28, 29 Invalid 28, 29
7# 30, 31 Invalid 30, 31
Note:
Each socket can provide two 2 Mbit/s HWs or two 8 Mbit/s HWs. The data in the table
are the HW group numbers of the MHI corresponding to the 2 Mbit/s HWs or 8 Mbit/s
HWs led-outs.
The label format of 2 Mbit/s HW and 8 Mbit/s HW signal cables at the LIM frame side is
"Frame name-Slot position-LIM-HW". For example, "SPM3-Slot 23, 22-LIM-HW"
means this HW signal cable is from 3# SPM frame, where the first HW is connected to
the CPC at Slot 23 and the second HW is connected to the CPC at Slot 22. "SRM2-Slot
5-LIM-HW" means that this HW signal cable is from 2# SRM frame and the slot number
is 5. In the configuration table provided by the Engineering Design Department, the
9-24
label is used to distinguish the cables. The label contents are shown in Table 9-5 and
Table 9-6.
Table 9-5 Cable connections between the SPM frame and the LIM frame
Label Content of the Pin Position in SPM Frame

Frame
Cables at LIM Frame
Name The 1st Channel The 2nd Channel
Side
SPM0-Slot 10, JB20: Row 13 and JB26: Row 17 and
13-LIM-HW Row 14 Row 18
0#SPM 20-LIM-HW Row 18 Row 14
frame SPM0-Slot 19, JB38: Row 17 and JB36: Row 13 and
2#SPM SPM2-Slot 10, JB20: Row 13 and JB26: Row 17 and
frame 13-LIM-HW Row 14 Row 18
9-25

Frame
Cables at LIM Frame
Side
9-26

Frame
Cables at LIM Frame
Side
9-27

Frame
Cables at LIM Frame
Side
Table 9-6 Cable connections between the SRM frame and the LIM frame
Frame Label Content of the Cables at

Pin Position in SRM Frame
Name LIM Frame Side
0#SRM SRM0-Slot 4-LIM-HW SPT0 (Slot 4, lower 24-31PIN)
frame
SRM0-Slot 5-LIM-HW SPT1 (Slot 5, lower 24-31PIN)
SRM0-Slot 6-LIM-HW SRC0 (Slot 6, lower 24-31PIN)


9-28
Frame Label Content of the Cables at

Pin Position in SRM Frame
Name LIM Frame Side



1#SRM
frame
9.1.4 Installing Clock Signal Cables
In the AM/CM, clock signal cable is used to provide 8K Hz and 2M Hz reference clock
for the frames. The start point of the clock signal cable is always the Clock Module
frame (CKM frame) and the end point is the frame that needs the Reference Clock,
such as CPM frame, CCM frame, CNET frame, LIM frame and SPM frame. There can
9-29
be a maximum of 14 LIM frames and 10 SPM frames. The clock signal input terminals
of individual frames should be connected with the corresponding sockets on the
backplanes of the CKM frame.
I. Clock cable structure
The clock signal cable is achieved through four twisted pairs. The end at the CKM
frame side is a 2*5PIN connector, the jacks of which out-lead two clock signals. There
are two 2*5PIN connectors at the other side, the upper jacks of which are the
connecting points of the clock cables (refer to Figure 9-7). The CKM frame provides
one group of 2 clock signal cables for each CPM frame and LIM frame, 4 groups (two in
each group) for CNET frame, two groups (two in each group) for CCM frame. The two
clock signal cables in each group are led out from different clock drive boards, working
in active/standby mode to improve the system reliability.
1 2 3 4 5
图3-2
Figure 9-7 Schematic diagram of clock signal cable structure
II. Illustration of backplane sockets of CLM frame
The illustration of cable connection and sockets of the backplane of the CKM frame
(Backplane of the Clock Frame-CKB) is shown in Figure 9-8. The pin marked with CKx
indicates the system clock number provided by the frame. The system clock provided
by the CKD0 (Clock Drive Board) is called clock No.0 and the other clock provided by
the CKD1 is called clock No.1. To ensure the active/standby relation of the two clock
signals in each group, the two clocks should be clock No.0 and clock No.1 respectively.
On the backplanes of other frames, the clock "CLK0" should be connected to the slot of
the CKD0 and the clock "CLK1" should be connected to the slot of the CKD1. The
detailed connection is shown in Table 9-7.
9-30
CKD1 CKD0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
Short pin area 6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
15 15
16 16
17 17
12 rows of pins 18 18
19 19
left idle
20 20
21 21
22 22
23 23
24 24
CK0 CK0
CK1 CK1
27 27
CK2 CK2
CK3 CK3
HT1 30 HT3 30
CK4 CK4
CK5 CK5
33 33
CK6 CK6
CK7 CK7
36 36
CK8 CK8
Clock CK9 CK9
39 39
distribution CK10 CK10
area CK11 CK11
42 42
CK12 CK12
CK13 CK13
45 45
CK14 CK14
CK15 CK15
48 48
HT2 HT4
CK16 CK16
CK17 CK17
3 3
CK18 CK18
CK19 CK19
6 6
CK20 CK20
Clock CK21
9
CK21
9
distribution CK22 CK22
CK23 CK23
area 12 12
CK24 CK24
CK25 CK25
15 15
CK26 CK26
CK27 CK27
18 18
CK28 CK28
CK29 CK29
21 21 Locker
CK30 CK30
CK31 CK31
24 24
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
12 rows of pins 5 5
left idle 6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
Clock No.1 Clock No.0
Figure 9-8 Illustration of cable connection and sockets on the CKB
9-31
Table 9-7 Connection of clock signal cables
Pin Position in Other

Pin Position in CKM Frame
Frame Frames
Name No. 0 (CKD0 No. 1 (CKD1 No.2
No.1 Channel
Slot) Slot) Channel
JB16: Row
JB16: Row 28
CCM (right) 32 and Row
and Row 29
HT3: Row 25 HT1: Row 25 and 33
and Row 26 Row 26 JB20: Row
JB20: Row 32
CCM (left) 32 and Row
and Row 33
33
JB103: Row JB103: Row
CNET
16 and Row 20 and Row
(upper right)
HT3: Row 28 HT1: Row 28 and 17 21
and Row 29 Row 29 JB106: Row JB106: Row
CNET
16 and Row 20 and Row
(upper left)
17 21
JB69: Row
CNET JB69: Row 58
61 and Row
(lower right) and Row 59
CNET JB78: Row 58
61 and Row
(lower left) and Row 59
62
JB24: Row
JB24: Row 28
32 and Row
and Row 29
CPM
and Row 35 Row 35 The other The other
channel channel
reserved reserved
JB11: Row
JB11: Row 8
LIM0 11 and Row
and Row 9
JB11: Row 8
LIM1 11 and Row
and Row 9
12
JB11: Row
JB11: Row 8
LIM2 11 and Row
and Row 9
JB11: Row 8
LIM3 11 and Row
and Row 9
12
9-32

Frame Frames
No.1 Channel
Slot) Slot) Channel
JB11: Row
JB11: Row 8
LIM4 11 and Row
and Row 9
JB11: Row 8
LIM5 11 and Row
and Row 9
12
JB11: Row
JB11: Row 8
LIM6 11 and Row
and Row 9
JB11: Row 8
LIM7 11 and Row
and Row 9
12
JB11: Row
JB11: Row 8
LIM8 11 and Row
and Row 9
JB11: Row 8
LIM9 11 and Row
and Row 9
12
JB11: Row
JB11: Row 8
LIM10 11 and Row
and Row 9
JB11: Row 8
LIM11 11 and Row
and Row 9
12
JB11: Row
HT4: Row 7 HT2: Row 7 and JB11: Row 8
LIM12 11 and Row
and Row 8 Row 8 and Row 9
12
Frame JB11: Row

name Pin position in Pin position in JB11: Row 8
11 and Row
CKM frame other frames and Row 9
LIM13 12
JB24: Row
JB24: Row 28
SPM0 32 and Row
and Row 29
JB24: Row 28
SPM1 32 and Row
and Row 29
33
9-33

Frame Frames
No.1 Channel
Slot) Slot) Channel
JB24: Row
JB24: Row 28
SPM2 32 and Row
and Row 29
JB24: Row 28
SPM3 32 and Row
and Row 29
33
JB24: Row
JB24: Row 28
SPM4 32 and Row
and Row 29
JB24: Row 28
SPM5 32 and Row
and Row 29
33
JB24: Row
JB24: Row 28
SPM6 32 and Row
and Row 29
JB24: Row 28
SPM7 32 and Row
and Row 29
33
JB24: Row
JB24: Row 28
SPM8 32 and Row
and Row 29
JB24: Row 28
SPM9 32 and Row
and Row 29
33
9.1.5 Installing Control Serial Port Cables of CKM Frame
The control serial port of the CKM frame is used to connect the CPM frame to the CKM
frame. The Host manages and controls the CKM frame through this serial port.
The control serial port cable is 4-core twisted pair. One end is a 2*5PIN connector and
the other end is a 4PIN connector. The setting position is shown in Table 9-8.
Table 9-8 Installation of the control serial port cable of the CKM frame
Pin Position in CPM Frame Pin Position in CKM Frame

JB6: Row 24 and Row 25 JT1
9-34
9.1.6 Installing Emergency Serial Port Cables
The emergency serial port is the path for serial data that run through the whole system
in the AM/CM and SPM. It is connected with all frames except the CKM frame. It is used
for status data report of secondary power board (PWS), alarm data report of Alarm
Drive board (AMD), data reports of other boards and equipment maintenance in
emergency.
The entire Emergency serial port system consists of serial port cables of different
lengths, which connect communication nodes in pairs. The cables in the racks are
connected before delivery of the switch. During the onsite installation, the serial port
cables between the racks should be connected. There are two types of serial port
cables as explained below.
I. Emergency serial port communication cables
The emergency serial port communication cable is terminated with 2*4PIN connectors,
used for connecting the nodes in the AM/CM and SPM. These nodes include
backplane frames and the CB01AMDs in the cabinet's power distribution box. In each
frame that needs to be connected with an emergency serial port, there are sockets on
the upper right part of the backplane (rear view). The two sockets are in parallel
connection. All ports can be connected to the same serial bus in a one-to-one
interconnection mode. The two sockets are marked as JT1 and JT2 on the backplane.
On the AMD, there are also two sockets of similar functions, which are marked as J12
and J13. The emergency serial port communication cable is available in five lengths:
0.4 m, 0.8 m, 1.2 m, 2.5 m and 4 m, for connection in different positions. The illustration
of the connectors on the CB01AMD in the power distribution box of the AM/CM and
SPM is shown in Figure 9-9.
Figure 9-9 Illustration of connector locations on the CB01AMD
9-35
II. Emergency serial port communication cables in BAM cabinet
The emergency serial port communication cable in the BAM cabinet is used to connect
the serial port of the AMD in the BAM with the emergency serial port of the main control
cabinet.
Note:
When there is no Inverter in the BAM cabinet, no emergency serial port communication
cable is needed in the BAM cabinet.
There are two types of emergency serial port cables for the BAM cabinet, depending on
different AMDs.
1) BAM cabinet is a welded cabinet and the AMD is the C841AMD (this type should
be used presently).
One end of the cable is 4PIN connector, which is inserted into the serial port socket of
the CB01AMD of the BAM cabinet. The other end is 2*3PIN connector, which is
connected to the No.1 latch hook (the first one from the left) of the C841AMD J1 in BAM
cabinet. It has to be ensured that during the installation, the side of the cable marked
with red line should face upward and the side with the ‘trademark’ should face
downward. The cable connection of the C841AMD in the BAM cabinet is shown in
Figure 9-10.
Matching resistance selection

switch in BAM cabinet should
be set to: OFF, ON
DIP8 Switch
C841AMD
S1
Interface mode selection switch

The address code of BAM
should be set to: OFF OFF ON
DIP4 cabinet should be set to
ON: RS-422 DIP2
Switch
S2 S3
J2
4PIN
4PIN
J5 J4
8PIN
4PIN
4PIN
J7 J6
J5: connecting the alarm switch and indicator
Connecting CCS board

4PIN
4PIN
J9 J8
J1
64 PIN DIN4162 socket, bent
J1.1：RS422 Serial port J1.7: inverter alarm input (BAM cabinet)
CCS: Power Distribution Board

Figure 9-10 Illustration of connector locations on the CB841AMD
9-36
2) BAM cabinet is an assembled cabinet and the AMD is the new CB01AMD (this
type of board is not used presently).
Although they are of different lengths, the communication cables and the emergency
serial port communication cables used in other cabinets are quite alike. The cable is
terminated with 4PIN connectors at both ends. One end is connected to the serial port
socket J12 on the CB01AMD of the main control frame and the other end is connected
to the serial port socket J12 (or J13) on the CB01AMD in BAM cabinet.
In the AM/CM and SPM cabinet, the address code of the AMD should be set to locate
the row and column alarm indicators of the cabinet. The address code is set by the ‘S1
DIP switch-’ on the AMD, and it is encoded in the binary system. The addresses from
D7 to D0 are arranged from left to right. If the switch is set ON, it means "1" and if the
switch is set OFF, it means "0". For detailed description, refer to the related operation of
board switches and indicators. The numbering of respective cabinets is shown in
Figure 9-9. LIM1 stands for the first interface cabinet, LIM2 stands for the second
interface cabinet, LIM3 stands for the third interface cabinet, SRM stands for the shared
resource module cabinet. SPM1, SPM2, SPM3 stand for the first, the second and the
third service processing module cabinets respectively.
Table 9-9 Address code setting table of AMDs in AM/CM and SPM cabinets
Setting of ‘S1 DIP Switch’

Cabinet Type AMD Code
D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
AM (AM main control
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
cabinet)
BAM (BAM cabinet) 1 0 0 0 0 0 1

LIM1 (the first interface
3 0 0 0 0 1 1
cabinet)
LIM2 (the second

4 0 0 0 1 0 0
interface cabinet)
LIM3 (the third interface

5 0 0 0 1 0 1
cabinet)
SRM (SRM cabinet) 16 0 1 0 0 0 0

SPM1 (the first SPM
17 0 1 0 0 0 1
cabinet)
SPM2 (the second SPM
18 0 1 0 0 1 0
cabinet)
SPM3 (the third SPM
19 0 1 0 0 1 1
cabinet)
9-37
Note:
The other three positions of ‘S1 DIP switch’ (D5-D7) can be set to OFF.
When there is Inverters in the BAM cabinet, the illustration of the completed installation
of emergency serial port cable is shown in Figure 9-11.
9-38
When there is no Inverter in the BAM cabinet, the illustration of the completed
Chapter 9 Installing Cables and Optical Fibers
in the Cabinet
Figure 9-11 AM/CM emergency serial port cable installation (rear view of the rack)
installation of emergency serial port cable is shown in

B A M c a b in e t
Power

(5 ) 1 # A M D d is trib u tio n
fra m e
M a tc h in g p o in t L A N S W IC H
D is k a r r a y
S e rv e r
D is p la y
K e y b o a rd
S e rv e r
In v e rte r
9-39
S P M c a b in e t 3 S P M c a b in e t 2 S P M c a b in e t 1 S R M c a b in e t M a in c o n tr o l c a b in e t In te r fa c e c a b in e t 1 In te rfa c e c a b in e t 2 In te r fa c e c a b in e t 3
19#AM D P o w e r d is t r i b u ti o n 18#AM D P o w e r d is t r i b u t io n 17#AM D P o w e r d is t r i b u ti o n 16#AM D P o w e r d is t r i b u t i o n 0#AM D P o w e r d is t r i b u ti o n 3#AM D P o w e r d is t r i b u t io n 4#AM D P o w e r d is t r ib u t i o n 5#AM D P o w e r d is t r ib u t i o n
fa n fr a m e fa n fra m e fa n fr a m e fa n fra m e fa n fr a m e (2 ) fa n fra m e fa n fr a m e fa n fr a m e
(2 ) J T 1 (2 ) (2 ) J T 1 (2 ) (2 ) (2 ) JT1 JT1
E m p ty F ra m e 7 # S P M JJ TT 21 ( 2 ) (1 ) 3#SPM JT2 (1 ) 1#S R M JT2 (1 ) CNET 3 # L IM
JT1
JT2 (1 ) 7 # L IM JT 2 (1 ) 1 1 # L IM (3 ) J T 2 ( 1 )
(4 ) (4 ) J T 1 JT1 (4 ) (4 )
JT2 1 0 # L I M( 4 )
E m p ty F ra m e 6#SPM
J T 1(4 )
JT 2 (1 )
2#SPM JJ TT 21 0#S R M JT 2 (1 ) (4 ) 2 # L IM JT1
JT2 (1 ) 6 # L IM JT1
JT 2 (1 )
JT1
J T 2 (1 )
(1 )
JT 1 JT 1 1#SPM JT1 1 3 # L IM JT1 CPM J T 1 JT1 JT1 9 # L IM JT 1
9#SPM JT2 (1 ) 5#SPM JT2 JT2 JT 2 1 # L IM JT2 (1 ) 5 # L IM J T 2 (1 ) J T 2 (1 )
(1 ) (1 ) (1 ) JT2
( 3 ) JJ TT 12 4#SPM JT1 0#SPM JT1 1 2 # L IM JT1
8#SPM JT2 JT2 JT 2 C C M JJ TT 21 (2 )
STM 0 # L IM JT1 4 # L IM JT 1 8 # L IM
JT 1
JT 2
JT2 JT 2
F a n fra m e F a n fra m e F a n fra m e F a n fra m e F a n fra m e F a n fra m e F a n fra m e F a n fra m e
(1 )---E m e rg e n c y s e r ia l p o r t c a b le -0 .4 m
(3 )--E m e rg e n c y s e r ia l p o r t c a b le -2 .5 m
(4 )---E m e rg e n c y s e r ia l p o r t c a b le
( 5 ) - - - B A M c a b in e t e m e r g e n c y s e r i a l p o r t c a b le
Figure 9-12 AM/CM emergency serial port cable installation (there is no Inverter in the
Chapter 9 Installing Cables and Optical Fibers
in the Cabinet
9-40
S P M c a b in e t 3 S P M c a b in e t 2 S P M c a b in e t 1 S R M c a b in e t M a in c o n tr o l c a b in e t In te r fa c e c a b in e t 1 In te rfa c e c a b in e t 2 In te r fa c e c a b in e t 3
19#AM D P o w e r d is t r i b u ti o n 18#AM D P o w e r d is t r i b u t io n 17#AM D P o w e r d is t r i b u ti o n 16#AM D P o w e r d is t r i b u t i o n 0#AM D P o w e r d is t r i b u ti o n 3#AM D P o w e r d is t r i b u t io n 4#AM D P o w e r d is t r ib u t i o n 5#AM D P o w e r d is t r ib u t i o n
fa n fr a m e fa n fra m e fa n fr a m e fa n fra m e fa n fr a m e (2 ) fa n fra m e fa n fr a m e fa n fr a m e
(2 ) J T 1 (2 ) (2 ) J T 1 (2 ) (2 ) T 1 (2 ) JT1 JT1
E m p ty F ra m e 7 # S P M JJ TT 21 ( 2 ) (1 ) 3#SPM JT2 (1 ) 1#S R M JT2 (1 ) CNET 3 # L IM
J
JT2 (1 ) 7 # L IM JT 2 (1 ) 1 1 # L IM (3 ) J T 2 ( 1 )
(4 ) (4 ) J T 1 JT1 (4 ) (4 )
JT2 1 0 # L I M( 4 )
E m p ty F ra m e 6#SPM
J T 1(4 )
JT 2 (1 )
2#SPM JJ TT 21 0#S R M JT 2 (1 ) (4 ) 2 # L IM JT1
JT2 (1 ) 6 # L IM JT1
JT 2 (1 )
JT1
J T 2 (1 )
(1 )
JT 1 JT 1 1#SPM JT1 1 3 # L IM JT1 CPM JT1 JT1 JT1 9 # L IM JT 1
9#SPM JT2 (1 ) 5#SPM JT2 JT2 JT 2 1 # L IM JT2 (1 ) 5 # L IM J T 2 (1 ) J T 2 (1 )
(1 ) (1 ) (1 ) JT2
( 3 ) JJ TT 12 4#SPM JT1 0#SPM JT1 1 2 # L IM JT1
8#SPM JT2 JT2 JT 2 C C M JJ TT 21 (2 )
STM 0 # L IM JT1 4 # L IM JT 1 8 # L IM
JT 1
JT 2
JT2 JT 2
F a n fra m e F a n fra m e F a n fra m e F a n fra m e F a n fra m e F a n fra m e F a n fra m e F a n fra m e
BAM cabinet)
(3 )--E m e rg e n c y s e r ia l p o r t c a b le -2 .5 m
(4 )---E m e rg e n c y s e r ia l p o r t c a b le
.
9.1.7 Installing Row and Column Alarm Indicator Control Cables
The control cables of the row and column alarm indicators are classified into three
types: row indicator signal cable, column indicator signal cable and row indicator
interconnecting cable. They are used to drive the row and column alarm indicators on
the top of the cabinet.
The row indicator signal cable and the column indicator signal cable are of the same
structure: one end is a 4PIN connector and the other end consists of 6 UT soldering
flakes. The three soldering flakes connected with the back cable are fastened at
the ’Negative’ ends of the three row and column indicators respectively and the other
three connected with the red, yellow & green cables are fastened at the ’Positive’ ends
of the corresponding row and column indicators.
The row indicator connecting cable connects the row indicator control signals of
cabinets so that the row indicators will light up when alarm occurs in any cabinet of the
row.
Note:
The row and column alarm indicators are installed in two modes corresponding to
different AMDs.
z If the AMD is the old C841AMD (which is often used in the old type of cabinet), the
row indicator is inserted in J8 and the column indicator in J9 of the AMD in the
power distribution box. When the two cabinets are interconnected, one end of the
cascading cable should be connected with J6 on the AMD of the left cabinet and
the other end should be connected with J7 on the AMD of the right cabinet. The
interconnection of J6 and J7 on the boards helps the cascading of the row
indicator control cables.
z If the AMD is the new CB01AMD (used for presently assembled cabinet), the row
indicator is inserted in J6 and the column indicator in J7 of the power distribution
box. When the two cabinets are interconnected, one end of the row indicator
cascading cable, which has a 4PIN connector on each end, is connected with J4
on the AMD of the left cabinet and the other end is connected with J5 on the AMD
of the right cabinet. J4 and J5 are interconnected on the boards so that the row
indicator control cables are cascaded.
9.1.8 Installing Fan Power Signal Cables
Fan power signal cable supplies working power for the fan and out-leads the working
status signal of the fan for the monitoring equipment. The fan power signal cable
consists of a blue power connector & a black power connector, which are inserted in the
9-41
bus bar and a fan signal connector, which is inserted in J2 on the CB01AMD in the
power distribution box (or J1.7 on the C841AMD). These connectors are pre-installed
at delivery. If they are to be replaced onsite, care should be taken to the polarity of the
power cable.
9.1.9 Installing Secondary Power Alarm Cables
In the AM/CM, the secondary power alarm cable collects the secondary power alarm
signals output by the Secondary Power Board (PWC) in the CKM frame. This signal is
input into the AMD in the power distribution frame for the AM/CM alarm system to
process. The PWS provides secondary power supply for all other frames, except the
CKM frame. Therefore, there is no need of secondary power alarm cable for the CKM
frame.
9.1.10 Installing DT8K Reference Clock Cables
Two DT8K clock cables are used in the AM/CM to introduce active/standby clock
sources for senior office through the trunk interface that provides the reference clock
sources. One end of the cable is a 4PIN connector, which is inserted in JC1 and JC2 on
the backplane of the CKM frame. The other end is available in three types
corresponding to different trunk interfaces.
z When the trunk interface of the senior office is provided by the Trunk Switching
Module (TSM), the other end is also a 4PIN connector, which is inserted in XM2 on
the backplane of the trunk frame. DIP switches S1-S4 on the backplane are used
to set the Digital Trunk Board (DTF) that provides DT8K reference sources (these
switches should be set to the corresponding positions). The newly designed DT8K
clock cable is shielded cable, with one grounding terminal on each end. The
grounding terminals are inserted in the GND of the bus bar during installation.
z When the 16-Channel E1/T1 Interface Board (ET16) provides the trunk interface
for the senior office, the other end is a RJ11 connector, which is inserted in JP5
(JP5 is an RJ11 socket between the cabling slots) of the E1 Driving Card (DRC)
corresponding to the ET16. The E1 (T1) of the ET16 that provides the clock can be
selected through BAM data setting (ADD BOSRC).
z When the SDH Photoelectric Interface Board (STU) provides the trunk interface
for the senior office, the other end is an 8*3PIN connector, which is inserted in pins
1-8 of JP2 on the STU Conversion Card (TMC) corresponding to the STU.
9.1.11 Installing 2-Mbit/s Reference Clock Cables
z If 75-ohm coaxial cables are used, connect them to the two coaxial connectors J1
and J2 with the silkscreen print “2Mbit/s_IN” on the CKB board. Normally two
channels of synchronous signal are imported, one being active and the other
being standby.
9-42
z If 120-ohm twisted pairs are used, connect them to the pins from row 4 to 11 of
JB5 on the CKB.
9.1.12 Installing 2-MHz Reference Clock Cables
z If 75-ohm coaxial cables are used, connect them to the two coaxial connectors J3
and J4 with the silkscreen print “2MHz_IN” on the CKB board. Normally two
channels of synchronous signal are imported, one being active and the other
being standby.
z If 120-ohm twisted pairs are used, connect them to the pins from row 1 to 8 of JB6
on the CKB.
9.1.13 Installation Specifications for HW Cables and Clock Cables
HW configuration in the AM/CM and the SPM is comparatively flexible. During the
installation, dozens of HW cables from individual frames will be inserted into the
distribution trough of the backplane in the CCM frame; hence, error is likely to occur.
Therefore, the concerned installers should familiarize themselves with the installation
features before operation.
Refer to Figure 9-13 below: When HW cables are inserted into the CCM frame, note
that the upper and the lower edges of the two connectors (two HW cables) are in
alignment with the upper and lower edges of the locker. In such a case, the HW cable
distribution is bound to be correct. It is the same with the clock cable distribution. If the
edge of any connector (at least one edge) is not in alignment with the edge of the locker,
it means that this connector is installed incorrectly.
Locker
Connector
Figure 9-13 Installation skill required for HW cable and clock cable
9-43
The illustration of the completed installation of HW cable and clock cable in the main
control cabinet of the AM/CM is shown in Figure 9-14.
Connectedtothecabinet
with
interfaceunit
Figure 9-14 Illustration of the installation of HW cable and clock cable in the main
control cabinet
9.2 Installing Optical Fibers in AM/CM

9.2.1 Brief Introduction to Optical Fibers in AM/CM
The optical fiber in the AM/CM connects the LIM frame to the CNET frame and
establishes data channel between the LIM frame and the CNET frame. There are a
total of 64 pairs of optical fibers in the AM/CM. In the LIM frame, the optical fiber is
inserted into the High-Speed System Interface Board (QSI) (there are four pairs of
optical interfaces on the active/standby QSIs). As shown in Figure 9-15, the 4 pairs are
numbered as 0#active, 1#active, 0#standby and 1#standby.
P Q Q P
W 0 S 0 S W
S I I S
1 1
Standby
0 1
Active
Figure 9-15 Illustration of optical interfaces in the LIM frame
In the CNET frame, the optical fiber is inserted into the Network Frame Edge Switching
Netboard (SNU) (there are 4 optical interfaces on each SNU and in total 64 interfaces
9-44
on 8 pairs of active/standby SNUs). As shown in Figure 9-16, the 64 optical interfaces

are from 0#active to 31#active & 0#standby to 31#standby.
CNU CNU CNU CNU CNU CNU CNU CNU BDR NCC NCC BDR CNU CNU CNU CNU CNU CNU CNU CNU
P P
W W
S S
4 5
SNU SNU SNU SNU SNU SNU SNU SNU SNU SNU SNU SNU SNU SNU SNU SNU
0 0 4 4 8 8 12 12 16 16 20 20 24 24 28 28
P P P P
W W 1 1 5 5 9 9 13 13 17 17 21 21 25 25 29 29 W W
S S 2 2 6 6 10 10 14 14 18 18 22 22 26 26 30 30 S S
0 1 2 3
3 3 7 7 11 11 15 15 19 19 23 23 27 27 31 31
Active Standby Active Standby Active Standby Active Standby Active Standby Active Standby Active Standby Active Standby
Figure 9-16 Illustration of optical interfaces in the CNET frame
9.2.2 Connecting Optical Fibers in AM/CM
The optical fiber in the AM/CM is the cable between the SNU interface of the CNET
frame and the QSI interface of the LIM frame. In the assembled cabinet, the
single-strand optic fiber is used for easy installation.
On each end of the optical fiber there is a fiber identification ring number marked such
as "1" on one side and "2" at the other end. During installation, two fibers constitute one
pair of receiving and transmitting optical fiber. One end is connected with the QSI
optical interface of the LIM frame and the other end is connected with the SNU optical
interface of the CNET frame.
The basic principles of internal optical fiber setting: The optical interface of the active
QSI is connected to that of the corresponding active SNU and the optical interface of
the standby QSI is connected to that of the standby SNU. The upper interface of each
set of optical interfaces is the receiving port and the lower is the transmitting port. The
transmitting and receiving port of the QSI and the SNU set of optical interfaces are
cross-connected. When preparing the configuration data, it has to be ensured that the
optical interface number configured when a LIM frame is added corresponds to the data
in the table. The connection of the internal optical fiber is shown in Table 9-10.
9-45
Table 9-10 Connection of optical fiber cable inside AM/CM
Optical Interface No. of Optical Interface No. of

Frame No. of LIM
LIM Frame CNET Frame
0# active 0# active
4#frame (0# 0# standby 0# standby

interface frame) 1# active 1# active
1# standby 1# standby
0# active 2# active

0# active 4# active

0# active 6# active

0# active 8# active

0# active 10# active


9-46
Optical Interface No. of Optical Interface No. of

Frame No. of LIM
LIM Frame CNET Frame







9-47
9.2.3 Identification Specifications for Optical Fibers in AM/CM
The optical fiber in the AM/CM must be stuck with labels for convenience during
installation and maintenance. Refer to Appendix A Engineering Labels for Cables for
details.
9.2.4 Installation Specifications for Optical Fibers in AM/CM
During the installation, the optical fiber in the AM/CM should run from the front to the
back of the cabinet through the bracket. After the installation, the optical fiber should be
laid-out in the trough neatly. Then the optical fiber runs out through the holes of barriers
of the bracket.
The cabling of the optical fiber in the AM/CM is basically the same as that of HW cable
and clock cable during the installation. They are bound inside the cabling rack. When
the optical fiber crosses the rack, it should go to the bottom of the rack and should be
bound in the cabling trough. The fibers of each rack should be bundled separately from
HW cables. The surplus fibers are coiled on the spool, which is mounted on both sides
of the main control cabinet. The spool and the coiling are shown in Figure 9-17 and
Figure 9-18.
Figure 9-17 The optical fiber spool
9-48
Figure 9-18 The fiber coils in the spool
The installation location of the optical fiber spool in the main control cabinet is shown in
Figure 9-18.
Note:
z If optical fiber spool is not used, the operation is not necessary.
z If only one optical fiber spool is used, two coils should be removed from the bottom
at any side of the cabinet (to facilitate cabling).
z If two optical fiber spools are used, two coils at each side of the cabinet (4 in total)
should be removed.
z If three optical fiber spools are used, two coils should be removed from the bottom at
one side and four at the other side of the backside of the cabinet. There are six coils
removed altogether.
z If four optical fiber spools are used, four coils at each side of the backside of the
cabinet (8 altogether) from the bottom should be removed.
The illustration of the completed installation of optical fiber in the AM/CM and the SPM
is shown in Figure 9-19.
9-49
F iOptical
b e r o p t ifiber
ca l
Optical
F i b e rfiber
o p t ispool
ca l spo
Figure 9-19 Illustration of optical fiber installation in the main control cabinet
Figure 9-20 Illustration of internal optical fiber installation
9.3 Installing Cables in SM

9.3.1 Types and Functions of Cables
HW cable: It is used to transmit the voice/data.

Main Node (NOD) Cable: It is used to transmit and control messages between the
processor module and board processor.
9-50
Clock cable: It is used to transmit the clock phase lock source signals extracted from
the trunk.
Clock frame cable: It is used for the clock transmission and the signaling control inside
the clock frame.
Alarm cable for the secondary power supply: It is used to collect alarm signals of the
secondary power supply.
Test cable: It is used for the test of the subscriber frame.
9.3.2 Installing HW Cables
I. Types of HW cables
There are two kinds of HW cables, namely subscriber HW cable and trunk HW cable,
which carry subscriber voice channels and trunk voice channels respectively. Each
cable consists of eight pairs of twisted pairs and connectors. Figure 9-21 illustrates the
connector and the socket of the HW cable. To install the HW cable, the connector has to
be inserted into the spacer until the spacer seizes it. To pull out the connector, first, the
spacer should be pulled outwards until it loses the grip of the connector.
Spacer
Jacket Label
Figure 9-21 HW cable connector and socket
Connection of the HW cable is not always in a fixed or specific mode. Every HW

distribution may connect to the distribution group from different trunk frames. The
general pin tray also gets connected to the distribution group. HW cable group of the
same frame may also connect to different pin positions of the general pin tray.
There are eight pin trays (300pin) in the center of the main control board, among which,
(J1, J2)/(L1, L2) are the general pin trays for the active/standby HW cable. For the
active HW pin tray (J1, J2), 9pin connectors (each providing a group of HW cables)
may be plugged-in from top to bottom. In other words, nine groups of HW cables may
be connected to J1, each consisting of four HW cables and their corresponding clock
9-51
cables. Compared to JI, J2 may contain only seven pin connectors from top to bottom.
Therefore, J1 and J2 can provide 16 (9+7) groups of HW cables. Hence, a total of 64
HW cables are available for assignment. These trunks may be assigned according to
the requirement. Figure 9-23 illustrates the assignment of the main pin tray. Backup pin
tray (L1, L2) is allocated in the same way.
J1
Three rows of
unused pins
HW0 3
HW4 7
HW8 11
HW12 15
HW16 HW19
HW20 HW23
HW24 HW27
HW28 HW31
HW32 HW35
Three rows of
unused pins
HW36 HW39
HW40 HW43
HW44 HW47
HW76 HW79
HW80 HW83
HW84 HW87
HW88 HW91
J2
Figure 9-22 HW pin tray
9-52
II. Installation and sequence of subscriber HW cables
One end of the subscriber HW cable should be connected to the main control frame
and the other end to the subscriber frame. To achieve the active/standby protection,
two active HW cables and two standby cables are required for each subscriber frame.
Therefore, one piece of the active HW cable, together with one piece of the standby
HW cable can carry voice channels of two subscriber frames.
1) Connection of the subscriber HW cables on main control frame side
Subscriber HW cables on the main control frame side are arranged in the following way:
They are attached to different pin trays starting from the top pin position (HW0) of J1.
After the 9pin positions are all occupied, the cables will be attached to J2 in the same
way. Similarly, the numbering of the HW cables should also be arranged according to
their frame numbers (from a smaller number to the larger number) and their rack
numbers (from a smaller number to the larger number). All the numbers should
correspond to those on the label.
Figure 9-23 illustrates a label pasted on the subscriber HW cable connector on the
main control frame side.
12 HW Fr: U1 1,2 (Active)
The No.12 HW
Corresponding to
Subscriber Cabinet 1#
Frame 1# & 2#
Active HW
Figure 9-23 Label pasted on the subscriber HW cable connector on the main control
frame side
Note:
If there is no subscriber frame in the main rack, that is, no HW cable marked with Fr:
U0-1,2 (active), the connector illustrated in the figure above should be plugged into the
top pin position of J1. If the main rack has the subscriber frame, HW cable marked with
Fr: U0-1,2 (active) should be attached to the top pin tray. Other connectors can connect
to the pin tray in by analog. In addition, labels of the active HW cable are marked with
the even numbers and those of the standby cable are odd numbers.
2) Connection of the HW cables on subscriber frame side

As marked on the label, attach the HW connector on the subscriber frame side to the
upper pin positions of JB23 on each backplane one by one.
9-53
Figure 9-24 illustrates a label pasted on the subscriber HW cable connector on the
subscriber frame side.
12.1 HW U1 - SLB1: JB23 (1~8)

Subscriber Frame 1#
carried by No.12 active HW
Inserted in Subscriber Cabinet 1#
The 1st subscriber backplane
Socket JB23
1st~8th row of pins
SLB: Backplane (26 Slots) of 32-Channel Subscriber Frame of Type-B Exchange

Figure 9-24 Label pasted on the subscriber HW cable connector on the subscriber
frame side
Note:
Labels of the active HW cable are marked with even numbers and those of the standby
cable are odd numbers. For the active HW cable, they are attached to the first
connection position of JB23 on the subscriber backplane (1~8 rows of pins); and for the
standby HW cable, they are attached to the second connection position of JB23 (9~16
rows of pins).
Figure 9-25 illustrates the connected HW cables and NOD cables in the SM.
9-54
Figure 9-25 The cables in the SM
III. Installation and sequence of trunk HW cables
Two ends of the trunk HW cable connect to the Main control frame and trunk frame
respectively in the active/standby mode.
1) Connection of trunk HW cables to main control frame
Trunk HW cable group on the main control frame side connects to the pin tray (HW91)
of J2 from bottom to top according to the sequence of the trunk board number (in
ascending order). The trunk frame may plug-in the pin tray in the same way (according
to the number of the cable connector label). When J2 is full, plug-in other cable groups
and trunk frames from the bottom of J1.
Figure 9-26 illustrates a label pasted on the trunk HW cable connector on the general
pin tray side.
42 HW Fr: TMB 0,1 (Active)
The No.42 HW
Corresponding to Trunk Frame 1#

No. 0&1 trunk board
Active HW cable
TMB: Digital Trunk Backplane

Figure 9-26 Label pasted on the trunk HW cable connector on the general pin tray side
9-55
Note:
TMB1 indicates the first trunk frame of the main control cabinet; it should plug-in the
bottom pin tray of J2.
2) Connection of trunk HW cables on trunk frame side

HW cable connector of the trunk frame should plug in the corresponding position of the
general pin tray XCA and XCB as marked on the label. As illustrated in
Figure 9-27, the plugging sequence should be from top to bottom.
XCB XCA
DT8 9(Active HW) DT0 1(Active HW)

One row of
unused pins
DT8 15(Signaling line) DT0 7(Signaling line)
Two rows of
unused pins DT8 9(Standby HW) DT0 1(Standby HW)
DT10 11(Standby HW) DT2 3(Standby HW)
Figure 9-27 Pin tray XCA and XCB on the trunk backplane
Figure 9-28 illustrates a label pasted on the trunk HW cable connector on the trunk
frame side.
42 HW DTB1 XCA 1~8
The No.42 HW cable
Plugged in Trunk Frame 1#

Socket XCA
1st ~8th row of pins
Figure 9-28 Label pasted on the trunk HW cable connector on the trunk frame side
9-56
Note:
The label indicates the corresponding trunk board of the HW connector, and whether
the connector is the active one or the standby one.
IV. Processing of unused HW cables
Available trunk HW cable connectors are usually more than those actually required. If
there are some unused pin trays, plug-in the unused connectors in these positions or
tie them to the cross bar of the cabinet for future use.
9.3.3 Installing NOD Cables
I. Types of NOD cables
There are two types of NOD cables, namely subscriber NOD cable and trunk NOD
cable. The former are bound with subscriber HW cables to form the bus of the
subscriber cabinet, while the latter are bundled with trunk HW cables to form the trunk
bus. Both cables are bundled in the same way.
As the HW cable, the NOD cable employs the non-fixed connection method. There are
eleven pin trays on the backplane of the main control frame corresponding to JB4, JB6,
JB8, JB10, JB12, JB14, JB22, JB24, JB26, JB28, JB30 (bottom pin positions of the
corresponding NOD board). Each pin tray provides four connections of the NOD cables,
which are capable of supporting four DTMs or supporting the communication between
four half-subscriber frames and the Host.
II. Setting and sequence of subscriber NOD cables
1) Connection of subscriber NOD cables on main control frame side

Subscriber NOD cables on the main control frame side are arranged following the order
of the NOD pin trays from the smaller number to the larger number. They are plugged
into the bottom 25~32 pin rows of the NOD pin tray. Similarly, numbering of the HW
cable should also be arranged according to their frame numbers and their cabinet
numbers (in ascending order). All the numbers should correspond to those on the label.
Figure 9-29 illustrates a label pasted on the subscriber NOD cable connector on the
main control frame side.
9-57
1 NOD U1 1~4 (Right)
The No.1 signaling cable

Corresponding to Subscriber Cabinet 1#
Frame 1~4
Right half of frame
Figure 9-29 Label pasted on the subscriber NOD cable connector on the main control
frame side
Note:
Configurations of the main nodes in the subscriber frame achieve the
mutual-assistance mechanism, that is, two main nodes (corresponding to two
half-frames) are led from two NOD boards and two adjacent NOD boards can perform
the mutual-assistance. Four main nodes of the NOD board from top downwards
correspond to four subscriber half-frames from bottom upwards on the right (left) side
of the subscriber cabinet. "Right" or "YOU" marked on the label indicates that the right
side is the side viewed from the back, say, the side corresponding to the smaller
subscriber internal code. Therefore, the connector marked with "right" or "YOU" should
be inserted into the front NOD pin tray and the connector marked with "left" into the
back NOD pin tray.
2) Connection of subscriber NOD cables on subscriber frame side

Subscriber NOD cables on the subscriber frame side are attached to the bottom pin
position (25~32 pins) of the pin trays of two 32-Port Dual Tone Number Receiving &
Drive Boards (DRV) in JB24 and JB26 on the back of the backplane of the SLB frame.
If the SLB frame is not available, bundle the NOD cable to the crossbar of the cabinet.
Figure 9-30 illustrates a label pasted on the subscriber NOD cable connector on the
subscriber frame side.
9-58
1 .2 NOD U1 SLB2 JB24 (25~32)
Plugged in Subscriber Cabinet 1#
The 2nd subscriber backplane
Socket JB24
25th ~32nd rows of pins
Figure 9-30 Label pasted on the subscriber NOD cable connector on the subscriber
frame side
Note:
1.1#, 1.2#, 1.3#, 1.4# indicate different branches of the same cable.
III. Installation and sequence of trunk NOD cables
1) Connection of trunk NOD cables on main control frame side

On the backplane of the main control frame, one side of trunk signaling cable is
plugged according to the ascending trunk board number. The sequence of plugs is also
in the ascending order in the trunk frame pin tray according to the label stuck on the
cable connector. Figure 9-31 illustrates a label pasted on the trunk NOD cable
connector on the backplane of the main control frame.
11.2 NOD Fr: TMB1 0,3
The NO. 11 signaling cable

Corresponding to Trunk Frame 1#
No.0~3 Trunk board
Figure 9-31 A label pasted on the Trunk NOD cable connector on the Main Control
backplane side
Note:
11.1#, 11.2#, 11.3#, 11.4# indicate different branches of the same cable.
9-59
2) NOD cable connection on trunk frame side

According to the position marked on the label, NOD cable on the trunk frame side
should be plugged in the corresponding pin tray of the trunk backplane, XCA or XCB.
Figure 9-32 illustrates a label pasted on the trunk NOD cable connector on the trunk
frame side.
11 NOD TMB1 XCA (34~41)

Plugged in Trunk Frame 1#
Socket XCA
34th~41st rows of pins
Figure 9-32 A label pasted on the Trunk NOD cable connector on the trunk frame side
IV. Treatment of unused NOD cables
There are usually more available trunk NOD cable connectors than actually required. If
there are some pin trays unused, the unused connectors may be tied to the crossbar of
the cabinet for future use.
9.3.4 Installing Clock Cables
Clock synchronization cable has four colored cores. It is used to keep the clock
synchronous with that of the senior office.
The clock synchronization cable is led from the XM1 pin tray on the backplane of the
trunk frame. Four cores are arranged from top-down in the following order: pale, yellow,
pale and orange. As described below, XM1 pin tray is connected to different
backplanes in different configurations:
1) When the AM/CM is available, the clock synchronization cable should go from the
XM1 socket on the trunk frame backplane to the JC1 (or JC2) on the backplane of
the CKB in the AM/CM.
2) Lead the clock synchronization cable from the XM1 pin tray to the JA1 on the
backplane of the main control frame in case neither AM/CMs nor the CKB frame
are available.
9.3.5 Installing Alarm Cables for Secondary Power Supply
The power alarm cable contains two colored cores. It transmits the alarm signals of the
subscriber cabinet collected by other equipment.
Power alarm cables of six frames in the same cabinet are connected in the hierarchical
order. Two pin trays on the SLB (JA1 and JA2) are connected in parallel. Every alarm
cable connects to JA1 of upstream frame and JA2 of the downstream frame. Therefore,
six subscriber frames will be connected through five number of alarm cable and they
9-60
will be led to the main control frame from JA2 of the top frame or from J1 of the bottom
frame. JA4~JA11 pin trays on the main control frame are power alarm pin trays.
9.3.6 Installing Test Subscriber Cables
The Test Board (TSS) in subscriber frames performs the test function and solves the
problems of remote test for RSA Control Board (RSA) frames.
Generally, every two subscriber frames should be equipped with one TSS. JT1 and JT2
on the subscriber backplane are connected in parallel to function as the pin tray for the
alarm cable connection. Both pin trays share double subscriber frames of the TSS. At
the same time, both subscriber frames should be connected by a test cable in the
hierarchical way from JT1 of the upper frame to JT2 of the lower frame. Two frames are
treated as one group that will not connect to other groups by the test cable.
If the TSS is for three subscriber frames, three frames are interconnected by two cables
and are treated as one group.
If there is one TSS in each frame, no test cable is necessary.
Four colored cores should be arranged from top downwards as follows: Black, Blue,
Yellow and Red.
9.3.7 Binding HW Cables and NOD Cables
1) When HW cables and NOD cables are laid along the crossbar at the bottom of the
cabinet, settle the twisted pairs in order first. Pay attention to their sequence.
2) Bind the remote HW cables and NOD cables first, then bind those of the adjacent
cabinets and finally bind all of them to the crossbar of the main control cabinet.
Overlap and order the HW cables & NOD cables of the three subscriber cabinets,
then bundle them with cable tie at every 150 mm.
3) While connecting HW cables and NOD cables to the main control frame, first plug
all AMP connectors into the relevant pin trays following the sequence of those HW
cables and NOD cables.
4) Tie up the redundant cables or cables at pin trays. They should be bundled
backward to the crossbar at the bottom of the cabinet.
5) Finally, bind all redundant HW cables and NOD cables backward to the crossbar
and cut down the surplus cable ties.
9.3.8 Check Points after Installing Cables in Cabinet
Following items should be checked on completion of the internal cable installation:

1) Distribution of the inter-module cable should comply with the construction
specifications. The directions for leading and routing the cables should be clear.
2) Labels should be pasted to both ends of the cable. Extra care should be taken to
avoid the wrong connection and lacked connection.
9-61
3) The connection should be tight.

4) The cables should be laid in a neat and nice manner. All the original cable ties
should be removed except those that fasten the cables on the crossbars.
5) Signal cables shall be bound separately from power cables of high current or
voltage.
6) Since HW cables and NOD cables of each frame may be bundled before the
delivery from factory, they may just be connected directly to the corresponding pin
trays.
7) The HW cables and NOD cables of each cabinet must be bound on the crossbar of
the bottom frame in the cabinet. Other positions are forbidden for this purpose.
The cable ties used should be at an interval of 150 mm.
8) Inter-cabinet alarm cables, alarm cables and test cables of each frame shall be
bound together. They should be grouped into three bundles in each frame and
bound onto the crossbar with cable ties at an interval of 100 mm.
9) The cables shall be neat at the turning points. Great care should be taken to avoid
damaging the signal cable while cutting off the cable ties.
10) All the cable ties used should be cut to remove spinous part.
9.3.9 Connecting Internal Cables in 32-Channel Subscriber Frame
The connection instruction of feeder cable, secondary power supply alarm cable, serial
port communication cable and TSS cable in 32-channel subscriber frame is the same
as that of the cables in 16-channel subscriber frame. The following describes the
differences between HW and NOD connection in 32-channel subscriber cabinet and
those in 16-channel subscriber cabinet.
Caution:
The description about HW and NOD that is the same as the previous part (HW and
NOD connection in 16-channel subscriber cabinet) will not be listed below.
I. Connection of HW cables
One end of subscriber HW cable is connected to the main control frame, and the other
end is connected to the subscriber frame, adopting active & standby working mode.
Each subscriber frame needs four active & standby HW pairs, and each HW cable
provides four HWs, so each subscriber frame needs one active & standby HW pair.
The active HW cable is plugged in J1 on the backplane of the main control frame, and
plugged in the first connection position (pins 1-8) of JB23 on the CB03SLB in the
subscriber frame. The standby HW cable is plugged in L1 on the backplane of the main
9-62
control frame, and plugged in the third connection position (pins 17-24) of JB24 on the
CB03SLB in the subscriber frame.
Caution:
Numbering principle of subscriber HW cables: active HW cables are numbered as odd

numbers, and the standby HW cables are numbered as even numbers.
II. Connection of main node cables
One end of subscriber NOD cable is connected to the main control frame, and the other
end is connected to the subscriber frame, adopting active & standby
(mutual-assistance) working mode. Each subscriber frame needs two main nodes, and
each NOD cable provides four main nodes, so every four subscriber frames need one
active & standby NOD pair.
Caution:
The AMP connectors of NOD cables marked as 1.4# and 2.4# in 1K8 main control
cabinet are left unplugged.
The subscriber NOD cables are plugged in the bottom sockets of eleven NOD boards in
the main control frame, that is, J4, J6, J8, J10, J12, J14, J22, J24, J26, J28 and J30,
and plugged in the first connection position (pins 1-8) of JB24 and JB26 respectively on
the CB03SLB in the subscriber frame according to the labels.
9.4 Installing Cables on the BTU board

The BTU-relevant cables are twisted pair network cable, STM-1 optical interface
single-mode fiber, STM-1 electrical interface cable, 32-subscriber E1 interface cable,
75/120-ohm E1 interface cable and serial port cable for maintenance and
management.
I. Network Cable
The BTU board accommodates one 10-Mbit/s Ethernet interface and two 100-Mbit/s
FE network interfaces by front cabling from the blank panel. These two kinds of
interfaces adopt category 5 shielded/unshielded twisted pairs of 100-ohm impedance
terminated with RJ45 sockets.
9-63
Connect the 10-Mbit/s network interface to the BAM directly with straight through cable;
connect the 10-Mbit/s network interface to the LAN switch with crossover cable when
networking through the LAN switch.
Connect the 100-Mbit/s FE interface to the BAS (MA5200 for example) with straight
through cable; connect the 100-Mbit/s network interface to the BAS equipment with
crossover cable when networking through the LAN switch.
Caution:
z The 100-Mbit/s upstream network interface on the BTU supports auto-negotiation.

But if the negotiation result is not 100-Mbit/s duplex, the service will be interrupted.
To ensure normal services, the BAS equipment must support the 100-Mbit/s duplex
working mode when the FE interface of the BTU board interconnects with the BAS
equipment of the metropolitan area network (MAN).
z When networking through the LAN switch, either the straight through cable or the
crossover cable can be used if the network interface is of the auto-negotiation type
(such as the Quidway S3526 Ethernet Switch of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.).
II. STM-1 Optical Interface Fiber
The BTU board accommodates one 155-Mbit/s SDH optical interface to connect with
the SDH equipment in the SDH transmission network. The board adopts a single-mode
optical interface module with the operating wavelength being 1310 nm, and the optical
fiber cable is of single-mode type.
III. STM-1 Electrical Interface Cable
The BTU board accommodates one 155-Mbit/s SDH electrical interface to connect with
the SDH equipment in the SDH transmission network. It also accommodates a coaxial
cable SMB socket to connect with the 100-ohm coaxial cable.
IV. Maintenance and Management Serial Port Cable
The BTU provides one standard RS232 interface, by which the basic system
parameters can be configured at the maintenance terminal. This cable is terminated
with RJ45 connector at one end to connect with the RJ45 serial port on the BTU and
with DB9 or DB25 connector at the other to connect with the serial port of the computer.
The schematic diagram of the cable is shown in Figure 9-33.
9-64
(1). 9-pin connector core (2). 9-pin connector shell (3).RJ45 connector (4). Label
Figure 9-33 Cable of the local maintenance serial port on the BTU
Table 9-11 shows the cable connection of the local maintenance serial port.
Table 9-11 DB9-RJ45 cable connection
DB9 Pin Connection RJ45Pin

2 RXD TXD 3
3 TXD RXD 6
5 GND GND 4 5
9-65
Installation Manual - Volume 1 Chapter 10 Installing Optical Fibers and Cables
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System between Modules
Chapter 10 Installing Optical Fibers and Cables

between Modules
10.1 Installing Inter-Module Optical Fibers (SM)

I. Functions of optical fibers
The SM of C&C08 Switch connects to the AM/CM by the optical fiber. Generally, 40M
Optic Interface Board (OBC) / Optical Interface Board (OPT) is employed. The
connection is shown in Figure 10-1.
Tx Rx
SM AM/CM
OPT OBC
Rx Tx
Figure 10-1 Connection of inter-module optical fibers
II. Connection of optical fibers
1) The slots for the OBC/RBC in the AM/CM

The OBCs/ 40M Remote Optical Interface Board (RBCs) in the AM/CM are inserted in
the Line Interface Module (LIM) frame.
A maximum of 12 LIM frames can be configured in the AM/CM and a maximum of 16
OBCs in each LIM frame. The slot diagram of the LIM frame is as shown in Figure 10-2.
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
P B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B P
0 Q 0 Q
W C C C C C C C C S S C C C C C C C C W
S 0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 1 I 1 I 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 S
standby
Active
standby
standby
standby
standby
standby
Active
standby
standby
Active
Active
Active
Active
standby
Active
Active
Active
0 1
Figure 10-2 The slot diagram of the OBC/RBC in the AM/CM
2) Two working modes of the SM
10-1
The SM has two working modes, namely active/standby protection mode and
load-sharing mode. Configurations of the optical interface boards of the interface frame
in the AM/CM vary with the working mode of the SM.
a. Optical fiber connection in load-sharing mode
In the load-sharing mode, each SM occupies two optical channels of the AM/CM. The
OBCs need no backup configurations, and they are all plugged into the slots of even
numbers, leaving the slots of odd numbers vacant. Figure 10-3 illustrates the
load-sharing mode, in which a pair of optical fibers is led from the OPT0 to the
corresponding sockets on the OBC0 and another pair of optical fibers is led from the
OPT1 to the corresponding sockets on the OBC2.
AM Interface
SM Main Control
Frame
Frame
C841LIB CB01MCB
OBC0 OBC2 OPT1 OPT0
Front View of AM/CM Rack Rear View of SM Rack
LIB: Backplane of Line Interface Frame MCB: Master Control Backplane

Figure 10-3 Optical fiber connection in load-sharing mode
b. Optical fiber connection in active/standby protection mode

Each module occupies one optical channel in the AM/CM. The OBCs are configured in
pairs and each pair provides optic fibers required by two modules that form the
hot-backup group. Figure 10-4 illustrates the active/standby protection mode, in which
the OPT0 corresponds to the OBC0 and the OPT1 to the OBC1.
AM Interface
SM Main Control
Frame
Frame
C841LIB
CB01MCB
OBC0 OBC1 OPT1 OPT0
Front View of AM/CM Rack Rear View of SM Rack
Figure 10-4 Optical fiber connections in active/standby protection mode
The transmitting ports of the optical interface boards (OBCs) in the AM/CM connect to
the receiving ports of the optical interface boards (OPTs) in the SM by optical fibers,
10-2
and conversely the same. Labels should be pasted on both ends of the optical fiber,
marking the number and name of the module it belongs to.
Refer to Appendix A for details of the labels.
III. Specifications for bundling and cabling
z Optical fibers should be laid in pairs. At the turning point, they cannot be laid in
rectangular shape, but in a circular shape (with the diameter not less than 8 cm).
Paired optical fiber should be bound smoothly and tidily.
z Flexible connectors are configured at both ends of the optical fiber, with one end
connecting to the optical port of the OBC and the other end connecting to the
optical port of the OPT respectively.
z There should not be any sharp bends in the distribution and the fibers should not
be bound too tightly. If the cabling bridge is available between different rows and
columns, the fibers should be laid along the cabling bridge and be equipped with
plastic corrugated tubes for protection.
z The optical fibers should be laid smoothly. Do not pull or bind them too tightly.
Cable ties should be used to bundle the fibers at every 150 mm.
z Labels should be clearly marked and pasted at both ends of the fiber. You should
be able to locate the rack from the information marked on them.
z Ends of the fibers unused for the moment should be covered with jackets, and the
unused fibers should be coiled neatly and bound to the fiber distribution box with
wide insulation adhesive tape.
z Two cabling modes are available according to the fiber lead-in position of the
distribution box, that is, upward cabling and downward cabling. Great care should
be taken to coil and bundle the surplus optical fibers on both sides of the rack.
They cannot be entangled with one another because that will make it very difficult
to search for a specific line.
Cabling of inter-module optical fibers in the AM/CM is as shown in Figure 10-5 &
Figure 10-6, and the overall diagram after the completion of the optical fiber installation
is shown in the Figure 10-7.
10-3
Optical fiber
Figure 10-5 Layout of inter-module optical fibers in interface frame
Figure 10-6 Overall diagram for layout of optical fibers in the interface cabinet
10-4
Figure 10-7 Overall diagram of inter-module optical fiber layout after installation
10.2 Installing Inter-Module Cables (RSM and RSA)

The Remote Switching Module (RSM) and Remote Subscriber Access (RSA) are
connected to the host office by the trunk cable. For the setting of trunk cables, refer to
"Installing Trunk Cables" in this Manual. The following section gives a brief description
of the RSM and RSA.
I. RSM
The difference between the RSM and the SM is that the RSM accesses the trunk
module by the Internal Digital Trunk (IDT) and internal Signaling System Number 7
(SS7), instead of by the optical fiber. Actually, hardware of the IDT is the same as that of
the DT, but they achieve different functions through different programs and data
settings.
In addition, the RSM accesses the 16-Channel E1/T1 Interface Board (ET16) / SDH
Photoelectric Interface Board (STU) in the AM/CM through standard Pulse Code
Modulation (PCM), which makes it possible to extend the transmission distance by the
addition of the optical transmitter and receiver to the transmission channel. Further
10-5
more, the remote subscribers subordinating to the RSM have access to the same
services as the local subscribers.
II. RSA
Thanks to Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) (30B+D) technology, the RSA
has removed the subscriber part (consisting of subscriber board, DRV, TSS) in the SM
to the remote subscriber far away from the switch, that is, it provides a remote interface
board RSA between the switching network and the subscriber frame of the SM. The
TSS in the remote subscriber frame will perform the RSA subscriber test function.
The C&C08 Switch provides two RSA modes, ‘RSA—RSA’ and ‘LAPRSA—RSA’
modes.
In RSA-RSA mode, there are two types of RSA interfaces, namely RSA at the local end
and RSA at the remote end, which are interconnected through the 2.048 Mbit/s E1
interface and the 75 ohm coaxial cable. Both the local and remote ends have the same
hardware but different software. A pair of local interface boards corresponds to a pair of
remote interface boards, supporting up to 304 subscribers. To support more
subscribers, new RSA interface boards shall be added. One RSA frame can contain up
to eight RSA interface boards.
There is no difference between LAPRSA—RSA mode and RSA—RSA mode at the
remote end. The difference is that the local RSA interface is replaced by RDT+LAP
(LAPRSA) at the local end, that is, the RDT+LAPRSA+ remote RSA mode enables
remote subscriber access. The RDT is the Digital Trunk Board (DTF) and one RDT can
connect two remote RSA boards.
As one of the Protocol Processing Boards (LAP), LAPRSA is a 32-channel protocol
processor and can process protocols at the data link layer. It can process Q.921
protocol after it gets connected to the RSA through the RDT. There are two processors
on the LAPRSA and each processor can process 1~16 HDLC links. A LAPRSA board
can be configured with a maximum of 16 RDTs or 32 remote RSAs. Generally, another
LAPRSA should be provided as a standby board.
10.3 Installing External BITS Clock Cables

The CKS has three kinds of reference sources, which can be configured in separate or
combined mode. On the backplane of the clock frame there are different interfaces for
different signals.
Signal type Signal characteristics

From the DTF, ET16 or STU, distinguished into 8k0 and 8k1
DT8k
differential signal.
2-MHz continuous square wave signal compliant with the G.703
2-MHz signal interface, with its frequency being 2,048 MHz. 75- and 120-ohm
interfaces.
10-6
Signal type Signal characteristics

2-Mbit/s E1 signal compliant with the G.703 interface. HDB3 code. 75- and
signal 120-ohm interfaces.
For a specific characteristic impedance of the reference source signal, there must be a
specific impedance DIP switch at the corresponding interface on the CKS. Otherwise,
the non-matching impedance will cause signal reflection, which affects the signal
quality.
10.3.1 Installing 75 Ohm Coaxial Cables
If 75-ohm coaxial cables are used, connect them to the corresponding SMB connectors
on the backplane of the clock frame according to different signal types.
If the input clock source is 2-Mbit/s digital signal, the corresponding interfaces on the
CKB are the two coaxial connectors J1 and J2 with the silkscreen “2Mbit/s_IN”.
Normally there are two channels of synchronous signal imported, one being active and
the other standby.
If the input clock source is 2-MHz analog signal, the corresponding interfaces on the
CKB are the two coaxial connectors J3 and J4 with the silkscreen “2MHz_IN”. Normally
there are two channels of synchronous signal imported, one being active and the other
standby.
10.3.2 Installing 120 Ohm Twisted Pairs
If 120-ohm twisted pairs are used, connect them to the Header of the CKS on the CKB.
The position depends on the signal type.
If the input clock source is 2-Mbit/s digital signal, connect the clock cable to the pins
from row 4–11 of JB5 on the CKB.
If the input clock source is 2-MHz analog signal, connect the clock cable to the pins
from row 1–8 of JB6 on the CKB.
The connector at the other end is not fixed in the factory, but at the spot to fit the specific
BITS equipment.
10-7
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 11 Installing Subscriber Cables
Chapter 11 Installing Subscriber Cables
11.1 16-Channel Subscriber Frame
11.1.1 Types of Subscriber Cables
The subscriber cables can be grouped into three types:

z 32-core cable
z 64-core cable
z 128-core cable
among which, the 64-core cable is the most commonly used.
The corresponding relation between the color codes of subscriber cables and the
equipment is as follows.
I. 32-core cable
The 32-core cable, consisting of sixteen pairs of core wires, is connected to one
subscriber board by two connectors, which are respectively inserted into the upper
part and lower part of the corresponding sockets on the backplane of the subscriber
frame, as illustrated in Figure 11-1.
a b c d
· · Pink 1 1
· · Orange 1 2
· · Green 1 3
· · Blue 1 4
· · Gray 1 5
· · Pink 2 6
· · Orange 2 7
· · Green 2 8
Red Black
spot spot
a b c d
· · Blue 2 9
· · Gray 2 10
· · Pink 3 11
· · Orange 3 12
· · Green 3 13
· · Blue 3 14
· · Gray 3 15
· · Blue 4 16
Red Black
spot spot
Subscriber slot socket
Connector Wire Subscriber
sepuencenumber
Figure 11-1 Illustration of the color code and wire sequence of the 32-core cable
11-1
II. 64-core cable
The 64-core cable, consisting of thirty-two pairs of core wires, is connected to two
subscriber boards by four connectors, which are inserted into four sockets (upper
right, lower right, upper left and lower left) on the backplane of the subscriber frame,
as illustrated in Figure 11-2 and Table 11-1.
Upper right
Connection table
Plug
X1 a1 c1 a2 a2 a3c3 a4 c4 a5 c5 a6 c6 a7 c7 a8 c8
Pink Orange Green Blue Grey Pink Orange Green
Upper right Color
Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * *
Plug
X3 a1 c1 a2 a2 a3 c3 a4 c4 a5 c5 a6 c6 a7 c7 a8 c8
Orange Green Blue Grey Pink Orange Green Blue
Upper left ColorRed
*
Black Red Black Red Black Red Black
* * * * * * *
Red
*
Black
*
Red
*
Black
* * * * * * * * *
(Full) (Full) (Full) (Full)
* * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * *
a1 c1 a2 a2 a3c3 a4 c4 a5 c5 a6 c6 a7 c7 a8 c8
Lower right Blue Grey Pink Green Pink
Color Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red
*
Black
*
* * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * *
* * * * * * * * * *
* *
Plug
X4 a1 c1 a2 a2 a3c3 a4 c4 a5 c5 a6 c6 a7 c7 a8 c8
Lower left Green Pink Orange Green Blue Green Pink Blue
Color Red Black
Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Black Red Black Red
* * I I I1 I I I I I I I | | | |
(Full) (Full)
Figure 11-2 Connection diagram of the 64-core cable
11-2
Table 11-1 List of the color code and wire sequence of the 64-core cable
Upper right Lower right Upper left Lower left
Core Core Core Core

X Col Dot Dot Dot X Co Dot Dot Dot Co Dot Dot X Co Dot Dot
X3 Dot Dot
1 - col numb sha 2 l-o col numb shap l-o col numb 4 l-o shap
shape color numbe
or or er pe r or er e r or er r r e
a a
a1 Red Red a1 Or Red Red
Pin 1 Bl 1 Gr
One * Two * an One * Full *
k Bla c ue Bla Bla c ay
c1 c1 ge Black
ck 1 ck ck 1
a a
a2 Red Red a2 Gr Red Red
Ora 2 Gr 2 Pi
One * Two * ee One * One /
nge Bla c ay Bla Bla c nk
c2 c2 n Black
ck 2 ck ck 2
a a
a3 Red Red a3 Red Gr Red
Gre 3 Pi Bl 3
One * Three * One * ee One /
en Bla c nk Bla ue Bla c
c3 c3 n Black
ck 3 ck ck 3
a a
a4 Red Or Red a4 Red Gr Red
Blu 4 Bl 4
One * an Three * One * ee One /
e Bla c Bla ue Bla c
c4 ge c4 n Black
ck 4 ck ck 4
Gra a Gr Pi a Bl
a5 Red One * Red Three * a5 Red One * Red One /
y 5 ee nk 5 ue
11-3
Upper right Lower right Upper left Lower left
Core Core Core Core

X Col Dot Dot Dot X Co Dot Dot Dot Co Dot Dot X Co Dot Dot
X3 Dot Dot
1 - col numb sha 2 l-o col numb shap l-o col numb 4 l-o shap
shape color numbe
or or er pe r or er e r or er r r e
Bla n Bla Bla

a5 Black
ck ck ck
a Red a
a6 Red Red a6 Or Red
Pin 6 Bl 6 Gr
Two * Three * an Two * One /
k ue ey
Bla a blac ge Bla a
a6 a6 black
ck 6 k ck 6
a a
a7 Red Red a7 Gr Red Red
Ora 7 Gr 7 Pi
Two * Three * ee Two * Two /
A nge Bla a ay Bla Bla a nk
a7 n Black
7 ck 7 ck ck 7
A a a
Red Red a8 Red Red
8 Gre 8 Pi Bl 8 Bl
Two * Four * Two * Two /
C en Bla c nk Bla ue Bla c ue
c8 Black
8 ck 8 ck ck 8
11-4
III. 128-core cable
The 128-core cable, consisting of sixty-four pairs of core wires, is connected to four
subscriber boards by eight connectors, which are inserted into the corresponding
eight sockets on the backplane of the subscriber frame, as illustrated in Figure 11-3,
Figure 11-4 and Table 11-2.
Color of the pair Color of the pair

Twisting Conne Twisting
Connect or Color
Color 1 Color 2 direction ctor Color 1 direction
12
White
White Blue Right Blue Right
(Orange ring)
White Orang
White Orange Right Right
(Orange ring) e
White
White Green Right Green Right
(Orange ring)
Connec White
White Brown Right Brown Right
Connector 1 tor 3 (Orange ring)
360 mm 360 Red (Blue
Red Blue Right mm Blue Right
ring)
Red (Blue Orang
Red Orange Right Right
ring) e
Red (Blue
Red Green Right Green Right
ring)
Red (Blue
Red Brown Right Brown Right
ring)
Blue (Black
Black Blue Right Blue Right
ring)
Blue (Black Orang
Black Orange Left Right
ring) e
Blue (Black
Black Green Left Green Right
ring)
Connec Blue (Black
Black Brown Left Brown Right
Connector 2 tor 4 ring)
210 mm 210 Yellow (Black
Yellow Blue Left Blue Right
mm ring)
Yellow (Black Orang
Yellow Orange Left Right
ring) e
Yellow (Black
Yellow Green Left Green Right
ring)
Yellow (Black
Yellow Brown Left Brown Right
ring)
11-5
topleft 2
topleft 1
topright 2
topright
topright 1
bottomleft 2
bottomleft 1
bottomright 2
bottomright
1
topleft 2
topleft 1
topright 2
topright
topright 1
bottomleft 2
bottomleft 1
bottomright 2
bottomright
1
Figure 11-3 Connection diagram 1 of the 128-core cable

Twisti Twis
Connector Connector Color
Color 1 Color 2 ng Color 1 ting
2
X5 White X7 White
Blue Right Blue Left
(Orange ring) (Green ring)
360 mm 360 mm
White White Orang
Orange Right Left
(Orange ring) (Green ring) e
White White
Green Right Green Left
White White
Brown Right Brown Left
Orange (Red Red (Green

Blue Right Blue Left
ring) ring)
Orange (Red Red (Green Orang

Orange Right Left
ring) ring) e

Green Right Green Left
ring) ring)
11-6

Twisti Twis
Connector Connector Color
Color 1 Color 2 ng Color 1 ting
2
Brown Right Brown Left
ring) ring)
Orange Green
Blue Left Blue Left
(Black ring) (Black ring)
Orange Green Orang
Orange Left Left
(Black ring) (Black ring) e
Orange Green
Green Left Green Left
(Black ring) (Black ring)
Orange Green
Brown Left Brown Left
X6 (Black ring) X8 (Black ring)
210 mm Yellow 210 mm Yellow
Blue Left Blue Left
Yellow Yellow Orang
Orange Left Left
(Orange ring) (Green ring) e
Yellow Yellow
Green Left Green Left
Yellow Yellow
Brown Left Brown Left
topleft 2
topleft 1
topright 2
topright
topright 1
bottomleft 2
bottomleft 1
bottomright 2
bottomright
1
Figure 11-4 Connection diagram 2 of the 128-core cable
11-7
Table 11-2 List of the color code and wire sequence of the 128-core cable
Color of the Pitc

Color of the pair
pair h of Twisti Pitch Twisti
Con Con
the ng of the ng
nect nect
Colo twist directi Colo twiste directi
or Color 1 or Color 1
r2 ed on r2 d pair on
pair
White
White Blue 40 Right Blue 50 Right
(Orange ring)
Oran White Oran

White 50 Right 60 Right
ge (Orange ring) ge
Gree White Gree
n (Orange ring) n
Conn Conn
Brow White Brow
ector White 40 Right ector 50 Right
n (Orange ring) n
1 5
Orange (Red
360 Red Blue 50 Right 360 Blue 60 Right
ring)
mm mm
Oran Orange (Red Oran
Red 60 Right 40 Right
ge ring) ge
Gree Orange (Red Gree

n ring) n
Brow Orange (Red Brow
n ring) n
Orange
Black Blue 60 Right Blue 40 Left
(Black ring)
Oran Orange Oran

Conn Black 50 Left Conn 50 Left
ge (Black ring) ge
ector ector
2 Gree 6 Orange Gree
Black 40 Left 60 Left
n (Black ring) n
210 210
mm Brow mm Orange Brow
n (Black ring) n
Yellow
Yellow Blue 60 Left Blue 50 Left
(Orange ring)
Oran Yellow Oran
Conn Yellow 40 Left Conn 60 Left
ge (Orange ring) ge
ector ector
2 Gree 6 Yellow Gree
Yellow 50 Left 40 Left
n (Orange ring) n
210 210
mm Brow mm Yellow Brow
n (Orange ring) n
Conn White Conn

White (Green
ector (Blue Blue 40 Left ector Blue 60 Left
ring)
3 ring) 7
11-8
Color of the Pitc

Color of the pair
Con Con
the ng of the ng
nect nect
pair
360 White 360
Oran White (Green Oran
mm (Blue 50 Left mm 40 Left
ge ring) ge
ring)
White
Gree White (Green Gree
(Blue 60 Left 50 Left
n ring) n
ring)
White
Brow White (Green Brow
n ring) n
ring)
Red
Red (Green
(Blue Blue 50 Left Blue 40 Left
ring)
ring)
Red
Oran Red (Green Oran
ge ring) ge
ring)
Red
Gree Red (Green Gree
(Blue 40 Right 60 Left
n ring) n
ring)
Red
Brow Red (Green Brow
(Blue 50 Right 40 Left
n ring) n
ring)
Conn Blue Conn
Green (Black
ector (Black Blue 60 Right ector Blue 50 Left
ring)
4 ring) 8
210 Blue 210
Oran Green (Black Oran
mm (Black 40 Right mm 60 Left
ge ring) ge
ring)
Blue
Gree Green (Black Gree
(Black 50 Right 40 Left
n ring) n
ring)
Blue
Brow Green (Black Brow
n ring) n
ring)
Yellow
Yellow
(Black Blue 40 Right Blue 60 Left
(Green ring)
ring)
Yellow
Oran Yellow Oran
ge (Green ring) ge
ring)
11-9
Color of the Pitc

Color of the pair
Con Con
the ng of the ng
nect nect
pair
Yellow
Gree Yellow Gree
n (Green ring) n
ring)
Yellow
Brow Yellow Brow
n (Green ring) n
ring)
11.1.2 Connecting Subscriber Cables
The nineteen pairs of sockets on the backplane (each pair is made up of upper socket
and lower socket) correspond to the nineteen subscriber boards. The top connection
position of the upper socket and the bottom connection position of the lower socket
are plugged with the subscriber cable connectors. For 32-core cable, its two
connectors are respectively plugged in these two positions. For 64-core cable, it has
four connectors, respectively plugged in upper right, lower right, upper left and lower
left positions. For 128-core cable, it has eight connectors, respectively plugged in
upper right 1, lower right 1, upper right 2, lower right 2, upper left 1, lower left 1, upper
left 2 and lower left 2 positions.
11.2 32-Channel Subscriber Frame
The 32-channel subscriber frame can be inserted with either ordinary subscriber
boards (16-channel subscriber boards) or 32-channel subscriber boards.
When ordinary subscriber boards are inserted, the subscriber cables are connected in
the same way as those of the 16-channel subscriber frame.
The following describes the situation that the 32-channel subscriber frame is inserted
with all 32-channel subscriber boards.
The 32-channel subscriber frame can accommodate nineteen 32-channel subscriber

boards, each of which can access 32 subscribers by the sockets on the backplane.
The cable connection is as shown in Figure 11-5.
11-10
12 subscribers (channel 1-12)

Upper HEADER
Lower HEADER
Figure 11-5 Connection diagram of the 32-channel subscriber cable
Generally, the 32-channel subscriber frame uses 64-core subscriber cable and
128-core subscriber cable.
I. 64-core subscriber cable
A 32-channel subscriber board has one piece of 64-core cable, which has four
connectors, respectively marked as 1, 2, 3 and 4, and they are plugged in the four
sockets from top downwards on the subscriber backplane.
The structure and wire sequence of the 64-core cable are illustrated in Table 11-3.
11-11
Table 11-3 List of the color code and wire sequence of the 64-core cable in 32-channel subscriber frame
1# 2# 3# 4#
X1 Core X2 Core X3 Core X4 Core
Colo Dot Dot Dot Colo Dot Dot Dot Color Dot Dot Dot Color Dot Dot Dot
r color numb shape r colo numb shap colo numb shape color numbe shape
er r er e r er r
a1 Pink Red One * b1 Gree Red Three * b1 Orange Red Four * b1 Pink Red Full *
n
c1 Black b2 Blac b2 Blac b2 Black
k k
a2 Oran Red One * b3 Blue Red Three * b3 Green Red Four * b3 Orang Red Full *
ge e
k k
a3 Gree Red One * b5 Grey Red Three * b5 Blue Red Four * b5 Green Red Full *
n
k k
a4 Blue Red One * b7 Pink Red Four * b7 Grey Red Four * b7 Blue Red Full *

k k
a5 Grey Red One * a1 Grey Red Full *

c5 Black c1 Black
a6 Pink Red Two * a2 Pink Red One /
c6 Black c2 Black
a7 Oran Red Two * a3 Orang Red One /
11-12
1# 2# 3# 4#
X1 Core X2 Core X3 Core X4 Core
Colo Dot Dot Dot Colo Dot Dot Dot Color Dot Dot Dot Color Dot Dot Dot
r color numb shape r colo numb shap colo numb shape color numbe shape
er r er e r er r
c7 ge Black c3 e Black
a8 Gree Red Two * a4 Green Red One /

n
c8 Black c4 Black
b1 Blue Red Two * a5 Blue Red One /
b2 Black c5 Black
b3 Grey Red Two * a6 Grey Red One /
b4 Black c6 Black
b5 Pink Red Three * a7 Pink Red Two /
b6 Black c7 Black
b7 Oran Red Three * a8 Blue Red Two /

ge
b8 Black c8 Black
11-13
II. 128-core subscriber cable
Two 32-channel subscriber boards share one piece of 128-core cable, which has
eight connectors, respectively marked as right 1, right 2, right 3, right 4, left 1, left 2,
left 3 and left 4. They are plugged in the four sockets from top downwards on each
32-chanenl subscriber board.
The structure and wire sequence of the 128-core cable are illustrated in Table 11-4.
Table 11-4 List of the color code and wire sequence of 128-core cable in 32-channel
subscriber frame
Color of the pair Color of the pair Pitc

Pitch Twisti h of Twisti
Con Con
of the ng the ng
nect Colo nect Colo
Color 1 twiste direct Color 1 twist direct
or r2 or r2
d pair ion ed ion
pair
White
White Blue 40 Right Blue 50 Right
(Orange ring)
Oran White Oran

ge (Orange ring) ge
Gree White Gree

n (Orange ring) n
Brow White Brow

n (Orange ring) n
Orange (Red
Red Blue 50 Right Blue 60 Right
ring)
Oran Orange (Red Oran

Con Red 60 Right Conn 40 Right
ge ring) ge
nect ector
or 1 Gree 5 Orange (Red Gree
n ring) n
Brow Orange (Red Brow
n ring) n
Orange
Black Blue 60 Right Blue 40 Left
(Black ring)
Oran Orange Oran

ge (Black ring) ge
Gree Orange Gree

n (Black ring) n
Brow Orange Brow

n (Black ring) n
Con Conn Yellow(Orang

Yellow Blue 60 Left Blue 50 Left
nect ector e ring)
11-14

Con Con
of the ng the ng
nect Colo nect Colo
or r2 or r2
d pair ion ed ion
pair
or 2 Oran 6 Yellow(Orang Oran
ge e ring) ge
Gree Yellow(Orang Gree

n e ring) n
Brow Yellow(Orang Brow

n e ring) n
White White (Green

Blue 40 Left Blue 60 Left
(Blue ring) ring)
White Oran White (Green Oran

Con 50 Left Conn 40 Left
(Blue ring) ge ring) ge
nect ector
or 3 White Gree 7 White (Green Gree
60 Left 50 Left
(Blue ring) n ring) n
White Brow White (Green Brow

40 Left 60 Left
(Blue ring) n ring) n
Con Red(Blue Conn Red(Green
Blue 50 Left Blue 40 Left
nect ring) ector ring)
or 4 8
Red(Blue Oran Red(Green Oran
60 Left 50 Left
ring) ge ring) ge
Red(Blue Gree Red(Green Gree

40 Right 60 Left
ring) n ring) n
Red(Blue Brow Red(Green Brow

50 Right 40 Left
ring) n ring) n
Blue(Black Green(Black
Blue 60 Right Blue 50 Left
ring) ring)
Blue(Black Oran Green(Black Oran

40 Right 60 Left
ring) ge ring) ge
Blue(Black Gree Green(Black Gree

50 Right 40 Left
ring) n ring) n
Blue(Black Brow Green(Black Brow

60 Right 50 Left
ring) n ring) n
Yellow(Bla Yellow(Green
Blue 40 Right Blue 60 Left
ck ring) ring)
Yellow(Bla Oran Yellow(Green Oran

50 Right 40 Left
ck ring) ge ring) ge
Yellow(Bla Gree Yellow(Green Gree

60 Right 50 Left
ck ring) n ring) n
11-15

Con Con
of the ng the ng
nect Colo nect Colo
or r2 or r2
d pair ion ed ion
pair
Yellow(Bla Brow Yellow(Green Brow
40 Right 60 Left
ck ring) n ring) n
11.3 User Sequence Numbers (USN) and User ID on Main

Distribution Frame (MDF)
The subscriber cables shall be inserted into the corresponding sockets, according to
the assigned numbers. For example, the 64-core cable numbered "A-01-1-1" should
be inserted into the rightmost sockets of the first subscriber frame (the first board and
the second board), while the 64-core cable numbered "A-01-1-10" should be inserted
into the leftmost sockets of the same frame. Here, the first letter "A" is the row number
of the cable, "01" is the cabinet number, "1" is the frame number and the last number
(1~10) is the sequence number. Each 128-core cable occupies four pairs of sockets in
the same way as the 64-core cable. The two unused connectors of the last cable of
each frame shall be cut. Refer to Figure 11-6 and Figure 11-7, which illustrate the
cabling in the subscriber frame.
Cable tie 100 mm
Cable tie 150 mm
64-core user cable
Figure 11-6 The bundling of the 64-core cable
11-16
Cable tie 100 mm

Cable tie 150 mm
128-core user cable
Figure 11-7 The bundling of the 128-core cable
The USN, which is determined by the data configuration, is used to relate subscriber
telephone numbers to subscriber lines. There are 304 USNs (0~303) for a subscriber
frame. The USN range is 304~607 for the 2nd subscriber frame that starts with USN
304. In the case of a BSM, which is configured as a subscriber module, the USN
ranges from 0 to 6687. The USNs of the same frame are in ascending order from top
to bottom and from left to right. The sequence of USNs for subscribers is: from top to
bottom on a subscriber board, from left to right in a subscriber frame, from bottom to
top in a rack and from the master to the auxiliary in rows of cabinets (front-view). Table
11-5 is the USN table for the master cabinet of a fully equipped subscriber module,
followed by the USNs for the auxiliary cabinets.
Table 11-5 USN table of the pure subscriber module
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
912 928 944 960 976 992 100 102 10 105 D D 107 108 110 112 113 115 116 118 1200
8 4 40 6 2 8 4 0 6 2 8 4
R R
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :
V V
919 935 951 967 983 999 101 103 10 106 107 109 111 112 114 115 117 119 1207
5 1 47 3 0 1 9 5 1 7 3 9 5 1
4
920 936 952 968 984 100 101 103 10 106 108 109 111 112 114 116 117 119 1208
0 6 2 48 4 0 6 2 8 4 0 6 2
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :
927 943 959 975 991 100 102 103 10 107 108 110 111 113 115 116 118 119 1215
7 3 9 55 1 7 3 9 5 1 7 3 9
608 624 640 656 672 688 704 720 73 752 D D 768 784 800 816 832 848 864 880 896
3
6
R R
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :
11-17
615 631 647 663 679 695 711 727 74 757 V V 775 791 807 823 839 855 871 887 903
3
0 0
616 632 648 664 680 696 712 728 74 758 776 792 808 824 840 856 872 888 904
4
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :
:
623 639 655 671 687 703 719 735 75 767 783 799 815 831 847 863 879 895 911
1
304 320 336 352 368 384 400 416 43 448 D D 464 480 496 512 528 544 560 576 592
2
R R
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :
V V
311 327 343 359 375 391 407 423 43 455 471 487 501 519 535 551 567 583 597
9 0 1
2
312 328 344 360 376 392 408 424 44 456 472 488 502 520 536 552 568 584 598
0
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :
319 335 351 367 383 399 415 431 44 463 479 495 511 527 543 559 575 591 607
7
0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 12 144 D D 160 176 192 208 224 240 256 272 288
8
R R
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :
V V
7 23 39 55 71 87 103 119 13 151 167 183 199 215 231 247 263 279 295
5 0 1
1
8 24 40 56 72 88 104 120 13 152 168 184 200 216 232 248 264 280 295
6
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :
15 31 47 63 79 95 111 127 14 159 175 191 207 223 239 255 271 287 303
3
The cabinet number, frame number, board position number and the sequence number
of the subscriber board (if available) of a subscriber should be clearly marked on the
MDF. According to them, you can find out the USN and the telephone number of the
subscriber if you know the position of the MDF where the subscriber is located, and
conversely is the same case..
Each cable shall have a clearly marked number for future check and connection.
11.4 Meaning of Labels and Pasting Method
Refer to Appendix A for the meaning of the subscriber cable label. Labels should be
pasted 2 cm away from the end of the cable.
11-18
11.5 Bundling Cables inside the Rack

1) The subscriber cables at the back of the rack should be bound properly and
neatly. The cables of a half frame shall be bound together with cable ties and laid
along the cabling rack on both sides of the rack or near the ground (refer Figure
11-8 and Figure 11-9). To keep neat look, cables go along the crossbar of the
frame in two converse directions and then are led out along two sides. Cable ties
should be used at regular intervals and the sharp part should be cut.
2) The cables from the switch to the MDF must be bound tightly and neatly.
3) The cables, which are away from the connection position, should be arranged
along the outer side of the wire handlebar, while the cables that are near the
connection position, should be arranged along the inner side of the wire
handlebar. The cables should not be twisted, instead, they shall be layered and
smoothly bundled.
4) The cable bundle should be tied to the crossbar of the rack at intervals of 150 mm
and then they are tied to the both sides of the rack with cable ties. Generally, the
head of the cable tie shall be in the inner side and excessive cable tie tail shall be
cut.
Figure 11-8 Bundle of cables distributed over the rack
11-19
Figure 11-9 Bundling of cables near the ground
11.5.1 Handling Excessive Subscriber Cables
1) Each frame requires ten pieces of 64-core cables, of which one should be
divided into two 32-core cables. The tenth cable of the odd-numbered frame and
the first cable of the even-numbered frame should be disposed. This prevents
the cables on both sides of the frame from being cut open, saving the terminals
on the MDF.
2) The 64-core subscriber cable should be cut to a 16-core cable. The core wires,
corresponding to the last two AMP connectors should be cut along with the cores
from the orange (four dots) to the blue (two dots). The other cables should be
handled in the same way.
3) The cables should be cut and handled to form sixteen pairs of subscriber cables
on the sockets of the left side or right side of the DRV.
Refer to Figure 11-10 for the handling methods.
11-20
H1 H2
60 ~ (51)
1 2 3 4 43 44 45 46 A
(50) ~ 41 5 6 7 8 47 48 49 (50 51) B
9 (10 11) 12 13 52 53 54 55 C
40 ~ (31)
14 15 16 17 56 57 58 59 D
(30) ~ 21 18 19 20 21 60 E
22 23 24 25 F
20 ~ (11)
26 27 28 29 G
(30 31) 32 33 34 H
(10) ~ 1
35 36 37 38 I
39 40 41 42 J
Subscriber cabinet (1824L / 60 pieces of 64-core cable)
Note: The sequence cables in brackets are The corresponding chart of MDF subscriber
cables between modules
of 32-core type.
Figure 11-10 Illustrations of the handling method
11.5.2 Bundling Specifications
1) The bundling of subscriber cables depends on the type of cable. For example,
when 64-core cables are used, four and a half cables form a bundle, which
supports the left half-frame (back view) and five cables, form another bundle,
which supports the right half-frame. If 128-core cables are adopted, eight cables
(each has four connectors) are required. See Figure 11-11 and Figure 11-12.
Cable tie 100 mm
Cable tie 100 mm
64-core user cable
Figure 11-11 The bundling and connection of the 64-core cables
11-21
Cable tie 100 mm
Cable tie 100 mm
128-core user cable
Figure 11-12 The bundling and connection of the 128-core cables
2) The cables around the connectors should be bundled so that the cable ties
behind each column of connectors are on the same level and point towards the
same direction. Loose cables should be perpendicular to the ground.
3) Specifications of cable ties vary with the application conditions. Do not use two or
more cable ties connected for bundling the cables, for the connection may
reduce the hardness of cable tie. After bundling the cables, the spinous part of
cable tie tails should be cut. The cable ties should be tied at intervals of three or
four times of the diameter of the cable bundle.
11.5.3 Specifications for Cable Bundling
1) Refer to Figure 11-13 to bend the bundled cables, so as to avoid breaking inner
cores due to intense stress at the turning point.
Cable tie is not

allowed at the
turning point
Cable tie
Figure 11-13 Illustration of the bent cable bundle
2) Refer to Figure 11-14 for bundling of cables between frames. The cables
between the two frames should be bundled by three cable ties. The uppermost
cable tie should be at the inside corner angle of the cable bundle.
11-22
11.5.4 Specifications for Cabling
1) If the antistatic floor is installed, it is recommended to adopt downward cabling. If

the support is not installed for the rack, the upward cabling should be adopted,
and cabling rack is needed. In the case of downward cabling, all the cables go
through the interlayer of the floor or the cable trough; in the case of upward
cabling, all the cables go through the cabling rack over the rack. Specifications,
routes, sectional areas and positions of the cables must comply with that
stipulated in the construction plan. Cables must be bundled tidily and smoothly
without twisting or damage on the sheaths.
2) The subscriber cables should be separated from the power cables.
3) At the turning point, the curvature radius of the coaxial cable should be larger
than 60 mm to avoid potential damage to the core wires.
4) The insulation layer of the cable should not be damaged. Cable distribution
should facilitate the future capacity expansion.
5) Cables on the cabling rack must be tied tidily & smoothly. Cable ties should be
spaced at regular intervals. Linen threads used for bundling cables shall be
waxed.
6) Cables in the cabling trough need not be bundled, but they must be arranged
tidily without twisting and they cannot go out of the trough. At both ends of the
trough and at the turning points, every four pieces of cables shall be tied into a
group. These groups of cables are then packed into a bundle.
7) Cables shall be laid from the rack to the MDF. The cable should not be pulled too
tightly and all excessive cables should be cut. Cable distribution should take
reference of the connection position on the rack. Cables on the left side of the
rack should be distributed on the left side of the MDF and so are cables on the
right side.
8) Same numbers should appear at both ends of the cables.
11.5.5 Specifications for Downward Cabling
1) In the case of downward cabling, the cables should not be pulled tight, instead,
they should be bent at the bottom of the rack with a certain length (to avoid sharp
bends), as shown in Figure 11-15. When entering the rack, the cables shall be
laid along both sides of the rack and then further distributed to the frame
backplanes.
2) The cables under the antistatic floor should be laid according to the routes
specified in the construction plane and then led to the cabling ladder through the
lead-in hole.
3) Beneath the floor, every four pieces of cables should be bundled with cable ties
and then stacked up. Stacks of cables are recommended to be not higher than
200 mm, otherwise, they may affect the ventilation and heat dissipation.
11-23
4) The cables should be ties at intervals of 0.4 m under the floor. They can be
crossed about 1 meter away under the rack and then be bundled together
smoothly and tidily.
5) All the cable ties should be put in order after the distribution. Cable ties should be
aligned in a straight line.
Figure 11-14 Illustration of the bending of cables at the bottom of the rack
11.5.6 Specifications for Cabling in Cabling Trench
1) The cabling trench is often employed in small offices in the country or village.
When it is used, it is necessary to clear up all the garbage in the trench and both
ends of the trench should be blocked properly to keep the rodents away.
2) The cables in the trench should be laid in order, as illustrated in Figure 11-15.
3) Note to separate the signal cables away from the power cables.
11-24
User cable
MDF
Trench
Figure 11-15 The cabling in the cabling trench
11.5.7 Specifications for Upward Cabling (Welded Cabinet)
Note:
For the assembled cabinet, cables are not laid over the cabinet, so upward cabling is
unnecessary.
z While laying cables over the cabinet, the cables should be bent at the top of the
rack with certain margin (that is, the bend should be free and not sharp). The
bundled cables can be crossed about 1 meter above the cabinet. If cables are to
be laid upward along both sides of the rack, a cabling ladder is required.
z Every four pieces of cables should be bundled and then arranged tidily together,
as illustrated in Figure 11-16.
11-25
in et
cab
trol
4 cables into 1 bundle in con
Ma
Bind e t1
a bin
er c
crib
S ubs
ne t2
rc abi
ribe
bs c
Su
t3
i ne
c ab
r
ribe
bsc
Su
To cabling ladder
Figure 11-16 Illustration of the bending of cable over the rack
1) While laying cables on the cabling ladder, every four pieces of cables should be
bundled and then all the bundles of such cables should be tied together.
2) The cables should be tied at intervals of the spacing between the ladder
crossbars. The spinous cable tie tails should be cut off.
See Figure 11-17 for the illustration of laying cables on the cabling ladder.
11-26
Figure 11-17 The cabling on the cabling ladder
3) The cable rail shall be needed for the rack when using a cabling ladder. See
Figure 11-18.
11-27
Figure 11-18 Illustration of the distance between the cabling ladder and the rack
4) The cables should not be pulled tightly, while leading them down the ladder to
the MDF, as illustrated in Figure 11-19.
(1)
(1)
(1) Bind 4 pieces of cables into 1 bundle with cable ties

Figure 11-19 The cabling between the downward ladder and the MDF
5) The downward ladder should be fixed to the wall and to the floor to ensure its
firmness, as shown in Figure 11-20.
11-28
Figure 11-20 The fixing of the downward cabling ladder
11.6 Connecting Subscriber Cables with Terminal Block on

MDF
1) While connecting cables to the terminal block, first strip off the cable sheath to
expose the cores, then wrap the cores with elastic insulating tape tightly or use
the heat-shrink tube. The core wires should also be bundled at intervals of 100
mm with cable ties or thin thread, leaving a certain surplus length, as illustrated in
Figure 11-21.
2) The cable sheath shall be stripped neatly without damaging the insulation layer
of the core wires. Cables shall be distributed in the order of color spectrum. The
twisted wires should not be separated.
3) Cables distributed between different MDFs should be placed smoothly, tidily and
in a straight level.
4) Cables on the MDF can be bundled either in a circular way or in groups of four
cables, depending on the actual needs.
5) While connecting cables to the terminal block, the cable should be connected to
the front face of the terminal block in the order of left to right and top to bottom
(top – left corner to start with) according to the cable color cross-reference table.
Refer to Figure 11-22 and Figure 11-23.
6) This connection method can also be applied to other types of terminal blocks.
11-29
(5)
(1) (1)
(2)
(4) (4)
(3)
(1) Terminal block (2) Margin is necessary

(4) Wrapped with protective adhesive tape or hear-shrink
(3) Cable tie 100 mm
tube
(5) Margin is necessary
Figure 11-21 The connection of the cable to the terminal block
Figure 11-22 The terminal block
11-30
Figure 11-23 The connection of the core wires to the terminals
11.6.1 Clamping Connection of Cables
1) The related specifications of the cable connection should be followed, while

clamping the cable.
2) Each pair of core wires shall have the same color.
3) The clamping tool should be used to clamp the core wires with appropriate force.
The clamping tool and the terminal should be maintained at the same level.
4) The core wires should be clamped in the following order: from top to bottom and
from left to right.
5) The Sequence Number label should be pasted on both sides of the terminal bar.
Different kinds of cables on the terminal bar should have clear labels to
distinguish them from one another.
6) The core wires should be aligned in an orderly manner and the protection bus
and the lightning terminal should be plugged to the terminal bar, before being led
out of the building.
7) The core wires should be clamped with appropriate stress only (that is, without
any excessive force) so as to facilitate convenience in future maintenance work.
11.6.2 Winding Connection of Cables
The cable winding gun should be used instead of pliers to wind core wires. The
following requirements shall be met:
11-31
z When the core wire diameter is 0.4~0.5 mm, the core wire should be wound
around the terminal 6~8 times and it is 4~6 times when the wire diameter is
0.6~1.0 mm.
z Core wires shall be wound closely but shall not overlap.
z The winding should start from the root of the terminal. The copper of the core
wire that does not come into contact with the terminal should not be exposed.
The core wires should not have any apparent damage.
11.6.3 Installing MDF
The MDF may be of the clamping-connection type provided by the manufacturer (that
is, built-in MDF in the auxiliary cabinet) or of the winding-connection type. In either
case, the following requirements must be met during the connection:
z The basement should be aligned with the entry hole of the cable.
z The jumper rings should be placed straight and in neat manner.
z The vertical and horizontal deviations should not be more than 3 mm and 2 mm
respectively.
z The MDF shall be reinforced according to shockpoof specifications, if necessary.
z The cables should be connected to the MDF according to the construction plan,
cable type, direction and routes.
z Labels should be pasted to the terminal bar and both sides of the inter-frame
cables, indicating the cable type and the Sequence Number range. The core
wires shall strictly correspond to the MDF terminals one by one.
z The connector should have proper contact and there should be no broken or
bent connection terminals.
z All the cables should be arranged neatly upon the completion of the distribution.
z The head of cable sheath should be stripped tidily without damaging the
insulating layer of the core wires. Core wires are distributed according to their
wire colors and dot sequences. The twisted core wires should not be separated.
z The internal and the external jumper wires should go through the nearest jumper
ring before being connected to the jumper terminal. Adjacent jumper wires
should be of different colors. All jumper wires going through jumper rings shall be
in proper order.
z The MDF should be connected to the protective grounding cable and the copper
wire diameter should be more than or equal to 50 mm.
z The adjacent jumper wires should be of different colors when connecting for
easy checking.
11-32
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 12 Installing Trunk Cables
Chapter 12 Installing Trunk Cables
12.1 Overview
The C&C08 Switch provides the trunk interfaces in two modes, namely Trunk Switching
Module (TSM) mode and Service Processing Module (SPM) mode. In the TSM mode,
the trunk cables are led out from the trunk frame of the TSM and the processing of trunk
signaling is carried out by the main control frame of the TSM. In the SPM mode, the
trunk cables are led out from the AM interface frame and in this case, the AM requires
the trunk signaling to be processed by the attached SPM.
12.2 Installing Digital Trunk Cables in TSM
12.2.1 Structure of Digital Trunk Cables
In the TSM mode, digital trunk cables include three types, namely 75 ohm coaxial cable,
120 ohm twisted pair and 8-core twisted pair. You can select any one of them according
to the actual requirement.
The 75 ohm coaxial cable has three kinds of connectors, namely plug connector (SMB),
screw connector (SMA) and BNC connector, as illustrated in Figure 12-1 (a), Figure
12-1(b) and Figure 12-1(c) respectively. To handle the SMA connector, a special tool
(trunk cable extractor) is required, as shown in Figure 12-2. SMB connectors are most
widely used.
(1) Heat-shrink tube (2) 75Ω coaxial cable (thin) (3) SMB connector
Figure 12-1 (a) 75 ohm SMB connector
12-1
(1) 75Ω coaxial cable (thin) (2) Heat-shrink tube (3) SMB connector
Figure 12-1 (b) 75 ohm SMA connector
(1) 75ohm coaxial cable (thick) (2) Heat-shrink tube (3) SMB connector
Figure 12-1 (c) 75 ohm BNC connector
Figure 12-2 Trunk cable extractor
12.2.2 Connecting 75 ohm Coaxial Cable
While using 75 ohm coaxial cables as digital trunk cables, you should complete the
following two steps:
12-2
I. Setting switches on the Digital Trunk Board (DTF)
S21 & S22 are DIP switches providing various options of the matched resistance. S21
is used to set the first E1 port and S22 the second. Switches 1 and 2 are set to ‘ON’ to
select 75 ohm resistance and switches 3 and 4 are set to ‘ON’ to select 120 ohm
resistance. When switches 5 and 6 are set to ‘ON’, no resistance gets added to the
transmission line. Switches 5 and 6 are set to ‘OFF’ while employing the 120 ohm
resistance, and damping resistance will be added to the line. When switches 7 and 8
are set to ‘ON’, R end of the transmission line is grounded. Switches 7 and 8 are set to
‘ON’ while employing the 75 ohm resistance and they are set to ‘OFF’ for the 120 ohm
resistance.
II. Connecting Radio Frequency (RF) connector
There are 64 RF sockets available on the trunk backplane. Every DTF occupies four
sockets and each two sockets (one for transmission and one for receiving) form a trunk
system as shown in Figure 12-3. While connecting the SMA connector, turn the
extractor clockwise with moderate force. While fastening the SMB connector, push it
into the socket with a slight pressure.
Figure 12-3 The trunk socket
Figure 12-4 illustrates the connection details of the 75 ohm trunk cables to the opposite
peer office. Transmitting end (TXn) and receiving end (RXn) of the RF connector are
connected with the receiving end (RXm) and transmitting end (TXm) of the opposite
office respectively by the 75 ohm coaxial cable (Here, m=1 and n=32). TX1 and RX1
correspond to the first trunk system of the first trunk board and TX2 and RX2 to the
second system of the first trunk board. Likewise, TX31 and RX31 correspond to the first
system and TX32 and RX32 to the second system of the sixteenth board.
12-3
Opposite peer office

Local office
Coaxial cable Optical cable Coaxial cable
TXn Transmitter Receiver RXm
Optical transmission equipment Optical transmission equipment
Trunk
backplane
Receiver Transmitter TXm
RXn
Figure 12-4 Connection between the local office and the opposite office by 75 ohm
trunk cables
12.2.3 Connecting 120 ohm Twisted Pairs
If 120 ohm twisted pair is adopted, the DIP switch setting on the DTF is the same as the
description in 12.2.2 I. Setting switches on the Digital Trunk Board (DTF).
The receiving and transmitting ports of the trunk backplane at the local office are
connected respectively with the transmitting and receiving ports of the (remote end)
opposite peer office by 120 ohm cables through optical transmission equipment, as
illustrated in Figure 12-5.
Local office Opposite peer Office

Negative 120 W Negative Negative Negative 120 W
Transmitter Receiver
polar line cable polar Optical polar polar line cable
fiber
Positive Positive Positive Positive
Trunk Transmitter polar line polar Optical Optical polar polar line
Receiver
backplane transmission transmission
Negative Negative equipment equipment Negative Negative
Receiver polar polar line Transmitter
polar line polar
Positive Positive Positive Positive

Receiver Transmitter
polar line polar polar polar line
Figure 12-5 Connection between the local office and the opposite peer office by 120
ohm twisted pair (trunk cable)
12.3 Installing Digital Trunk Cables in SPM
12.3.1 Structure of Digital Trunk Cables
In the SPM mode, trunk cables are led out from the ET16 Drive Card (ETD) of the AM
interface frame corresponding to the 16-Channel E1/T1 Interface Board (ET16). The 75
ohm trunk cable is made up of the mini-type coaxial cable SFYZ75-2-1 and ERNI 2*2
square connectors. It adopts the black-and-white shell to differentiate the directions.
The 75 ohm trunk cable must be used along with the ETDA. The illustration of the 75
ohm trunk cable structure is shown in Figure 12-6.
12-4
75Ω¸ coaxial cable (thin)

ERNI connector
Figure 12-6 View of the 75 ohm trunk cable with connector
The 120 ohm trunk cable is made up of the 120 ohm Shielded Twisted Pair (STP) and
ERNI 2*3 square connectors. It adopts the black-and-white shell to differentiate the
directions. The 120 ohm trunk cable must be used along with the ETDB. The illustration
of the 120 ohm trunk cable structure is shown in Figure 12-7.
120Ω , shielded twisted pair

ERNI 2*3 connector
Figure 12-7 View of the 120 ohm trunk cable with connector
12.3.2 Distribution of ET16 Digital Trunk Cables
ET16 digital trunk cables are available in three types: 75 ohm coaxial cable, 120 ohm
twisted pair and 100 ohm twisted pair. You can choose according to the actual needs.
Each ET16 supports sixteen T1 interfaces. When the 120 ohm trunk cables are
adopted, each interface cabinet can be equipped with a maximum of four LIM (Line
Interface Module) frames. Because of the outlet restrictions, one interface cabinet can
be equipped with a maximum of 32 ETDs, and each ETD can provide 16 T1 interfaces
and 32 trunk cables. In this way, one LIM frame has 256 trunk cables and one interface
cabinet has a maximum of 1024 trunk cables. Based on cabling considerations, the E1
Driving Card (DRC) should be in cross layout. Refer to the cabling specifications part of
the trunk cables for layout details.
When the 75 ohm trunk cable is used, one interface cabinet can be equipped with a
maximum of 4 LIM frames. Each LIM frame can be equipped with 16 ETDs, each of
which can provide 16 T1 interfaces and 32 trunk cables. In this way, one LIM frame
supports 512 trunk cables and one interface cabinet can provide a maximum of 2048
trunk cables.
12-5
12.3.3 Connecting Trunk Cables
In the SPM mode, the connections of 75 ohm coaxial cables, 120 ohm or 100 ohm
twisted pair cables with the ETDs (A, B and C types) are identical. There are two 64PIN
sockets on the ETD, each of which has 8 lockers for connection of the trunk cables,
corresponding to the 16 T1 interfaces of the ET16 starting from the top, as shown in
Figure 12-8.
(1) Fixed arm (2) Component for removing the ETD (3) ETD
Figure 12-8 Illustration of the ETD structure
On the backplane of each LIM frame, a total of 16 ETDs can be inserted and the
installation slots for the ETDs are the same as the ET16s. The top and bottom of each
LIM frame are installed with cabling rack, used to bundle the trunk cable. The ETD
installation is as shown in Figure 12-9. During installation, ensure that the connectors
on ETDs are connected securely with the backplane sockets.
The connection of trunk cables at one side of the rack is identical with that in the TSM
mode. For installing, refer to the installation part of the trunk cable in the TSM mode,
from this Manual.
12-6
(1) E16 trunk cable socket (2) ETD board

Figure 12-9 Illustration of the ETD installation
12.4 Meaning and Pasting of Labels
Refer to Appendix A for the details of the labels. The label is pasted 2 cm away from the
connector.
12.5 Bundling Digital Trunk Cables
Trunk cables connected to the back of the rack should be bundled tidily and smoothly.
In general, the trunk cables for each half of a frame are tied together into a round
bundle with cable ties, for subsequent upward cabling or downward cabling along the
cabling rack. Cables should be laid along the crossbars and then led out from the two
sides. Cable ties should be evenly spaced, neither too tight nor too loose. The spinous
cable tie tails shall be cut to the same length.
Cables between the Switch and the MDF must be bundled tightly and tidily.
12.5.1 Specifications for Cabling
1) Downward cabling is recommended for trunk cables if the support is installed for
the rack and the antistatic floor is available. Otherwise, upward cabling is adopted.
12-7
In this case, cabling rack is needed and trunk cables pass through the cabling rack
or trough above the rack.
2) Specifications, routes, sectional areas and positions of the cables must comply
with the stipulated in the construction plan. Cables must be bundled tidily and
smoothly and there shall be no twisting cables and damaged sheaths.
3) Trunk cables should be kept isolated from the power supply cables.
4) The curvature radius of coaxial cables should not be less than 40 mm as illustrated
in Figure 12-10, to prevent probable damages to the core wires.
5) Do not damage the insulation layer of the cable. The cabling shall facilitate
maintenance and future capacity expansion.
6) Cables going along the cabling rack shall be bundled tightly and neatly. Bundled
cables should be packed closely together and cable ties should be spaced evenly.
Linen thread used for bundling shall be waxed.
7) Cables in the cabling trough need not be bundled, but they must be tied while
entering and exiting the trough or at turning points. They must be arranged tidily
without twisting and cables shall not go out of the trough.
8) Both ends of a cable should be pasted with Huawei labels, which are 20 mm away
from the connectors.
(1) Cable tie is not allowed at the turning point (2) Cable tie
Figure 12-10 Bundling and bending of coaxial cables
12.5.2 Specifications for the Cabling in the Rack
For cabling in the rack, cables whose connectors are farthest away from the connecting
position should be aligned along the outside of the cabling bundle, while the nearer
ones are placed along the inside of the cabling bundle. The cables in the rack should
not cross each other and should be tidy and smooth. The specifications in the TSM and
SPM modes according to the outgoing trunk mode of the switch are described below.
In the TSM mode, the cables in the rack are laid as shown in Figure 12-11 and
Figure 12-12.
12-8
(1) 60 mm cable ties (2) 150 mm cable ties (3) 75 ohm coaxial cables
Figure 12-11 Bundling and bending of the 75 ohm coaxial cables outside and at the
two sides of a frame
(1) 100 mm cable ties (2) 120Ω trunk cables (3) 150 mm cable ties
Figure 12-12 Bundling and bending of the 120 ohm trunk cables outside and at the two
sides of a frame
12-9
In the SPM mode, to facilitate setting and bundling, ET16 trunk cables of each frame
shall adopt both upward cabling and downward cabling. They run along the trough on
the crossbar at the back of the rack to the cabling rings at the two sides of the rack, then
led out upwards and downwards separately. Figure 12-13 and Figure 12-14 illustrate
upward cabling and downward cabling of the 75 ohm ET16 trunk cable respectively.
Figure 12-15 and Figure 12-16 are the illustrations of upward cabling and downward
cabling of the 120 ohm ET16 trunk cable respectively. Figure 12-17 and Figure 12-18
are the illustrations of upward cabling and downward cabling of the 100 ohm ET16
cable respectively. Keep the following in mind while carrying out the installation:
1) During the on-site installation, insert each trunk cable of the ETD in the socket
behind the board from the first pin downwards. While inserting, keep the gray side
of the connector facing right. If the insertion is normal, a "click" sound can be heard
and the connector gets locked, otherwise, you need check whether the insertion
position is correct.
Note:
There is a row of pins unused between the fourth and fifth sockets on one ETD.
2) The cables should be bundled to the nearest cabling trough. The ET16 trunk
cables of the upper part of each frame should be bundled to the upper cabling
trough, then to the cabling rings at the corresponding side of the rack. The trunk
cables of the lower part should be laid on the lower cabling trough and bundled to
the cabling rings at the corresponding side of the rack, then led out upwards or
downwards according to the specifications.
3) For bundling of 75 ohm trunk cables, the cables of the adjacent LIM frames are
individually bundled and laid in layers in the same cabling trough. While doing so,
care must be taken that the cables of the upper part of the lower LIM frame are laid
at the bottom of the cabling trough, and those of the lower part of the adjacent
upper LIM frame are laid at the top of the cabling trough.
4) As shown in Figure 12-12, the cables should be bound into round bundle without
twisting with cable ties, which should be evenly spaced and whose heads should
face the same direction. The cable ties at the same position should be in the same
horizontal line. After bundling, the cable tie tails should be cut.
5) The cables near the connectors should not be pulled too tightly, instead, some
length should be reserved for plugging and unplugging the connectors
conveniently.
6) Both ends of ET16 trunk cables should be pasted with Huawei labels, which are 20
mm away from the connectors. The pasted labels should face the same direction,
and the marks on them should be clear for convenient checking.
12-10
7) If the cabling trough is not used in the cabling rack, cables shall be bundled tightly
and neatly. Bundled cables should be packed closely together and cable ties
should be spaced equally. Linen thread used for bundling shall be waxed.
8) Cables in the cabling trough need not be bundled, but they must be tied while
entering and exiting the trough or at turning points. They must be laid tidily without
twisting and cables shall not go out of the trough.
Figure 12-13 Upward cabling of 75 ohm ET16 trunk cable
12-11
Figure 12-14 Downward cabling of 75 ohm ET16 trunk cable
12-12
12-13
12-14
12-15
12.5.3 Specifications for Cabling along Cabling Ladder (Trough)
1) The trunk cables of the same frame (32 trunk systems) are bundled and laid in the
cabling trough or along the cabling ladder. The spacing between the cable ties is
determined by the dimensions of the cabling ladder.
2) Bundled trunk cables should be of the same length and cable ties should be
spaced at intervals of about 1 m, as illustrated in Figure 12-9.
3) Cut off the cable tie tails and pack the bundled cables tidily.
4) In the case of upward cabling, the trunk cables laid in the cabling trough or along
the cabling ladder are as shown in Figure 12-19,Figure 12-20,Figure 12-21, .
12-16
Cabling ladder (cabling trough)
75Ω¸ or 120Ω¸ trunk cables
Cable ties
Figure 12-19 Cabling and bundling of trunk cables in the cabling ladder and cabling
trough
Cables
Figure 12-20 Trunk cables on cabling ladder and cabling trough-- mode 1
Cables
Figure 12-21 Trunk cables on cabling ladder and cabling trough--mode 2
12-17
Spacing between
cable ties
75Ω¸ or 120Ω¸ trunk cable

8-core 120 Ω¸ twisted pair trunk cable
Spacing between cable ties
Figure 12-22 Cabling and bundling on the cabling ladder and the trough
12.5.4 Specifications for Downward Cabling
In the case of downward cabling, the cables should not be pulled tight, instead, they
should be bent at the bottom of the rack with a certain length (to avoid sharp bends), as
illustrated in Figure 12-23. In the case of upward cabling, the cables shall be laid along
both sides of the rack and then further distributed to the frame backplanes.
12-18
(1) 100 mm cable ties (2) The plate of cable lead-in hole
(3) Margin at bends (4) 150 or 300 mm cable ties
(5) The section of trunk cables (6) Trunk twisted pair
(7) 150 mm cable ties
Figure 12-23 Cabling and bundling near the ground
12.5.5 Specifications for Upward Cabling
Figure 12-24 and Figure 12-25 illustrate the cabling procedure, while using the cabling
trough.
1) Bend the cables on the top of the rack and leave a certain length for future
modifications and alterations.
2) If the distance between the cabling trough at the top of the rack and the cabling
ladder is less than 0.8 m, cables can be directly laid from the ladder to the top of
the rack. Otherwise, a downward cabling ladder is recommended to fix the cables
to avoid possible damage to the cable.
3) When the cables are led from the cabling ladder downward to the cabling rack,
some spare length of the cables should be left for future use. Do not pull the cables
too tight, as this may damage the cable.
4) Measure the cable length required accurately before cabling. If the cables are not
long enough, replace them with the cables of proper length. Under special
circumstances, cables can be extended by using special coaxial cable connectors
instead of soldering. Bundle the surplus cables into loops and place them in the
trough near the optical transmitter and receiver or digital distribution frame.
12-19
(1)
(2)
(1) Spacing between cable ties (2) To cabling lacder

Figure 12-24 Bundling on the top of the rack
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Cabling trough (2) Power cable (3) Cable tie

Figure 12-25 Cabling and bundling on the top of the rack
12.6 Connecting Digital Trunk Cables to Digital Distribution

Frame(DDF)
1) Trunk cables are led to the PCM distribution frame in the transmission equipment
room. The specific connection location is determined by the customer. The
connector type varies with the PCM distribution frame.
2) The connection of trunk cables to the terminal block of the PCM distribution frame
can be either clamping connection or winding connection.
3) The specific operations of clamping connection and winding connection of trunk
cables are the same as those of subscriber cables.
12-20
12.7 Installing Analog Trunk Cables
Besides the digital trunk interface, C&C08 Switch provides analog trunk interface (AT0).
The following describes the connections of analog trunk cables.
32-core cable with two small connectors is used for the loop trunk. Each connector can
access 8 channels of trunk signal and is inserted in the socket corresponding to the
loop trunk board.
The wire sequence and sockets are shown in Figure 12-26.
a b c d
· · Pink 1 1
· · Orange 1 2
· · Green 1 3
· · Blue 1 4
· · Gray 1 5
· · Pink 2 6
· · Orange 2 7
· · Gree 2 8
Black spot
Red spot
a b c d
· · Blue 2 9
· · Gray 2 10
· · Pink 3 11
· · Orange 3 12
· · Green 3 13
· · Blue 3 14
· · Gray 3 15
· · Blue 4 16
Black spot
Red spot
Figure 12-26 AT0 sockets (small connector, wire sequence, subscriber number)
AT0 loop trunk is directly connected to the subscriber line board of the local office by
cables, and the connection is shown in Figure 12-27.
A A
AT0 Trunk
Local office
board
Subscriber
line board
B B
Figure 12-27 Connection of AT0 loop trunk cable
12-21
Note:
Each cable should have a specific number to facilitate checking and connection.
12-22
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 13 Installing Terminal System
Chapter 13 Installing Terminal System
13.1 Introduction to Terminal System
The Operation and Maintenance System (OMS) of C&C08 Digital SPC Switching
System is of an open system structure in the client/server mode, based on the Local
Area Network (LAN), Wide Area Network (WAN) or Public Switched Telephone
Network (PSTN) employing Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
It provides multi-window Graphic User Interface (GUI) and command operating system
by applying the Object-Oriented Programming (OOP) technology, Windows 2000
operating system, database engine technology, data description driven concept, visual
technology, Man Machine Language (MML) compilation technology, Fourth Generation
Structured Query Language (4GL-SQL) and C++ language. The OMS not only
performs the functions of data setting, maintenance, testing, charging, traffic statistics,
loading and network management for C&C08 Switch, but also supports multi-point
maintenance & multi-point data setting and provides multiple MML interfaces for
Network Management System (NMS). It has such advantages as providing powerful
functions, friendly interface and simple operation, supporting mouse and keyboard
operation, capable of carrying various external equipment, providing high security, high
reliability and flexible system configuration, with good openness and expandability,
offering multiple methods and measures for remote/centralized maintenance.
13.1.1 Terminal System Structure
The AM/CM terminal system works in client/server mode, which is of a distributed and
hierarchical structure. The server end consists of the BAM server and the switch, which
are installed in the BAM cabinet and called the BAM system, while the client end
consists of client workstations. The hardware architecture of the terminal system is
The BAM system functions as a communication bridge between the workstation and
the switch. It transmits the maintenance commands from the workstation to the switch
and returns the response of the switch to the corresponding workstation.
Another function of the BAM is to act as the server in the client/server mode structure.
In addition, it is responsible for the management of database, testing tasks and traffic
statistics tasks. It also stores important data of the switch, such as charging information,
alarm information and traffic statistics data to the BAM hard disk, and dumps them to
CD or network server as required.
13-1
C C C S S S
P P P P P P
C C C C C C
10M 10M 10M 10M 10M 10M
Multiple switches
100M
BAM server (background administration module)
100M
One switch
10M 10M
WS WS
Figure 13-1 Architecture of the terminal system of C&C08 Switch
For the above figure, the following points need to be noted:

z CPC is the central processing unit, responsible for managing the equipment and
processing the central database in the AM/CM. SPC is the service processing unit,
responsible for service processing.
z BAM server is configured according to the capacity and traffic of the terminating
office. It can be one server or two. Refer to Installation Manual (Volume1) for
detailed configurations.
z Switch is an Ethernet switch, including three 100 Mbit/s network interfaces and
twenty-four 10 Mbit/s network interfaces.
13.1.2 Centralized Maintenance
With the development of the telecom network, the network structure becomes more
and more complicated and maintenance gets more and more demanding. Therefore,
centralized maintenance and NMS become an indispensable part in the local
telecommunication network to facilitate network management and improve operation
efficiency.
Based on the concept and structure of the Telecommunication Management Network

(TMN), C&C08 Switch provides the powerful centralized maintenance and NMS, which
not only performs maintenance, testing, charging, traffic statistics and data
management of the remote switches, but also monitors and controls the power
equipment and the environment (including images) in the equipment room in a
13-2
centralized manner, and sends traffic data and alarm information in real time to the
NMS of the local network so as to supervise and control the entire local network.
In case of failures, alarms can be generated immediately in the NMS center, and
maintenance personnel can take corresponding actions according to the alarm level.
By the centralized maintenance and the NMS, the operating status of the office and the
network can be reported on a timely and accurate basis to the higher-level authorities.
C&C08 Centralized Maintenance and NMS provides a full range of network

management functions, such as management configuration, performance
management, charging management, failure management and security management.
The terminal maintenance and management system of C&C08 Switch is set up in a
standard, open and computerized Local Area Network (LAN). It can utilize multiple
modes to achieve centralized maintenance and network management of C&C08
Switch.
Branch offices consisting of C&C08 Switches can access digital Wide Area Networks
(WANs), such as PSTN, Digital Data Network (DDN) or packet switched network by
routers. They are connected with the NMS center to realize network management
functions.
In addition, a Pulse-Code Modulation (PCM) timeslot can be used to provide 64 kbit/s

high-speed digital link based on Link Access Protocol on the D-channel (LAPD) from
the maintained office to the NMS center through various switches and transmission
equipment.
13.2 Installing BAM System
The fixed configuration of the terminal system includes BAM server, monitor, Ethernet
switch, power inverter and power converter. The router is the optional equipment. Refer
to Installation of BAM Cabinet in this manual for detailed installation procedures.
13.3 Installing Workstation
I. Location of workstations in terminal system
C&C08 Switch is provided with multiple computer terminals (workstations), which are
individually used as maintenance terminal, charging terminal and so on. The terminals
are connected with the BAM system by network adapter and network cables.
II. Installation of workstations in terminal system
Installation requirements
13-3
All workstations should be located and installed properly in accordance with the
requirements in the construction plan of the switch room.
The workstations should be arranged tidily and in line. The adjacent workstations
should be close to one another with their surfaces at the same level.
Antistatic computer table should be used as working table.
All the equipment needed should be present, such as maintenance terminal device,
printer, tape recorder, which are pasted with labels. Installation positions shall meet the
design requirements.
III. Equipment connection of computer system
Installation steps:
Step 1: First, install the computer table first. It is better to use the dedicated computer
table.
Step 2: Put the computer on the left side of the table and the printer on the right side.
Step 3: As for separate-type computer, plug the monitor cable, monitor power cable,
AC power cable, printer cable, terminal-loading cable, keyboard connector and mouse
connector respectively.
Step 4: As for the integrated terminal, plug the AC power cable, terminal-loading cable,
printer cable, mouse and keyboard connectors.
Step 5: Install the printer according to the instruction book delivered with the computer
and then check it upon the completion of installation.
Step 6: Power on the computer and check whether it can work normally. Generally, all
computers are installed with terminal operation software. Power off the computer
before plugging/unplugging the serial or parallel port cables.
13.4 Installing Terminal Network System
I. Overall structure of the terminal network system
The terminal network system takes LAN Switch as the center and is connected in the
star mode. Refer to Figure 13-2 for the general structure of the network when single
server is configured.
13-4
All network adapters in the host
10 M 10 M
100 M
LANSwitch3
LANSwitch 4 (inactive)
LANSwitch2
100 M
BAM server
100 M
LANSwitch1
10 M
Network adapters in the

WS client terminal
Figure 13-2 Connection of the terminal network when configured with single server
LAN Switch in the figure is an Ethernet switch. BAM server uses the 100 Mbit/s
interface of LAN Switch and the other equipment use 10 Mbit/s interfaces of LAN
Switch. A 100 Mbit/s crossover network cable needs to be installed between the other
two LAN Switches. For small-capacity equipment, fewer LAN Switches will be used and
the networking as shown in Figure 13-3 can be adopted.
13-5
10M
100M LANSwitch3 (inactive)

LANSwitch2
BAM server
100M
LANSwitch1
10M
Network adapters in the WS

client terminal
Figure 13-3 Connection of the terminal network when configured with single server
(equipment of small capacity )
Refer to Figure 13-4 for the general structure of the network when configured with
double servers.
10M 10M
LANSwitch3
100M
LANSwitch4 (inactive)
100M
LANSwitch2
100M
100M
BAM server
100M
100M
LANSwitch1
BAM server 10M
Network adapters in the WS

client terminal
Figure 13-4 Connection for the terminal network when configured with double servers
13-6
When double servers are configured, three network adapters need be installed. For
network connection, the BAM servers use the 100 Mbit/s network interfaces of LAN
Switch and the other equipment use the 10 Mbit/s network interfaces. The crossover
network cables are used to directly connect the other two servers and two LAN
Switches respectively. For small-capacity equipment, fewer LAN Switches will be used
and the networking as shown in Figure 13-5 can be adopted.
10M
100M
LANSwitch3 (inactive)
LANSwitch2
BAM server
100M
100M
100M
100M
BAM server
LANSwitch1
10M
Netwo rk adapters in the WS

client terminal
Figure 13-5 Connection of the terminal network when configured with double servers
(equipment of small capacity )
Generally, LAN Switch in the BAM system is of Quidway 2403 type, providing
twenty-four 10 Mbit/s network interfaces and three 100 Mbit/s network interfaces. The
network interfaces of the same rate are completely equal.
II. Network cable connection of the terminal network system
The network cables of the terminal system need to be made on site and the installation
procedure is as follows:
1) First, measure the length of each network cable to be connected according to the
layout and cabling conditions of the equipment room.
2) Make the network cables. Refer to Figure 13-6, Figure 13-7 and Figure 13-8 for
the connection of straight through network cables and crossover network cables
respectively. The first & second pins, the third & sixth pins, the fourth & fifth pins
and the seventh & eighth pins of the network cable connector (RJ-45 connector)
must be connected with twisted pair respectively.
13-7
Network cable
Figure 13-6 Illustration of the network cable connector
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
N e t w o r k c a b le N e t w o r k c a b le
c o n n e c to r c o n n e c to r
Figure 13-7 Connection of straight through network cables
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Network cable Network cable

connector connector
Figure 13-8 Connection of crossover network cables
3) Stick labels before bundling the network cables. Refer to Appendix A for the label
illustration. Fold the label along the dotted line to stick the two sides together, and
then roll the adhesive part of the tail around the network cable.
13-8
4) During cabling in the rack, bundle the network cables to the crossbar of each
frame to lead them to the two sides the rack for upward cabling or downward
cabling according to the project requirements. The illustration for downward
cabling is shown in the Figure 13-9.
(1) Cable tie interval 120 mm (2) Network cable

Figure 13-9 Cabling of the network cables in the rack (downward cabling)
13-9
13.5 Installing Inverter
An inverter, which serves to convert -48 V DC into 220 V AC, should be installed if
conditions permit. It can ensure the normal operation of the computer by providing the
uninterrupted DC power supply system in case of AC power failure.
Technical indices:
Nominal value of the input voltage: Vin (DC): 48 V Vin (AC): 220 V
Input voltage range: Vin (DC): 40 V~60 V Vin (AC): 187 V~253 V
Output voltage: inversion: 220 V AC±3% 50±2Hz Bypass: 187 V~253 V AC
Rated output current: 1.0 A (valid value)
I. Connection of input cables
The integrated equipment is provided with a DC input plug before delivery. Connect one
end of the 2-core cable whose single core diameter larger than 3 mm with the battery
plug and the other end to the 48 V storage batteries. Switch off DC power supply, insert
the battery plug into the battery socket and tighten it firmly. Plug one end of the AC input
power cable into the Mains supply socket and the other end into the AC input socket of
the equipment. This turns on the AC indicator on the panel. Switch on the DC power
supply, which turns on the DC indicator.
II. Connection of output cables
Insert the power supply plugs of the computer and the printer into the AC output
sockets respectively. The computer and the printer can work normally upon startup.
Refer to Figure 13-10 for the inverter output connection.
DC AC OUT
Computer
IN
-48V
Batteries
Inverter
AC AC OUT
Printer
IN
Figure 13-10 Installation of output cables
13-10
III. Precautions in the use of the inverter
z The inverter is specially designed for the computer and the printer, so it should
never be used to bear other loads.
z The rated load of the inverter is one computer and one printer. The inverter should
never be overloaded.
z When the inverter is in service, the internal fan will run for heat dissipation. The
vents should not be blocked.
z Be cautious that there is high voltage in the inverter. Do not disassemble it by
yourself.
z In case that the fuse is damaged, it should be replaced with a fuse of the same
type.
13-11
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 14 Installing the Alarm Box
Chapter 14 Installing the Alarm Box
The system uses two kinds of alarm boxes, namely, the CC11 alarm box and the GM12
alarm box. Their installation methods are described below. Please read the
corresponding section according to your specific needs. For details about the operation
of these two kinds of alarm box, please refer to the specified user manual.
14.1 Installing CC11 Alarm Box
14.1.1 Fixing the Alarm Box
The alarm box is wall-mounted and often placed in obvious areas in the control room,
about 1.5 meters from the ground or the raised floor. During the installation, first remove
the panel, determine the installation location, then drill 4 holes on the wall
corresponding to the 4 gourd-like holes in the box according to the sizes as shown in
Figure 14-1. Drive expansion bolts into the holes, and hang the alarm box onto the 4
expansion bolt. Screw down the bolts, so that the alarm box is tightly fastened onto the
wall.
14-1
(1)
440 (2)
(3)
355
(4)
1.5 m
(5)
(6)
(1) Expansion screw (2) Case (3) Door

(4) PVC slot (5) Communication cable, connected to the (6) Power cable
serial port of maintenance terminal
Figure 14-1 Mounting the alarm box onto the wall
14.1.2 Connecting Cables of Alarm Box
The alarm box cables consist of signal cable and power cable.
Lay the power cable and signal cable according to the location of the alarm box and the
site conditions (upward or downward cabling).
I. Signal cable
The signal cable (4-core cable) ends with a standard serial port and can be inserted into
any serial port of the BAM system, including serial ports of individual maintenance
workstations, of the BAM server and of remote maintenance terminal.
In the alarm box, two RS-232 ports P1 and P2 are connected to the serial ports of the
maintenance terminal. Generally, P1 is selected for installation.
14-2
II. Power cable
The power cable of the alarm box provides the alarm box with -48 V power supply.
There are two methods of installing the power cables according to different installation
positions of the alarm box.
Method 1: When the alarm box is very close to the switch, the power cables are
connected to the -48 V busbar available at the side of the rack, as shown in
Figure 14-2.
Blue
Black
(2)
(1)
(1) Power cable of the alarm box (2) Alarm box

Figure 14-2 Connecting power cable of the alarm box to the busbar
Method 2: When the alarm box is far away from the switch, for example, suppose it is
close to the remote maintenance terminal, an independent –48 V power converter must
be provided for the alarm box. The converter will be connected to the common 220 V
AC power and it is provided along with the switch for delivery. Because the power
cables are different in two methods, make sure that the power cables are the right type
before installation.
III. Setting DIP switches of the alarm box
In the alarm box, the two DIP switches S1 and S3 are used to set the working mode.
During on-site installation, S1 and S3 should be set as follows:
14-3
S1-1 S1-2 S3-1 S3-2 S3-3 S3-4 S3-5 S3-7 S3-8

ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
The DIP switches not involved in the table above are in the default status, and need not
be set.
Meanings of the setting of the DIP switches:

z S1-1 and S1-2: To set the type of port
S1-1, S1-2 = OFF: TTL ports J9 and J10 are valid, P1and P2 are invalid.
S1-1, S1-2 = ON: RS232 ports P1 and P2 are valid and are used when connecting to a
PC. This mode should be selected during installation.
z S3-1 and S3-4: To set the Baud rate of communication port
S3-1 = ON: the Baud rate of P1 is 2400 bit/s. S3-4 can be set freely.
S3-1 = OFF, S3-4 = ON: the Baud rate of P1 is 4800 bit/s.
S3-1 = OFF, S3-4 = OFF: the Baud rate of P1 is 19200 bit/s. This mode should be
selected during installation.
z S3-2, S3-3: To set the cascade mode. Cascade mode means to transmit the alarm
information received by one serial port to another. See the following table:
S3-2 S3-3 Cascading mode
OFF OFF J3→J4
ON OFF P2→P1
OFF ON J3 →P1
ON ON P2 →J4
Note:
z "J3→J4” \i means transmitting the alarm information received by serial port J3 to J4.
z During installation, switches S3-2 and S3-3 should be set to OFF.
z S3-5: To determine the display duration (T) of a newly-received alarm. In such

cases, the alarm box always displays this latest information first, and then
switches back to the originally-set display mode.
S3-5 = OFF: T = 30 seconds when set so, and this mode should be selected for the
installation.
S3-5 = ON: T = 3 seconds when set so.
14-4
z S3-7: Decided by different main board type.

S3-7 = OFF: When the main board is CC02ALMM, this mode should be selected for the
installation.
S3-7 = ON: When the main board of the alarm box is CC01ALMM, this mode should be
selected for the installation.
z S3-8: Used for determining whether to choose long alarm tone.
S3-8 = OFF: Long alarm tone will be generated when receiving an alarm and this mode
should be selected for the installation.
S3-8 = ON: The alarm tone will last 10 seconds after receiving an alarm.
Attention:
z The changes of settings will not take effect until the alarm box is reset by pressing
the reset key on the panel or power-on.
z DIP switches S3-4 and S3-7 are quite critical and they determine whether to be able
to interconnect with the host.
14.1.3 Installing the Lock
The lock is used to lock the alarm display mode set by the operation & maintenance
personnel so as to prevent error operations by other people. The lock is provided along
with the alarm box. To install the lock, first unpack it at the site, fix it on the front panel
and then insert its connector into the LOCK socket on the CC01ALMS panel. Make
sure that no wire is visible from any window, once the panel is closed. The way of
installing the lock is shown in Figure 14-3.
14-5
(1)
(3)
(4)
(2)
(5)
(1) Fixing hole for the lock (2) Door (3) Washer
(4) Alarm cable (5) Lock
Figure 14-3 Installing the locking key of the alarm box
After the correct installation, turn on the power if no error is detected.
The normal working status of the alarm box should be:

z In case there is no alarm information, the serial number shall be displayed as zero,
the module number shall be displayed as the set value, and the time shall be
displayed as the current time. Selection of the comprehensive display mode is
recommended here.
z In case there is alarm information, it should be audible and visual.
By now, the alarm box installation is completed.
14.2 Installing the GM12 Alarm Box
14.2.1 Fixing the Alarm Box
The alarm box is wall-mounted and often placed in obvious areas in the control room,
about 1.5 meters from the ground or the raised floor. The exterior of the alarm box is
shown in Figure 14-4. During the installation, drill 4 holes with the diameter of 6 mm on
the wall corresponding to the 4 gourd-like holes in the box according to the sizes as
shown in Figure 14-5, then insert four plastic expansion tubes (Y6 × 26) into the four
holes, and screw four ST4.2 ×25 bolts into the four plastic expansion tubes (not
completely in, but let the screw head exposed out about 6 mm). Finally, hang the alarm
box on the four bolts, and fasten these bolts.
14-6
Figure 14-4 Outside view of the alarm box
Unit: mm
Figure 14-5 Installation dimensions of the alarm box
14.2.2 Connecting Cables of Alarm Box
Cables needed for on-site installation include: signal cable and power cable.
Lay the power cable and signal cable according to the location of the alarm box and the
site conditions (upward or downward cabling).
14-7
I. Signal cable
As shown in Figure 14-6, RS232 serial port is used for communication with BAM, alarm
console, or workstation through RJ45 plug. One end of the RS232 serial port cable is
connected to the J4 (or J5/J6/J7) socket on the GM11ALMM board of the alarm box,
and the other end of the RS232 serial port cable is connected to the serial port of BAM,
alarm console, or workstation.
RS422 serial port is often used for communication with the alarm board of the switch.
One end of the RS422 serial port cable is connected to the JT6 (or JT7/JT8/JT11)
socket on the GM11ALMM board of the alarm box, and the other end of the RS422
serial port cable is connected to the alarm board in the main control frame of the switch.
J4 J5 J6 J7
JT6 JT7 JT8 JT11
Connected to RS422 Connected to RS232
Figure 14-6 Serial port position
Attention:
z When connecting the RS232 and RS422 serial port, please be sure to use the
accessory serial port cable in the alarm box, and DO NOT use other serial port
cable.
z All the serial port cables are plugged into the public connecting slot on the bottom of
the alarm box.
14-8
II. Power cable
The alarm box can support two types of power supply: DC -48 V and AC 110/220 V.
For the alarm box, only one type of power supply is allowed, namely, either the DC -48
V power supply, or the 110/220 V AC power supply is connected to the alarm box.
Attention:
As the DC power supply and AC power supply are controlled by the same switch,
during on-site installation, pay attention to the 2-core plug led out from the power switch
on the side board. When DC power supply is used, the 2-core plug should be
connected to the JT6 of the alarm box power supply board (GM11APWR board), but
when AC power supply is used, the 2-core plug should be connected to the JT9 of the
alarm box power supply board (GM11APWR board).
z DC –48 V power connections

Connect the 4-core plug at one end to the JT3 socket on the alarm box power supply
board (the GM11APWR board), and connect the other end which is split into two plugs
of -48 V and GND to the busbar of the main control cabinet, as shown in Figure 14-7.
(3)
To -48V
(1)
(2)
(1) Bottom panel (2) Power cable wiring slot (3) –48 V power switch
Figure 14-7 Connections inside the alarm box when using DC power cable
14-9
z AC power supply
For the AC power supply, the alarm box can support the 110/220 V power supply. At the
lower right corner of the alarm box there is a 3-phase socket. To connect the AC power
supply, simply use one set of the 3-phase sockets to connect to the power supply.
Connect the power supply cable led by the red AC selection switch below the
transformer, the power supply switch itself, and the input and output of the transformer
respectively to JT2, JT9, JT1, and JT7 of the power supply board, as shown in
Figure 14-8.
JT2
(1)
( 2)
(1) Transformer (2) 220/110 V power input

Figure 14-8 AC power cable connections
Attention:
During connection of the 110/220 AC power, pay attention to a red selection switch
inside the box. Before connecting the power supply cables, set the switch to proper
position. For example, to connect the 220 V power supply, set the switch to the location
of character 230. To connect the 110 V power supply, turn the switch to the location of
character 115. If the switch is set wrongly, the fuse in the board will be blown.
14-10
III. Setting DIP switches of the alarm box
The DIP switches S1 and S2 on the GM11ALMM board control whether the RS232
serial port or the RS422 serial port will be used for communication with the peripheral.
In switch application, the alarm box usually uses the networking mode of connecting
maintenance terminal through the RS232 serial port. So the setting of DIP switches S1
and S2 about the RS232 serial port will be described in this section. Please refer to the
alarm box user manual for the setting of DIP switches S1 and S2 about the RS422
serial port.
The position of DIP switches S1 and S2 is shown in Figure 14-9.
S2 S1
Figure 14-9 The position of DIP switches S1 and S2
When the alarm box is connected to only one RS232 serial port, serial port J5 of the
alarm box will be used and others will be set null. The DIP switch setting is shown in
Figure 14-10.
S2 S1
ON ON
OFF OFF
1 2 3 45 6 78 1 2 3 45 6 78
Figure 14-10 DIP switch setting of the alarm box
14-11
When the alarm box is connected to two RS232 serial ports, serial port J5 and J6 of the
alarm box will be used and others will be set null. The DIP switch setting is shown in
Figure 14-11.
S2 S1
ON ON
OFF OFF
1 2 3 45 6 78 1 2 3 45 6 78
When the alarm box is connected to three RS232 serial ports, serial port J4, J5 and J6
of the alarm box will be used and others will be set null. The DIP switch setting is shown
in Figure 14-12.
S2 S1
ON ON
OFF OFF
1 2 3 45 6 78 1 2 3 45 6 78
Note:
The DIP switch settings above are all intended for Standard English voice alarm. If
Chinese voice alarm is demanded, set S2-6 to OFF.
14.2.3 Setting Sound Volume of the Alarm Box
The sound volume of the alarm box is normally set by the installation personnel
according to user demands. It is usually adjusted through the potentiometers (RP1 &
RP2) on the board. RP1 is used to adjust the volume of the loudspeaker connected to
JT9, and RP2 is used to adjust the volume of the loudspeaker connected to JT10 or
that of a remote sound box. The volume is adjusted in the following ways:
z Turning up the volume
Use a cross screwdriver to adjust RP1 or RP2 counterclockwise, namely, along the
direction from 3 to 1 marked on the potentiometer. By this way, the volume of the alarm
box can be enlarged.
14-12
z Turning down the volume

Use a cross screwdriver to adjust RP1 or RP2 clockwise, namely, along the direction
from 1 to 3 marked on the potentiometer. This way, the volume of the alarm box can be
decreased.
14.2.4 Installing the Lock
If the alarm box lock does not need to be installed on site, the following can be omitted.
The alarm box has a key-lock structure, and a key of the same type can open the locks
on all alarm boxes so that future maintenance and operation by the user is facilitated.
The lock is installed in the following steps:
1) Unscrew the nut and the locking strip behind the lock.
2) Find the position to install the lock on the alarm box as shown in Figure 14-13, and
then place the lock into the alarm box from the front of the lock opening.
3) Install the lock in sequence of dismantling the components.
4) Fasten the nut.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(1) AC power socket (2) Power switch (3) Interface for the remote small sound box
(4) Indicator testing key (5) Lock
Figure 14-13 Side view of the alarm box
By now, the alarm box installation is completed.
14-13
Installation Manual - Volume 1 Chapter 15 Installing Grounding Cable and
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Power Cable
Chapter 15 Installing Grounding Cable and Power

Cable
15.1 Grounding Requirements of C&C08 Switch
To ensure reliable operation of the equipment, the customer shall prepare the following
before installing the switch.
During the installation, the customer is expected to provide three types of grounding
cables: AC GND, distribution frame GND and switch working GND. The ground
resistance values should meet relevant regulations. Normally, the AC GND shall be
made available in the power distribution room during construction of the equipment
building. The customer shall provide the other two types of grounding cables. If only
one grounding cable is provided by the customer, it is taken as the switch working GND.
In that case, the distribution frame GND and AC GND are combined as a single GND.
The power and grounding cables of the equipment shall run along the trough on the top
of the rack. Do not mix them with other signal cables. If the trough is not installed, at
least make sure that the power grounding cables are not bundled together with the
signaling cables.
Note:
The installation engineers are supposed to fill out the Communication Equipment
Installation Report in an earnest manner, design a good grounding scheme and make
the earth resistance record. If the grounding does not comply with the requirements, in
principle, the office deployment should be suspended till all the requirements are met.
15.1.1 DC Power Supply and Grounding Cable Connection
It is recommended that the Huawei-made primary power supply and the DC power
distribution cabinet be adopted in the C&C08 Switch to realize the over-current
protection for DC power of each module and to ensure reliability of the grounding cable
connection. There are two specifications for the DC power distribution cabinet, which
can distribute a maximum of 60 groups of -48 V/GND power cables. The over-current
protection cut off point of each group is 30 A. In addition, the DC power distribution
15-1
cabinet offers 15 PGND connecting terminals. The DC power supply and the grounding
cables are connected in the following way:
z There are two -48 V connecting terminals in the power distribution box of the
cabinet: -48 V1 and -48 V2, which are connected by blue power cable of 25 mm2.
The -48 V1 and -48 V2 connecting terminals are connected to the -48 V1 and -48
V2 input terminals respectively of the DC power distribution cabinet.
z There are five grounding terminals on the switch rack: four ‘GNDs’ and one
‘PGND’, which are short-circuited at the time of delivery.
z 25 mm2 conducting cables are used to connect -48 V1, -48 V2, GND and PGND to
the DC power distribution cabinet.
z It is required that the shell of the background terminal computer be connected to
the working GND of the switch. If the computer is powered by Uninterrupted Power
Supply (UPS), it is required that the UPS shell be also connected to the working
GND. In case that the computer is fed by AC power supply, the AC grounding
cable must be disconnected.
z The lead from the primary power supply to the DC power distribution cabinet and
that from the storage battery to the primary power supply shall not be less than 95
mm2 in cross-sectional area. The cross-sectional area required for the lead in an
actual project can be calculated from the power consumption and the distance of
the switch from the power points.
15.1.2 Grounding of AC Power Distribution System
z The AC power distribution system requires that the customer shall provide a
separate AC safety GND and the PGND offered by the AC power supply network
be disconnected.
z The use of lightning arrester device can prevent signal interference from the AC
power supply network and ensure the normal operation of the AC power
distribution system, as shown in Figure 15-1.
live wire -48V

AC power distribution system
power lightening protection
Primary device DDF

zero wire BGND
Shell
Terminal
Chassis
Figure 15-1 Diagram of AC distribution system GND
15-2
z For the offices where the power supply network is not stable or AC voltage
stabilizer is not equipped, the fluctuations of over-voltage and under-voltage of the
power supply network will cause damage to the terminal equipment. It is, therefore,
suggested that power to the terminal equipment be supplied by an inverter as
Inverter
Terminal
Power
Live Wire -48 V

Primary
Primary Device
220 VAC BGND DDF
Power GND PGND
Zero Wire
Figure 15-2 Diagram of grounding with inverter power
15.2 Installing Power Cable
Primary power cables include -48 V cable (Blue), grounding cable (Black) and
protective grounding cable (Yellow).
Huawei supplies the primary power busbar (running from the power supply room to the
DC power distribution cabinet or distribution box) along with the switch. The cable color
is Black. The cable diameter shall be calculated according to the actual capacity.
15.2.1 Details of Connecting Terminals of Power Distribution Box
The primary power connecting terminals of the power distribution box are as shown in
Figure 15-3. These are one -48 V1, one -48 V2, four GNDs and one PGND connecting
terminals in the power distribution box, where the four GNDs and the PGND have
already been short-circuited.
-48V1 -48V2 GND GND GND GND PGND
Figure 15-3 Rear view of the primary power connecting terminals
15-3
15.2.2 Connecting Power Cable
The primary power is led from the connecting terminals of the cabinet distribution box to
the busbars on both sides of the cabinet, then led to the backplanes of the power
supply frame by power cable, as shown in Figure 15-4.
Left bus bar
Backplane 1
Backplane 6
Backplane 2
Input
Distribution box
Right bus bar
Figure 15-4 Diagram of power distribution
I. Connection between DC Power Distribution Cabinet/Distribution Box and

the Switch
The connections between the DC power distribution cabinet/distribution box and the
switch are shown in Figure 15-5.
DC High
-48V1
-48V2
PGND
-48V2
PGND
-48V2
PGND
-48V1
-48V1
Resistance Cabinet
GND
GND
GND
or Distribution Box
-48V2
-48V1
To DC
switchboard GND Assembled Assembled Assembled
Cabinet Cabinet Cabinet
PGND
Protection Grounding Bar of Equipment Room
Figure 15-5 Illustration of the primary power cable connection
Power cable connection:

z Connection between the high-impedance DC cabinet (or power distribution box)
and the DC switchboard
The PGND terminal of the high-impedance DC cabinet (or power distribution box) must
be connected reliably with the PGND cable using the two-color (Yellow & Green) plastic
15-4
insulated copper core wire (cable), whose diameter is identical with that of the power
busbar.
The -48 V1 and -48 V2 terminals of the high-impedance DC cabinet (or power
distribution box) must be connected securely with the -48 V DC Negative busbar of the
active/standby DC switchboard (or active/standby DC power supply). The GND
terminal of the high-impedance DC cabinet (or power distribution box) must be
connected securely with -48 V DC Positive busbar of the active/standby DC
switchboard (or active/standby DC power supply). When there is only one power supply
equipment, both the -48 V1 and -48 V2 terminals of the high-impedance DC cabinet (or
power distribution box) are connected to the -48 V DC Negative busbar of the DC
switchboard (or DC power supply).
When no high-impedance DC cabinet or power distribution box is available, the PGND

connecting terminal of each cabinet must be connected directly and securely to a
nearby PGND terminal. The two-color (Yellow & Green) plastic insulated copper core
wire identical in diameter with the power cable shall be employed as a protective
grounding wire. The outgoing power cables from -48V1 (-48V2) are connected directly
to the -48V DC Negative bus bar and the GND terminal of each cabinet is connected to
-48V DC Positive bus bar of the DC distribution screen (or DC power supply).
z Connection between the high-impedance DC cabinet (or power distribution box)
and the cabinet
Connect one end of the Blue cable (25 mm²) to the connecting terminal of the power
distribution box of the cabinet marked with "-48 V1" and "-48 V2" and the other end of
the cable to the "-48 V1" and "-48 V2" terminals of the high-impedance DC cabinet (or
power distribution box).
Connect one end of the Black cable (25 mm²) to the connecting terminal of the power
distribution box of the cabinet marked with "GND" (and also to the second GND
terminal if it is power distribution Scheme B of assembled cabinet) and the other end of
the cable to the "GND" terminal of the high-impedance DC cabinet (or power
distribution box).
Connect one end of the Yellow cable (25 mm²) to the connecting terminal of the power
distribution box of the cabinet marked with "PGND" and the other end to the "PGND"
terminal of the high-impedance DC cabinet (or power distribution box).
z Intra-module cascade connection
The GND connecting terminals of intra-modular cabinets are interconnected with ‘short
cables, as shown in Figure 15-5. Busbars of two cabinets must be shorted at the
connecting point "GND**". The fixed wiring position for the GND connecting terminals
of the power distribution box is as shown in Figure 15-6.
15-5
-48V Positiv e Pow er Line, connecting to GND of DC High-resistance

Cabinet/Distribution Box
Inter-cabinet GND Interconnecting Line Inter-cabinet GND Interconnecting Line

connecting to the Left cabinet connecting to the Right Cabinet
-48V1 -48V2 PGND

GND
Figure 15-6 The fixed wiring position for the GND connecting terminal of the
distribution box in assembled cabinet
z Notes on power cable connection

1) When fastening a cable lug, use flat washers and spring washers to make proper
& robust connection and to avoid loose contact, as illustrated in Figure 15-7.
(1) Cable (2) Heat-shrink tube (3) Nut

(4) Spring washer (5) Flat washer (6) Wiring bolts
Figure 15-7 Diagram of line nose connection
2) Cord end terminals are made at one end of the power cables and grounding
cables, as shown in Figure 15-8, and the cable lugs are made at the other end on
site. When making cable lugs at the ends of power cables and grounding cables,
first press the cable lug tightly and put it into heat-shrink tube. The bare wires and
cable lug handle should not be exposed to avoid any short circuit. Use the
Huawei-made labels to mark the cable.
15-6
Figure 15-8 Illustration of cord end terminal
3) While installing cable lugs, if two or more power cables are to be installed at one
wiring post (terminal), the cable lugs should not overlap. Cross-installation mode
or back-to-back installation mode should be adopted. If overlap is unavoidable, the
cable lugs should be aligned at 45°or 90°. The larger cable lug should be
positioned at the bottom and the smaller cable lug should be placed above it. This
applies to all places where more than one cable lug is to be installed, as shown in
Figure 15-9.
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
(3) (3)
(4) (5)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(6)
(1) Flat washer (2) Nut (3) Spring washer

(4) Aligned at 45°or 90° (5) Back-to-back Installation (6) Cross Installation
Figure 15-9 Schematic diagram of fastening two cable lugs
II. Connection between the busbar and the backplane
The power cables needed for the connection between the busbar and the backplane
are -48 V cable, PGND cable and +5 V GND cable. The connector required for -48 V
15-7
power cable is of the 4PIN type, the PGND connector is of the 3PIN type and the +5 V
GND connector of the 2PIN type.
The PGND and +5 V GND connections are shown in Figure 15-9 and Figure 15-10
respectively. The connection between the busbar, power cable and backplane is shown
in Figure 15-10.
Lable 1
Figure 15-10 Schematic diagram of PGND power cable
(2 ) (5 )
(1 ) (3 ) (4 )
(6 )
(7)
(8 )
(1) Terminal 2 (2) Label 1 (3) Plug-in unit shell (4) Busbar connector cap
(5) Label 2 (6) Busbar connector (7) Wire w1 (black) (8) Wire w2 (black)
Figure 15-11 Schematic diagram of +5 V GND cable
15-8
me
fra
u nk
l tr
i ta
di g
m
Fro
three rows of pins idle

three rows of pins idle
Figure 15-12 Schematic diagram of the connection between busbar, power cable and
backplane
III. Grounding cable interconnection between busbars
The grounding terminals on the busbars of adjacent cabinets of the same module shall
be interconnected with short cables. One end of these cables has already been
connected to the busbar of the cabinet before delivery. During on-site installation, it is
only necessary to connect the other end of the short cables to the busbar of the
adjacent cabinet. The installation diagram is shown in Figure 15-13.
15-9
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 2
Figure 15-13 Diagram of the interconnection of busbar grounding cables between

adjacent cabinets
15.2.3 Labels of Power Cables
Power cables are stuck with Huawei-made labels, which are pasted 20 mm away from
the cable lugs of both ends, as shown in Figure 15-14. Refer to Appendix A for the
details of the label.
(1) Space not more than 1 mm (2) Power supply (3) Wrapped with
cable adhesive tape
(4) Bare wire head should be wrapped with the cap
Figure 15-14 Schematic diagram of pasting power cable label
15-10
15.2.4 Laying Power Cables
The power cables shall be laid by the following principles:

z Power cables and grounding cables should be isolated from other cables. Inside
the racks, they should be bound separately. Outside the racks, along the cabling
trough or trench, they should be bound separately.
z Power cables and grounding cables should be laid from the top of the rack and
bound to the holes of the rodent-proof net at an interval of 200 mm.
z Cable ties of suitable lengths (150 mm/300 mm) are to be selected according to
the number of the cables to be bundled together and the cable tie tails should be
cut neatly.
z The cables are distributed evenly from the upper and lower sides of the cabinet
and laid along the troughs. Cables of different colors should be properly arranged
and bound into bundles (each bundle occupying a third of the trough width).
z When there are holes in the fixing plate and side plate, place three power cables in
each grid, and bundle the cables onto the frames, as shown in Figure 15-15 and
Figure 15-16.
z When power cables and grounding cables are connected to the terminals in the
rack, they run through the elliptical or rectangular holes of the cabling trough. The
cables should be laid straight and the turning points should be smoothly curved.
Before laying power cables and grounding cables, you need measure the distance
between the busbar & the power distribution box as well as that between the power
distribution box & the connecting terminals of the cabinet precisely. Enough cable
length should be marked and cut, allowing a provision for proper formation (at bends,
for example). If the cables are not sufficiently long, stop laying the cables and replace
them with new cables of suitable length. It is prohibited to join the cables by using
connectors or by soldering. Refer to Figure 15-17.
15-11
(1) Cabling trough (2) Power cable (3) Cable tie

Figure 15-15 View of power cables bundled on the top of cabinet (assembled cabinet)
(5 )
(4 )
(3 )
(2 )
(1 )
(6 )
(7 )
(1) Cabinet 1 (2) Cabinet 2 (3) Cabinet 3 (4) Cabinet 4

(5) Distance 400 (6) Power cable connected to DC power (7) Cabling trough
mm distribution cabinet or distribution box
Figure 15-16 Diagram of power cables bound onto the side plate
15-12
(1 ) (2 )
(3 ) (3 )
(4 )
(5 ) (5 )
(1) Connecting cables by soldering is (2) A new cable with enough length
prohibited
(3) To the switch (4) Soldering joint (not permitted)
(5) Grounding copper bar or power copper bar
Figure 15-17 Diagram of extension of power cable and grounding cable
15.3 Installing Power Distribution Box
Compared with the dc distribution cabinet, the power distribution box is much smaller
and it is easier to install it. In some cases (for example, fewer cabinets), you can use a
power distribution box to replace the dc distribution cabinet. When using a power
distribution box, connect power cables and grounding cables in the same way as you
do in the case of the dc distribution cabinet.
15.3.1 Installing the power distribution box
You can mount the power distribution box on the wall or fix it under the ESD protection
floor. The installation position is generally specified in the engineering design. Or you
can discuss it with the customer according to actual situations.
Take the following procedures to install the power distribution box.

1) Positioning and drilling holes
2) Installing the base
3) Fixing the power distribution box
The following text details the installation procedures.
4) Positioning and drilling holes
Draw lines on the wall or the floor according to the sizes of the installation holes of the
base of the power distribution box. Drill holes with a φ16 percussion drill. Figure 15-18
shows the sizes of the installation holes. The depth of the hole should be within the
range of 52 mm to 60 mm. The depth of all holes should be the same. Clean the hole
before measuring the net-depth. To drill a hole, use a vacuum cleaner to clean the dust.
15-13
Caution:
Since all bolts delivered with the equipment are of the push-type, the depth of the holes
should be proper. Deeper holes cause fastening failure due to the distance between
the bolt and expansion nut. Shallower holes also cause fastening failure due to the
distance between the bolt and bottom.
5) Installing expansion tube and expansion nut

Take down the expansion tube and expansion nut and put them into the hole vertically
(the guide rib on the expansion nut has to be inserted into the guide trough of the
expansion tube in advance). Punch the expansion tube with a rubber mallet until it is
completely driven into the ground. Figure 15-19 shows the installation of expansion
tube and expansion nut.
Caution:
Keep the upper surface of the expansion tube under the ground. Otherwise, the base of
the power distribution box cannot be reliably fixed.
(1) Edge line of the power distribution

box
Figure 15-18 Hole positions for the installation of the base of the power distribution box
15-14
(1) Expansion tube (2) Guide trough of expansion tube

(3) Expansion nut (4) Guide rib of expansion nut
Figure 15-19 Installation of expansion tube and expansion nut
6) Installing the base

Open the cover of the power distribution box and loose the four hex bolts (unnecessary
to loose them completely). Slide the case relative to its base. Remove the base, then fix
it with M12×60 push-type expansion bolts, as shown in Figure 15-20.
Place spring washers and flat washers into expansion bolts. Then put expansion bolts
into the nuts under the ground across the base. Finally, fasten the nuts to 45 nm.
(1) Push-type expansion bolt (2) Base (3) Hex bolt M8

M12×60
(4) Appearance after installation (5) Flat washer 12 (6) Spring washer 12
Figure 15-20 Installation of the base of the power distribution box
15-15
7) Fixing the power distribution box

Connect the case to the base and screw up the four hex bolts on the base. After the
installation, make sure that the power distribution box is installed firmly.
15.3.2 Connecting power cables
Figure 15-21 shows the internal structure of the power distribution box.
The power distribution box has two inputs of -48 V, ten outputs of -48 V, and five input
wiring terminals, which are -48 V1, -48 V2, GND1, GND2, and PGND respectively.
Connection of power cables of the power distribution box is basically the same as that
of the dc distribution cabinet. Therefore it is not described in detail here.
Figure 15-21 Structure of the power distribution box
15.3.3 Pasting labels
Because power cables might run out of the distribution box from the top or the bottom,
paste labels in accordance with actual situations.
1) When power cables run out of the distribution box from the top, paste labels in the
way as shown in Figure 15-22. First paste the product label of the power
distribution box on the square silkscreen marked on the cover. Then paste the
triangular heavy-current label on the circular silkscreen. Keep the arrow in the
heavy-current label downward. Take care not to leave wrinkles on labels when
pasting.
15-16
Figure 15-22 Power cables running out of the distribution box from the top
2) When power cables run out of the distribution box from the bottom, paste labels in
the way as shown in Figure 15-23. First paste the product label of the power
distribution box on the square silkscreen marked on the cover. Then paste the
triangular heavy-current label on the circular silkscreen. Keep the arrow in the
heavy-current label downward. Take care not to leave wrinkles on labels when
pasting.
Figure 15-23 Power cables running out of the distribution box from the bottom
15-17
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 16 Hardware Installation Check
Chapter 16 Hardware Installation Check
Upon the completion of the hardware installation, the installation work should be
checked so as to ensure the successful software installation and system debugging.
The check consists of the following three parts: overall check, power supply check and
board power-on check.
16.1 Overall Check
This covers the entire installation process, including the cabinets, cables, connectors,
labels and the site environment.
I. Checking the cabinet
The following items should be checked and ensured:

1) After the cabinets are connected, they should have been neatly aligned and firmly
fixed. Cabinets in the same row should be at the same level.
2) Vertical deviation of the cabinets should not be more than 3 mm.
3) Four plates of the rack should be installed and aligned in a straight line with a
deviation of less than 5 mm. Adjacent cabinets should be closely connected. A row
of cabinets should be positioned in a straight line.
4) All bolts should be screwed down and be added with flat washers and spring
washers.
5) All components and cables of each rack should not be broken. The labels attached
should be marked correctly, clearly and completely.
6) After the installation, the racks should be cleaned thoroughly to remove finger
prints, metal particles (scrapings) and dust (including that in the inaccessible
corners).
7) The small covers of the cabling outlets both at the top and bottom of the rack
should be pushed forward to close these holes, so as to prevent rodents from
entering.
II. Checking the cables
1) Power cables and grounding cables

This includes the inspection of all the power cables and grounding cables led from the
primary power supply (the power distribution frame) to the power distribution box at the
back of the cabinet, then to the busbar and finally to the sockets at the backplanes. It is
to be ensured that all the power cables and grounding cables are firmly connected, with
the correct polarities and making good contacts.
16-1
2) Cables in the modules, such as HW cable, NOD cable and clock cable
a. Check if the cables are correctly and tightly connected.
b. Check if the cable ties are in the correct positions and evenly spaced.
c. Check if the cable ties are not overlapping and have no spinous tails.
3) Trunk cables, optical fibers and loading cables
a. Check if the cables are wound smoothly at the turning points.
b. Check if the distribution route is consistent with the related specifications and the
cable ties are spaced evenly.
c. Check if the cables are laid in a proper and planned manner in the troughs and tied
neatly; if there is no twisting of cables inside the rack and external cables are bundled
by cabinet.
d. Check if the cables in the cabling troughs and on the cabling ladders are arranged in
a neat manner and if all cables are properly bundled with no damage to the sheath.
e. Check if sufficient cable length is left as margin for future expansion and cable ties
are cut neatly without overlapping.
III. Checking the connectors, sockets and locks
1) Connector
The locks of all cable connectors should be fastened and the coaxial cable connectors
should be screwed tightly.
2) Socket
This covers the coaxial sockets of trunk frame, ET16 trunk cable sockets, network
cable sockets and the sockets on all the backplanes. Lack of pins or any short circuits
caused by bent pins are to be inspected and rectified.
3) Lock
Various backplanes (for example, MSB and MCB) are provided with locks in the
sockets to protect against any loose connection. Proper fastening of the locks is to be
checked and confirmed.
IV. Checking the labels
Inspection is to be carried out that the labels are clean, tidy and the markings are
correct & clearly visible. Check should be done that the labels are pasted at the proper
positions.
V. Checking the site environment
1) Rack
16-2
Ensure that there are no sundries inside the cabinet and there are no finger prints or
smears on the front/back door and side plates of the cabinet.
2) Cabling trough
In the cabling troughs, around the cabinets and under the raised floor, there should be
no dust or any metal scraps.
3) Equipment room
Make sure that there are no unwanted things cluttering in the equipment room and the
required useful things are kept tidily. The operation console and the raised floor are to
be always kept neat and clean.
After finishing the hardware installation check, conduct the following power-on checks.
16.2 Power Supply Check

1) Switch off the primary power supply and use a multimeter (set to ohm range) to
check whether there are short circuits between the power supplies (S-48 V, 1B-48
V, 2B-48 V and 3B-48 V) on the busbar and between these power supplies and the
ground.
2) Switch on the primary power supply after confirming that all the switches of the
power distribution box on the top of the cabinet are set to OFF. Then using the
multimeter, confirm whether the output voltage of the primary power supply (in the
no-load state) is within the allowable range (-43.2 V~-55.2 V DC). At this time, the
red indicator "WARN" on the power distribution box is flashing. Turn on the
ALARM switch, and the buzzer will give an audible alarm.
3) Turn on all the switches (1B-48 V, 2B-48 V, 3B-48 V and S-48 V) of the power
distribution box after making sure that no board is inserted into the corresponding
slot of the backplane. At this time, there should be no power alarm and audible
alarm and the red indicator "WARN" should be OFF.
4) Check if the -48 V power supply input is available in each frame, and the voltages
are within the specified range. If everything is OK up to this point, it indicates that
the primary power supply is OK.
Power-on test can be carried out after this check.
16.3 Power-on Test of Boards
Note:
The working status of the boards after power on can be ascertained from the indicator
status on the front panel. For the meanings of these board indicators, please refer to
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Board Manual.
16-3
1) Insert the secondary power boards like PWX, PWC and PWS into the
corresponding slots. Turn the "ALARM" switch upward. Then, turn on the
secondary power supply and observe whether the indicators on the power boards
are normal. At this time, there should be no power alarm and the buzzer should not
give out any audio alarm.
2) Insert the other secondary power boards one by one and repeat step 1. If
everything is OK, the power supply test is over.
3) Switch off the secondary power supply and insert all the other boards into the
corresponding slots. Then turn on the power supply and observe whether the
indicators of all the boards are normal.
4) Repeat step 3 and check the boards of each module. If there is any failure in any
board, the power should be turned off immediately, and the faulty board should be
pulled out. After making sure that all the boards are working normally, proceed
with the next operation.
16-4
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Appendix A Labels for Cables
Appendix A Labels for Cables
Engineering labels are pasted to both ends of the cables to identify the physical
positions of the cables on different devices. Cable labels facilitate correct and orderly
connection of the cables and easy maintenance after the installation.
There are two types of engineering labels, specialized for power cables and signal
cables respectively. The power cables include the AC power cables and DC power
cables (excluding the power cables that connect the power distribution box and the
cabinet). The signal cables include external cables of alarm box, Ethernet cables,
optical fibers, trunk cables and subscriber cables (excluding the antenna feeders).
Note:
In case that there is special requirement from the customer on the description method
of the labels, the labels should be printed accordingly. However, this must be stated in
the self-check report.
A.1 Introduction to Labels

A.1.1 Material
z Material: Polyester (PET), with UL and CSA certifications

z Color: chalk white
z Thickness: 0.09 mm
z Ambient temperature: -29~149 degrees Celsius
z Laser printing or handwriting with oiliness markers
A.1.2 Type and Shape
There are two types of engineering labels for power cables and signal cables
respectively.
I. Label for signal cables
The label for signal cables is L-shaped with fixed dimensions, as shown in Figure A-1
(expressed in mm).
A-1
84.0
7.5
7.0
5.5
5.5
11.0 10.0
11.0 TO:
(2)
1.5
(2)
(1)
0.6
5.5
5.5 1.0
(1)
7.0
7.5
37.0
2.0
(1) Dividing line (2) Cut dotted line

Figure A-1 Label for signal cables
The dividing lines on the label help to specify more clearly the position of a cable. For
example, there is a dividing line between the cabinet number and the frame number
and another line between the frame number and the slot number. The dividing line is
1.5 mm×0.6 mm in size with the color of PONTONE 656c (light blue).
The cut dotted line helps to fold the label when pasting it on the cable, and its size is 1.0
mm×2.0 mm.
There is a mark “TO:” (upside down in the figure) at the lower right corner of the label.
The mark is used to identify the opposite end of the cable on which the label is pasted.
II. Label for power cables
The label for power cables should be attached to the identification plate on the cable
ties that are bundled to the cable. The identification plate has an embossment of 0.2
mm×0.6 mm around (symmetric on both sides), and the area in the middle is for pasting
the label, as shown in Figure A-2 (expressed in mm).
A-2
10
26.2 R1.0
TO:
12.2 11
(2) 25
0.6
(1) 1.5
100
0.6
(3)
(1) Cable tie (2) Label (3) Dividing line on the label
Figure A-2 Label for power cables
A.1.3 Printing Labels
The contents can be printed or written on the labels. Printing is recommended for the
sake of high efficiency and eye-pleasant layout.
I. Template for the printing
The Word-form template is available for label printout. You can download the template
from http://tech-support.huawei.com/asp/comm/index.asp (path://support/technical
document/project management/installation and maintenance/document/others), or get
the template from Huawei local office.
When using the template, you can directly modify the contents on the template, and the
following should be observed:
z The settings of centered characters, direction, and fonts should not be changed.
z When there are too many characters to be filled in, zoom out the characters, but
make sure the printouts are clear and legible.
II. Cells merging on the template
To merge the cells, you should first recover the table structure (if gridlines are displayed,
you can start from Step 3 directly).
1) Select the menu item [Edit/Select All].
2) Select the menu item [Format/Borders and Shading/Borders]. Select "Box" and
click <OK>.
3) Drag the mouse to select the cells to be merged and select the menu item
[Table/Merge Cells].
A-3
If two merged cells are still not enough to accommodate the characters, use multiple
lines.
III. Requirements on the printer
To print the labels, laser jet printer must be used, but there is no restriction on the model
of the printer. Before printing the label, set up the page and try the printing on ordinary
blank paper (both sides are blank).
1) Cover the blank paper onto the whole page of label paper, and check whether the
page setup conforms to the requirement.
2) Make sure the printer properties, such as "paper size" and “direction”, have been
set correctly.
3) If the warning prompt as shown in Figure A-3 appears before printing, click
<Ignore> to continue the printing.
Figure A-3 Warning prompt before printing
If the printout confoms to the requiremnt, print it on label paper; if not, adjust the page
setup and try the printing again, until the correct printout is produced. The method of
adjusting the page setup is as follows:
1) Select the menu item [File/Page Setup].
2) Select the "Margins" tab page.
3) Select "Left" for "Gutter Position".
4) Set "Header" and "Footer" to 0, and adjust the values of "Top", "Bottom", "Left",
and "Right".
After the page setup has been made correct, save it for future use. This page setup is
only necessary in the first time you use the template to print the labels.
IV. Requirements on feeding the printer
Different from the ordinary paper, the label paper is composed of two pages. No matter
what model of printer you are using, feed in the labels one after another by hand. Never
use the auto-feed mode in order to avoid jamming the labels. Different models of
printers may have different feeding modes, make sure to feed in the labels correctly.
V. Requirements on the printed label
Make sure the printed label meet the following requirements:

z All the printouts must be on the label, and nothing should be printed on the bottom
page of the label.
A-4
z Contents in the cells should be aligned in the center. In a single-line printout, the
dividing lines and the mark “TO” should not be covered by the printed characters.
z When the cells are merged and the printouts are made in multiple lines, avoid
covering the mark “TO” when printing the texts by using the space bar to move the
printing contents to the next line.
A.1.4 Writing Labels
Use the black oiliness markers delivered together with the device to write the labels.
In special cases, black ball-pens are allowed, although not recommended. When
writing with the ball-pen, take care not to leave the oil on the label, which may
contaminate the label and blur the words.
Note:
The delivered marker has two nibs. Make sure to use the smaller nib to write the labels.
For the sake of easy recognition and good looking, the font in handwriting should be
close to the standard typeface as much as possible. Table A-1 shows the standard
typeface.
Table A-1 Standard typeface for handwriting
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 A B C D E F G H
I J K L M N O P Q
R S T U V W X Y Z
Write the characters in proper size, and the direction is as shown in Figure A-4:
TO:
Figure A-4 Writing direction of the label
A.1.5 Pasting Labels
After printing or writing the label, remove the label from the bottom page and paste it to
the signal cable, or the identification plate of the power cable.
A-5
I. Pasting the label to the signal cable
The steps to paste the label to the cable are shown in Figure A-5, Figure A-6 and Figure
A-7. The finished labels should be on the right or top of the cables, according to
different cabling methods. The left part of the figures shows the method to paste the
label when the cable is laid vertically, while the right part of the figures shows the
method to paste the label when the cable is laid horizontally.
The label is pasted 2 cm away from the connector on the signal cable. In special cases,
for example, to avoid cable bent or affecting other cables, other positions are also
allowed to paste the labels.
1) Stick the label to the proper position on the cable, and fold the narrow part of the
label according to the directions shown in Figure A-5.
Cable
Stick side Fold down
Fold to right Cable
Stick side
Figure A-5 Sticking the label onto proper position on the signal cable
The length of the narrow part is based on an external cable diameter of 2.6 mm. After
this part has been stuck to the back of the label, it may not overlap the entire printed
part.
2) Fold the printed part along the dotted line according to the directions shown in
Figure A-6.
A-6
Cable Cable
Stick side
Stick side
Fold up
Fold to right
Figure A-6 Folding up the label
3) After the printed part of the label has been folded up, the narrow part of the label
should be covered completely, as shown in Figure A-7.
Cable
Cable
TO:
A03 33 33 33 33
TO:
A03 33 33 33 33
Figure A-7 Appearance of labels pasted on signal cables
II. Pasting the label to the power cable
Remove the label from the bottom page, then paste it to the identification plate on the
cable tie. The label should be stuck to the rectangular flute, and should be stuck to only
one side of the identification plate. Make sure to paste the labels on the same side of
the identification plates. The cable ties are bundled at 2 cm away from the connectors,
and other positions are allowed in special circumstances.
Cable ties should be bundled on both ends of a cable. After the bundling, the finished
identification plate should be on top of the cable in horizontal cabling, or on the right
side of the cable in vertical cabling. Make sure the label is facing out, as shown in
Figure A-8.
A-7
Cable
TO：
B03
TO:
B03 -48V2
-48V2
Cable
Figure A-8 Appearance of labels pasted on power cables
A.1.6 Information on Labels
I. For power cables
Labels for power cables are only pasted on one side of the identification plates. On the
labels, there is information (the part after the mark “TO:”) about the location of the
device on the other end of the cable, like the location of control cabinet, power
distribution box or power socket.
II. For signal cables
The two sides of the label pasted on the signal cable carry the information about the
location of the ports connected to both ends of the cable, as shown in Figure A-9.
The information is given as follows:
z Area 1 contains the location information of local end of the cable.
z Area 2 (with the mark "TO:") contains the location information of the opposite end
of the cable.
z Area 3 has been folded up inside the label.
Area 1 Area 3
Area 2 TO:
Figure A-9 Printed parts on the label for signal cables
Seen from the cabling end of the equipment, the text part of the label is on the right side
of the cable. The side with “TO:” that is facing outside carries the location information of
the opposite end; and the other side carries the location information of the local end.
Therefore, the information in Area 1 at one end is the same as the information in Area 2
A-8
at the other end of the cable, and it is the same case conversely. In other words, the
local information at one end is called the opposite information for the other end.
A.1.7 Remarks
z When printing/writing and pasting labels, pay attention to keep the labels clean.
z Since the label paper is made of moistureproof and waterproof material, ink-jet
printers and ink pens are forbidden for printing and writing labels.
z Labels should be pasted with good order in alignment.
z Cable ties should be bundled in the same position of power cables, with
identification plates on the same side.
z The positions of “up”, “down”, “right” or “left” are all based on the viewpoint of the
engineering personnel who is working on the label.
A.2 Labels for External Cables of Alarm Box

The external cables of alarm box are connected with the first subscriber cabinet of each
row (used for power distribution). Labels pasted on the first cabinet of each row should
indicate which equipment is using the access terminal. Labels are not needed on the
equipment side unless there is special requirement. In this case, only Area 2 of the
label should be filled in.
Table A-2 shows the information on the labels of alarm box external cables.
Table A-2 Information on labels pasted to the external cables of alarm box
Content Meaning Example

M: The cabinet rows from front to back are
numbered from A to Z.
MN: serial number of
N:The cabinet columns from left to right are
MN the cabinet in the
numbered from 01 to 99.
switch room
For example, A01 is the cabinet in Row A and
Column 01.
Note:
Generally, the above numbering method is enough to identify the position of a specific
cabinet. If cabinets are installed in a back-to-back manner, the facing direction of the
cabinet must be specified, and the numbering method like MNO is used. Here, “O”
means the direction of the cabinet, which can be “A” or “B”. On the cable labels
described below, this numbering method is used, unless otherwise stated.
A-9
The label on the alarm cable carries simple information, and only part of the text area
needs to be filled in. It is recommended to keep the whole length of the label instead of
cutting out the blank area.
Figure A-10 shows a label on the alarm cable, on which “A01” indicates that the alarm
cable is connected from the first cabinet to the cabinet on Row A, Column 01 in the
switch room.
Figure A-10 Example of the label on the alarm cable
A.3 Labels for Ethernet Cables

These labels are pasted to the Ethernet cables that connect the boards in the frames,
or on the cables that connect HUBs and servers or agents of the Value Added Service
(VAS) products.
I. Meaning of the label
Table A-3 shows the information on both sides of the labels pasted to the Ethernet
cables that connect the boards in the frames.
Table A-3 Information on labels pasted to the Ethernet cables

MN: cabinet
For example, A01
number
Numbered in top-down order with two digits, for

B: frame number
example, 01
MN-B-C-D
Numbered in top-down and left-right order with
C: slot number
two digits, for example, 01
D: Ethernet port Numbered in top-down and left-right order with

number two digits, for example, 01
MN: cabinet
For example, B02
number
Valid location number of the terminal device

onsite. If the cable is connected to a router in a
MN-Z cabinet, the serial numbers of the cabinet, the
Z: location frame and the Ethernet interface of the router
number should be specified, for example, B02-03-12. If the
cable is connected to the Network Management
Station (NMS), specific location of the NMS should
be given.
A-10
In VAS products, the information provided on the labels is different, subject to different
devices that the Ethernet cables are connecting.
z Labels for the Ethernet cable that connects the HUB and the server
1) The label on the HUB end should indicate the number of the frame and cabinet
where the HUB locates, and the serial number on the HUB.
2) The label on the server end should indicate the number of the frame and cabinet
where the server locates. In case that it is a stand-alone server, specific position of
the server should be provided.
z Labels for the Ethernet cable that connects the HUB and the agent
1) The label on the agent end should contain the serial number of the Ethernet port.
The definitions of the cabinet number and frame number are the same as those
described in Table A-3 above.
2) If it is a stand-alone HUB without any cabinet or frame, the label should contain
specific location information that identifies the HUB.
3) The serial number on the HUB, the network port number of the agent and the
location of stand-alone server should be specified according to actual connection.
II. Example of the Label
Figure A-11 shows the label on the Etherent cable.
Figure A-11 Example of the label on the Ethernet cable
“A01-03-10-05” indicates that the local end of the Ethernet cable is connected with
Ethernet Port 05, Slot 10, Frame 03 of the cabinet on Row A, Column 01 in the switch
room.
“B02-03-12” indicates that the opposite end of the Ethernet cable is connected with
Ethernet Port 12, Frame 03 of the cabinet on Row B, Column 02 in the switch room.
A.4 Labels for Optical Fibers

These labels are pasted to the optical fibers that connect the optical interfaces on the
boards in a frame, or on the devices. There are two types of labels for optical fibers: one
is for the fiber that connects the optical interfaces of two devices, the other is for the
fiber that connects one device and the Optical Distribution Frame (ODF).
A-11
A.4.1 Labels for the Fiber that Connects Two Devices
Table A-4 shows the information on both sides of the labels pasted to the optical fiber
that connects two devices.
Table A-4 Information on labels pasted to the fiber between two devices

MN: cabinet number For example, A01
Numbered in top-down order with two

B: frame number
digits, for example, 01
Numbered in top-down and left-right

C: slot number
order with two digits, for example, 01
MN-B-C-D-R/
T D: optical interface Numbered in top-down and left-right
number order with two digits, for example, 05
R: optical receiving
interface
T: optical transmitting
interface
MN: cabinet number

The meanings are the same as above.
B: frame number When the local device and the opposite
C: slot number end device are not in the same switch
room, MN can be the name of the
MN-B-C-D-R/ D: optical interface switch room.
T number
interface
interface
II. Example of the label
Figure A-12 shows the label on the optical fiber between two devices.
Figure A-12 Example of the label on the optical fiber between two devices
A-12
“A01-01-05-05-R” indicates that the local end of the optical fiber is connected with
Optical Receiving Interface 05 on Slot 5, Frame 01 in the cabinet on Row A, Column 01
in the switch room.
“G01-01-01-01-T” indicates that the opposite end of the optical fiber is connected with
Optical Transmitting Interface 01 on Slot 01, Frame 01 in the cabinet on Row G,
Column 01 in the switch room
A.4.2 Labels for the Fiber that Connects a Device and the ODF
Table A-5 shows the information on both sides of the labels pasted to the optical fiber
that connects a device and the ODF.
Table A-5 Information on labels pasted to the fiber between a device and the ODF

Numbered in bottom-up order with two
B: frame number
C: slot number
order with two digits, for example, 01.
MN-B-C-D-R/T
D: optical interface Numbered in top-down and left-right
number order with two digits, for example, 05
interface
interface
MN: row number and Numbered in the same rule as that of
column number of the cabinets, for example, G01 is the
ODF ODF of Row G and Column 01
B: row number of the

terminal device Ranging from 01 to 99, for example,
ODF-MN-B-C-R/ 01-01
T C: column number of
the terminal device
interface
interface
Figure A-13 shows the label on the optical fiber between a device and the ODF.
A-13
Figure A-13 Example of the label on the optical fiber between a device and the ODF
“ODF-G01-01-01-R” indicates that the local end of the optical fiber is connected with
the optical receiving terminal on Row 01, Column 01 of the ODF in Row G Column 01 in
the switch room.
“A01-01-05-05-R” indicates that the opposite end of the optical fiber is connected with
Optical Receiving Interface 5 on Slot 05, Frame 01 in the cabinet on Row A, Column 01
in the switch room.
A.5 Labels for Trunk Cables

There are two types of labels for trunk cables. One type is used for the trunk cable
connecting two devices, such as the trunk board and built-in transmission unit, or two
trunk boards. The other type is used for connecting a device and the Digital Distribution
Frame (DDF).
The trunk cables include 75 ohm/120 ohm E1 cables, 120 ohm T1 cables, 34 Mbit/s, 45
Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, 155 Mbit/s cables and 120-to-75 ohm trunk cables, as well as clock
cables.
A.5.1 Labels for the Trunk Cable that Connects Two Devices
Table A-6 shows the information on both sides of the labels pasted to the trunk cable
that connects two devices.
Table A-6 Information on labels pasted to the trunk cable between two devices

MN-B-C-D-R MN: cabinet number For example, A01
/T
Numbered in bottom-up order with two digits,
B: frame number
for example, 01
Numbered in top-down and left-right order

C: slot number
with two digits, for example, 01
Numbered in top-down and left-right order

D: cable number
with two digits, for example, 12
A-14

interface
T: optical
transmitting
interface
MN-B-C-D-R
Same as above Same as above
/T
Figure A-14 shows the label on the trunk cable between two devices.
Figure A-14 Example of the label on the trunk cable between two devices
“G01-01-05-12-T” indicates that the local end of the trunk cable is connected with the
transmitting terminal of Trunk Cable 12 on Slot 05, Frame 01 in the cabinet on Row G,
Column 01 in the switch room.
“D02-01-01-10-R” indicates that the opposite end of the trunk cable is connected with
the receiving terminal of Trunk Cable 10 on Slot 01, Frame 01 in cabinet on Row D,
Column 02 in the switch room
A.5.2 Labels for the Trunk Cable that Connects a Device and the DDF
Table A-7 shows the information on both sides of the labels pasted to the trunk cable
that connects a device and the DDF.
Table A-7 Information on labels pasted to the trunk cable between a device and the
DDF

MN-B-C-D-R/T MN: cabinet number For example, A01
B: frame number

C: slot number
A-15

D: cable number
interface
interface
MN: row number and Numbered in the same rule as that of the
column number of the cabinets, for example, G01 is the DDF in
DDF Row G and Column 01.
B: row number of the

terminal Ranging from 01 to 99, for example:
C: column number of 01-01.
DDF-MN-B-C-
the terminal
D/R/T
There is such a mark in DDF:
D: direction A or B
A: indicating the DDF terminals are
connected to the optical network
interface
equipment
B: indicating the DDF terminals are
interface
connected to the switching equipment
Figure A-15 shows the label on the trunk cable between a device and the DDF.
Figure A-15 Example of the label on the trunk cable between a device and the DDF
“A01-03-01-01-R” indicates that the local end of the trunk cable is connected with the
receiving terminal of Trunk Cable 01 in Slot 01, Frame 03 of the cabinet on Row A,
Column 01 in the switch room.
“DDF-G01-01-01-AR” indicates that the opposite end of the trunk cable is connected
with the receiving terminal of Direction A (connected to optical network equipment) on
Row 01, Column 01 of the DDF on Row G and Column 01 in the switch room.
A.6 Labels for Subscriber Cables

The labels are pasted to both ends of the subscriber cables to identify the position of
the cables on the device side and the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) side.
A-16
Table A-8 shows the information on both sides of the labels pasted to the subscriber
cables.
Table A-8 Information on labels pasted to the subscriber cables


B: frame number
MN-B-C-D Numbered in top-bottom and left-right
C: slot number
Numbered in top-bottom and left-right

D: cable number
Numbered in the same rule as that of
MN: row number and column
the cabinets, for example, G01 means
number of MDF
the MDF of Row G and Column 01
MDF-MN-
B-C B: row number of the terminal
Ranging from 01 to 99, for example,
C: column number of the 01-01
terminal
Figure A-16 shows the label on the subscriber cable.
TO:
Figure A-16 Example of the label on the subscriber cable
“A01-03-01-01” indicates that the local end of the subscriber cable is connected with
Terminal 01 on Slot 1, Frame 03 of the cabinet on Row A, Column 01 in the switch
room.
“MDF-G01-01-01” indicates that the opposite end of the subscriber cable is connected
with the terminal on Row 01, Column 01 of the MDF on Row G, Column 01 in the switch
room.
A-17
A.7 Labels for Power Cables

A.7.1 Labels for DC Power Cables
The labels are pasted to the DC cables that provide power for the cabinets, and the
protection grounding cables, including the -48 V, PGND, and BGND cables. The labels
for DC power cables are pasted to one side of the identification plates on cable ties.
Table A-9 shows the information carried on the labels for the DC power cables.
Table A-9 Information on labels pasted to the DC power cables
Content Meaning
MN(BC)--48V1 MN(BC): BC is written right under MN.
MN(BC)--48V2 On the loaded cabinet side, only MN is used to identify the
cabinet.
MN(BC)-BGND On the power cabinet side, MN identifies the row and column
number of the power distribution equipment like the control
cabinet and power distribution box, BC identifies the row and
column number of the -48 V connecter (if there is no row
MN(BC)-PGND number or column number, or the connector can be identified
without them, BC can be omitted). BGND and PGND have no
row and column number for identification.
The label only carries location information about the opposite equipment, the control
cabinet or the power distribution box, while information of the local end is not necessary.
Table A-9 lists the information of two -48 V power supplies on the label. The information
for other DC voltages (such as 24 V, 60 V) should be given in similar methods.
Make sure that labels are pasted in correction direction. That is, after the cable ties are
bundled onto the cable, the identification plates with the labels should face up, and the
text on the labels in the same cabinet should be in the same direction, as shown in
Figure A-17.
TO:
TO:
A01 -48V2
B03 -48V2
B08
(1) (2)
Figure A-17 Example of the labels on the DC power cable
A-18
In Figure A-17, (1) indicates the label on the cabinet side, which carries the information
about the position of the cable on the power distribution box. (2) indicates the label on
the power distribution box side, which carries the information about the position of the
cable on the cabinet side.
On the cabinet side, the label marked with “A01/B08--48V2” on the cable indicates that
the cable is -48 V2 DC power supply, which is from the 8th connector on the second row
of -48 V busbar in the cabinet on Row A, and Column 1 in the switch room.
On the power distribution box side, the label marked with “B03--48 V2” indicates that
the cable is -48 V2 DC power supply, which is from the cabinet on Row B, Column 03 in
the switch room.
Note:
z In the power distribution box (or the first power cabinet of a row in the transmission
equipment room), every terminal block on the -48 V connector bar has a numeric
identification. For example, in the above label of “A01/B08--48 V2”, “08” (or
sometimes “8”) is the numeric identification of the terminal block.
z PGND and BGND are two copper bars, on which the terminal blocks are
short-circuited, therefore which terminal is connected makes no difference. It is only
necessary to give the row and column number of the power distribution box, instead
of giving the specific serial number of the terminal block on the copper bar. For
example, if the label on the cabinet side is “A01-BGND”, it means that the power
cable is a BGND that connects BGND copper bar in the power distribution box on
Row A, Column 01 in the switch room. Information on the labels for PGND cables
should be given in the similar way.
A.7.2 Labels for AC Power Cables
The labels are pasted to the AC cables that provide power for the cabinets, and the
protection grounding cables, including the POWER, PGND, and BGND cables. The
220 V AC cables and related PGND and BGND cables are covered with insulating
sheath, so the labels only need to contain the words of “AC" and the cabinet number.
The labels for AC power cables are pasted to one side of the identification plates on
cable ties.
Table A-10 shows the information carried on the labels for the AC power cables.
A-19
Table A-10 Information on labels pasted to the AC power cables
Content Meaning
MN: serial number of the cabinet or the socket where the power is led in
The location of the socket is marked out according to onsite situation. If
MN-AC the sockets can be identified by row number and column number, they
can be numbered following the same rule for the cabinets. If the sockets
cannot be identified by rows and columns, specify the detailed locations
to avoid confusing with other sockets.
The label only carries location information about the opposite equipment and the power
socket, while information of the local end is not necessary.
Make sure that labels are pasted in correction direction. That is, after the cable ties are
bundled onto the cable, the identification plates with the labels should face up, and the
text on the labels in the same cabinet should be in the same direction, as shown in
Figure A-18.
TO: TO:
A01 AC B01 AC
(1) (2)
Figure A-18 Example of the labels on the AC power cable
In Figure A-18, (1) indicates the label on the cabinet side, which carries the information
about the position of the cable on the power socket. (2) indicates the label on the power
socket side, which carries the information about the position of the cable on the cabinet
side.
On the cabinet side, the label marked with “A01-AC” indicates that the power cable is
connected to the socket of Row A and Column 01 in the switch room.
On the power socket side, the label marked with “B01-AC” indicates that the power
cable is connected to the cabinet of Row B, Column 01 in the switch room.
A-20
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Appendix B ESM Installation
Appendix B ESM Installation
B.1 Configuration
The Enhanced Switching Module (ESM) functions almost the same as the Switching
Module (SM), only different slightly in the internal structure and the ESM has a larger
capacity. There are two connection methods between the ESM and the AM/CM.
z One method is that the STM-1 Optic Interface Board (OTU) of the ESM is
connected with the STU in the interface frame of the AM/CM, thus achieving
communication links and channels running upward through optical ports.
z The other method is that the E1 of the DTF in the TMB frame of the ESM is
connected with the ET16 in the interface frame of the AM/CM, thus achieving
interconnection between communication links, moreover, the E1 of the ET16 in
the interface frame of the ESM is connected with the ET16 in the interface frame of
the AM/CM (or the STU in the interface frame of the ESM is connected with the
STU in the interface frame of the AM/CM through optical ports), thus achieving
interconnection between channels.
The ESM may be a pure subscriber module, a pure trunk module or a subscriber and
trunk combined module. Different configurations correspond to different hardware
structures, as shown in Figure B-1, Figure B-2 and Figure B-3 respectively.
B-1
UPS FAN
P DD D D D D D D D D D D D D DD D D P
W RR R R R R R R T T R R R R RR R R W
VV V V V V V V F F V V V V VV V V
C C
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
P DD D D D D D D D D D D D D DD D D P
T T
W RR R R R R R R R R R R RR R R W
VV V V V V V V F F V V V V VV V V
C C
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
P E E E E EE E E Q Q S E EE E P
W T T T T TT T T S S T T TT T W
1 1 1 1 11 1 1 I I U 1 11 1
C 6 6 6 6 66 6 6 6 66 6
C
P N NNNNNE M L L L L MMA P
W O OO OO O M P A AA AC CL W
D DD DD D A P PP P2 2 M
C U C
X X
C N CN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 K E K E 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
V T VT
L L
P N N NNN S S M L L AA OO T P
A APP T T C
W O O OOO I I P W
D D DDD G G P P MM U U I
C U CC
C
2 2
Figure B-1 Typical configuration of the ESM (Pure subscriber module)
B-2
UPS FAN
P DD D D D D D DDDD D DD DD P
W TT T T T T T T T T T T T T T T W
F F F F F F F FF F F F F F F F
C C
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
P DDDD D D DD DD D D D D DD P
WT T TT T T T T T T T T T T T T W
F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F
C C
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
P E E E EE E E E Q Q S E E E E P
W T T T TT T T T S S T T T T T W
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I U 1 1 1 1
C 6 6 6 66 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
C
P N NNNNNE M L L L L MMA P
W O OO OO OM P A AA AC C L W
D DD DD D A P PP P2 2 M
C U C
X X
CN CN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 K E KE 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
V T VT
L L
P NNN NN S S M L L AAO O T P
W OO O O O I I P A APP T T C W
DD DD D GG P P MM U U I
C U CC
C
2 2
Figure B-2 Typical configuration of the ESM (Pure trunk module)
B-3
UPS FAN
P D D D D DD DD DD D DD DDD D D P
TT
W R R R R RR RR R R R RR R R R
W
V V V V VV VV F F V VV VVV V V
C C
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
P DDD D D D D D DD DD D D DD P
T T T T T T T T TT T T T T T T
W F F F F
W
F F F F FF F F F F F F
C C
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
P E E EE E E E E Q Q S E EE E P
W T T TT T T T T S S T T TT T W
1 1 11 1 1 1 1 I I U 1 11 1
C 6 6 66 6 6 6 6 6 66 6
C
P NNNN NN E M L L L LM MA P
A AA A C C L
W OOO O OO M P W
DD D D DD A P P PP 2 2 M
C U C
X X
C N CN
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 K EK E 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
V T V T
L L
P N N NN NS S M L LA AOOT P
A A P PT TC
W OOOO O I I P W
D D DD DG G P PM MU U I
C U C C C
2 2
Figure B-3 Typical configuration of the ESM (Subscriber and trunk combined module)
As illustrated in the above figures, the ESM can be configured with the following
functional frames.
I. Main control frame (MCB)
Each ESM is configured with one MCB frame.
The MCB frame can be inserted with such boards as XNET, CKV, MPU, EMA, SIG,
NOD, MC2, LAPMC2, OTU or ALM.
z The XNET provides 16K*16K switching capacity so as to achieve non-blocking
switching.
z The CKV drives differential clocks (of 8 kHz, 2 MHz or 4 MHz) and active &
standby signals of the differential network board to various functional frames.
z The MPU is the core of the MCB frame, in charge of the whole MCB frame.
z The EMA controls data backup and the switchover between the MPUs.
z The SIG processes digital signal tone.
B-4
z The NOD offers channels for high-level communication between the host and
each board.
z The MC2 is a module communication processing board, responsible for receiving
the information from other modules and then sending it to the host, as well as
sending the information delivered by the host to other modules through links.
z The LAPMC2 controls inter-module communication.
z The OTU provides standard STM-1 interfaces and is connected with the STU in
the interface frame of the AM/CM to achieve interconnection between
communication links and channels.
z The ALM collects and reports alarm information.
II. Digital trunk frame (TMB)
Each ESM can be configured with one TMB frame at most. If the ESM is connected
with the AM/CM through its OTU, the TMB frame can be omitted.
The TMB frame is mostly inserted with the DTFs. In the ESM, the DTF is connected
with the ET16 in the interface frame of the AM/CM, thus achieving interconnection
between communication links.
III. Interface frame (LIM)
Each ESM is configured with one LIM frame.
The LIM frame is mainly inserted with the QSI, STU and ET16.
z The QSI is the core board in the LIM frame, acting as a key role for connecting the
LIM frame and other parts of the ESM.
z The STU provides standard STM-1 interfaces. Same as the ET16, the STU can
both access remote modules and be applied in inter-office trunks, and be
connected with the STU in the interface frame of the AM/CM to achieve channel
interconnection when the ESM is not configured with the OTU.
z The ET16 provides 16 standard 2 Mbit/s E1 interfaces for remote module access
and inter-office trunks. If the ESM is not configured with the OTU, the E1 of the
ET16 of the ESM can be connected with the ET16 in the interface frame of the
AM/CM to achieve channel interconnection.
IV. Centralized number receiving frame (DTB)
Each ESM can have a maximum of two DTB frames. If the ESM works as a pure trunk
module, there is no need of the DTB frame.
In the DTB frame, there are DRV boards and DTF boards. The DRV board carries out
conversion of NOD and HW signal level as well as the DTMF number receiving function.
The DTF board provides E1s to communicate with the AM/CM.
B-5
Note:
z When there is a requirement of intelligent network number receiving, the ESM will
have the DRB number receiving frame installed. The difference between the DRB
frame and DTB frame is that in the slots 12 and 13 the DRB frame has SPT boards
for synchronous voice announcements. In other slots, there are 16 DRV boards.
z If the ESM has the DTB frame, the DTB frame will have two DTF boards that provide
E1 interfaces for link communication. If the ESM has no DTB frame but has the TMB
frame, it is the two DTF boards in the TMB frame that provide E1 interfaces for link
communication.
B.2 Connecting Cables in ESM
The ESM has three typical configurations, so the cables of the ESM are connected
differently for three configurations. Pay attention to the specific configuration when
connecting the cables.
I. ESM as a pure subscriber module
When the ESM works as a pure subscriber module, the cable connection at its back is
as shown in Figure B-4, the cable connection on the MCB backplane is as shown in
Figure B-5, and the cable connection on the LIM backplane is as shown in Figure B-6.
The numbers and meanings of the cables are listed in Table B-1.
B-6
Grounding point
Figure B-4 Cable connection of the ESM
B-7
Figure B-5 Cable connection of the MCB frame
Figure B-6 Cable connection of the LIM frame
Table B-1 Numbers and meanings of the cables in the ESM
No. Cable number Meaning Qty.

1 W15~W20 GND feeder cables of +5 V 6
2 W21~W31 Feeder cables of -48 V 12
3 W33~W35 PGND feeder cables 2
Clock cable between the MCB frame and
4 c11, c12 1
the LIM frame
HDLC cable between the MCB frame and

5 h13, h14 1
the LIM frame
Clock cable of 8 kHz between the LIM

6 c13, c14 1
frame and the MCB frame
7 10 NOD cable 2 used by the DRB frame 1
B-8

8 6~9 HW cable 2 used by the DRB frame 1
Secondary power alarm cable (from Frame
9 86 1
1 to Frame 2)

10 87 1
3 to Frame 4)

11 88 1
5 to Frame 6)
12 84 1
1 to Frame 2)

13 4
3 to Frame 4)

14 4
5 to Frame 6)
Serial port cable for the AMD board in the
15 11
main control cabinet
Front door grounding cable of the

16 1 1
assembled cabinet
Rear door grounding cable of the

17 2~5 1
assembled cabinet
18 11~12 Grounding cable between cabinets 1

19 13~14 NOD cable 1 used by the DRB frame 1
In the ESM, each QSI in the LIM frame is configured with two HWs, which are inserted
in the sockets 20 and 32. When the ESM offers side-door links and side-door trunks, it
locks the clock of the side-door links and the corresponding clock cables are C13 and
C14.
In addition, each QSI in the LIM frame provides two pairs of high-speed optical fibers of
393.3 Mbit/s, which are connected to the optical ports of the XNET in the MCB frame.
Run the optical fibers along the fiber bracket from the front side of the cabinet to the
back side. After the connection, lay the optical fibers in the fiber trough neatly, and lead
out the two ends of an optical fiber through the gaps of the panel of the fiber bracket.
For a single optical fiber, one end is stuck with an identifier ring marked as "1", and the
other end is stuck with one marked as "2". During the cable connection, two optical
fibers form a pair of receiving and transmitting optical fiber cable, with one end
connected to the QSI optical port and the other end to the XNET optical port. The basic
principles for connection are as follows:
z The adjacent active & standby XNET boards provide two pairs of optical ports.
z The optical ports of the QSI (in Slot 11) on the left side are connected to those of
the XNET (in Slot 12) on the left side, while the optical ports of the QSI (in Slot 13)
B-9
on the right side are connected to those of the XNET (in Slot 14) on the right side.
For each pair of optical ports, the upper port is the receiving port and the lower one
is the transmitting port. The transmitting optical ports of the QSIs are connected to
the receiving optical ports of the XNETs, and conversely the same.
Note:
The connection of other cables is the same as that in the SM, so no detailed description
is available here.
II. ESM as a pure trunk module
When the ESM works as a pure trunk module, the cable connection at its back is as
shown in Figure B-7. The cable connection on the backplane of the LIM frame is the
same as the typical configuration mentioned in the previous part. As for the MCB frame,
a cable is added to connect the TMB frame, as shown in Figure B-8. The numbers and
meanings of the cables are listed in Table B-2.
B-10
Grounding point
B-11

1 REMARKS GND feeder cables of +5 V 6
2 W21~W27,W29~W31 Feeder cables of -48 V 11

4 c11, c12 1
the LIM frame
5 h13, h14 1
the LIM frame
6 c13, c14 1
7 86 1
1 to Frame 2)
8 87 1
3 to Frame 4)
9 88 1
5 to Frame 6)
10 84 1
11 4
assembled cabinet
12 4
assembled cabinet
B-12

13 Grounding cable between cabinets 11
14 85 Clock phase-lock cable 1
15 5 NOD cable of the DT frame 1
19 12 HW cable of the DT frame 1


B-13

III. ESM as a subscriber and trunk combined module
When the ESM works as a subscriber and trunk combined module, the cable
connection at its back is as shown in Figure B-9. The cable connection on the
backplane of the LIM frame is the same as the two typical configurations mentioned in
the previous part. The cable connection on the MCB backplane is as shown in
Figure B-10. The numbers and meanings of the cables are listed in Table B-3.
B-14
Grounding point
B-15
Cable
No. Meaning Qty.
number
1 W15~W20 GND feeder cables of +5 V 6
2 W21~W31 Feeder cables of -48 V 11

4 c11, c12 1
the LIM frame

5 h13, h14 1
the LIM frame

6 c13, c14 1
7 1 NOD cable 1 used by the DRB frame 1

8 2~5 HW cable 1 used by the DRB frame 1
Secondary power alarm cable (from

9 86 1
Frame 1 to Frame 2)
Secondary power alarm cable (from

10 87 1
Frame 3 to Frame 4)
11 84 1

12 4
assembled cabinet

13 4
assembled cabinet
14 Grounding cable between cabinets 11

15 85 Clock phase-lock cable 1
B-16
Cable
No. Meaning Qty.
number


HW cable 1 of the DTF board in the DTB

34 6~7 1
frame
B.3 Connecting Cables between the ESM and AM/CM
The ESM can be connected with the AM/CM in two modes as follows.
I. ESM configured with OTU
There are two modes for connecting the OTU and the STU.
a) If the ESM is far from the AM/CM (they are in different offices), the SDH optical
cables of 155 Mbit/s from the active & standby OTUs is connected to the optical
coupler/splitter, then to the STUs in the remote AM/CM interface frame over the
transmission network (as shown in Figure B-11). This connection mode is also called
"board backup mode".
B-17
ESM
OTU OTU
155 Mbit/s 155 Mbit/s

Optical coupler/splitter
SDH
155 Mbit/s
AM/CM
Figure B-11 Board backup mode
If the "board backup mode" is adopted for connection, it is necessary to lead the optical
cables along the fiber bracket from the front side of the cabinet to its back side, and
then connect the cables to the optical coupler/splitter (directly placed on the cabling
trough). The optical coupler/splitter is connected to the 155-Mbit/s optical port of the
SDH equipment through the cabling frame.
b) Another connection mode is that the active & standby OTUs are directly connected
to the active & standby STUs in the AM/CM interface frame through a pair of fiber optics
each (as shown in Figure B-12 and Figure B-13). This connection mode is called "line
backup mode".
ESM
OTU OTU
(active) (standby)
AM/CM
LIM
STU STU
(active) (standby)
Figure B-12 Line backup mode (the ESM is near to the AM/CM)
B-18
ESM
OTU OTU
(active) (standby)
SDH
AM/CM
LIM
STU STU
(active) (standby)
Figure B-13 Line backup mode (the ESM is far from the AM/CM)
If the "line backup mode" is adopted for connection, it is necessary to lead the optical
cables along the fiber bracket from the front side of the cabinet to its back side, and
connect the cables to the Optical Distribution Frame (ODF) or Digital Distribution Frame
(DDF), and then to the AM/CM through the upward cabling frame.
The two OTUs can also work in the load sharing mode, in which the fiber connection
with the AM/CM is the same as the line backup mode. It should be noted that if the
OTUs work in the load sharing mode, the STUs interconnected with the OTUs must
also work in the load sharing mode.
II. ESM not configured with OTU
In this configuration, the connection of cables between the ESM and the AM/CM is
divided into two parts. The E1 of the DTF board in the DTB number-receiving frame (or
the TMB digital trunk frame) is connected with the ET16 board in the AM/CM interface
frame, and the E1 of the ET16 in the LIM frame of the ESM is connected with the ET16
in the AM/CM interface frame (or the STU in the LIM frame of the ESM is connected
with the STU in the AM/CM interface frame through optical ports). In the first part, the
ESM provides trunks by the TSM mode, while in the latter case, the ESM provides
trunks by the SPM mode. The cable structure and specific connection method in these
two parts are the same as those of the SM.
B-19
Caution:
Different from the SM, upward cabling is adopted for the trunk cables in the LIM frame
and TMB frame of the ESM.
B-20
Installation Manual – Volume 1 Appendix C Installing Container-Type
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Switch Room
Appendix C Installing Container-Type Switch

Room
C.1 About Container-Type Switch Room
The container-type switch room uses a special container as the switch room to hold
C&C08 Switch, power supplies, air conditioners, and cable distribution frames. The
container might be 20-foot type or 40-foot type, depending on switch capacity.
Table C-1 shows the size and weight of the container-type switch room.
Table C-1 Size and weight of the container-type switch room
Type Size (L*W*H, external) Size (L*W*H, internal) Weight

20-foot 6058*2438*2591(mm) 5000*2200*2300(mm) 3500 kg
40-foot 12192*2438*2591(mm) 11000*2200*2300(mm) 5500 kg
Note:
The weight in Table C-1 refers to only the weight of the container, not including that of
the equipment in the container.
Installation engineers are required not only to be proficient in installing C&C08 switch
but also have knowledge of power supply, air conditioner, and lighting. This chapter
introduces the installation of container-type switch room in the sequence of engineering
installation. It focuses on the overall engineering installation. For installation of
individual products, refer to their installation manuals (or installation guides).
Before delivery, part equipment and accessories in the container have been completely
installed, including switch cabinets, 19” open racks, power distribution cabinets, air
conditioners, indoor/outdoor grounding bars, battery rack, digital distribution frame,
computer operation desk, and fire extinguishers. So, this chapter covers only the
installation of uninstalled equipment and accessories.
C-1
C.2 Installation Flow
Figure C-1 shows the installation flow which will guide you through the installation of the
container-type switch room.
Start
Making preparations
Installing the container
Installing BAM components
Installing storage batteries
Installing cables
Binding and running cables
Checking installation
End
Figure C-1 Installation flow for the container-type switch room
Note:
The installation flow is only for reference. You can adopt an appropriate flow according
to actual situations.
C.3 Making Preparations
C.3.1 Checking Installation Environment
Before installation, first check whether the environment meets installation

requirements.
Ground: Because the weight of the container-type switch room in full configuration is
about 5 500 kg, the ground where the container stands should be flat and load 6 000
kg/m2 at least. It is recommended that both the length and width of the ground are one
meter longer than those of the container. If conditions permitted, use cement ground. In
C-2
addition, the ground should be on a high terrain and accumulate no water in rainy
season.
Lightning protection grounding: The container-type switch room should connect

lightning protection grounding terminals externally with an earth resistance no more
than 0.5 ohm.
Working environment:
Temperature: From -40 OC to 55 OC
Humidity: From 10% to 90%
Sunshine: Total radiation intensity within 1120±10% W/m2
C.3.2 Preparing Technical Documents
During the installation, refer to the following documents:

z Engineering Design & Construction Drawing for Container-Type Switch Room
z Manuals of power products
z Installation manual of air conditioner
z Installation Guide to Storage Batteries
C.3.3 Preparing Tools and Instruments
I. General tools
Table C-2 lists necessary general tools.
Table C-2 General tools
Measuring Concrete
Serial Small Auxiliary
and marking punching Fixing tools
No. tools tools
tools tools
One
Cross hacksaw
One
One 50-m screwdriver (with One pair of
1 percussion
tape (one 4', one several tweezers
drill
6', one 8') saw
blades)
straight
Several One pair of
One 5-m screwdriver One pair of
2 auxiliary drill diagonal
band tape (one 4', one scissors
bits pliers (8')
6', one 8')
C-3
Measuring Concrete
Serial Small Auxiliary
and marking punching Fixing tools
No. tools tools
tools tools
One power
strip (three
two-phrase
Monkey One
sockets and
One 400-mm wretch (one assorted One 40-W
three
3 horizontal 6', one 8', set of files soldering
three-phras
ruler one 10', one (medium iron
e sockets,
12') size)
current
greater than
15 A)
One angle Spanner One pair of

Several
4 measuring (one 17', one sharp-nose
solder wires
tool 19') pliers
One suit of
One marking
5 socket One drier
pen
wrench
One 5-kg
6 Ladder, rope
nail hammer
Torque
7
wrench
II. Special tools
Table C-3 lists necessary special tools.
Table C-3 Special tools
Serial No. Tools Qty.

1 Non-inductive screwdriver One
2 Feeder clippers One

3 Safe edge knife One
4 Stripper for 75-ohm coaxial cable One
Connector probe crimping tool for

5 One
75-ohm coaxial cable
6 Multi-function crimp pliers One
7 Screwdriver One
8 Screwdriver for watches and clocks One set
9 Pulley One set

10 Hydraulic pincer One set
C-4
Serial No. Tools Qty.

11 Antistatic wrist strap One
III. Instruments/meters
Table C-4 lists necessary instruments and meters.
Table C-4 Instruments/meters
Serial
Instruments/meters Qty.
No.
1 Multi-meter One
2 Portable computer One
C.4 Installing the Container
After the container arrives, first install bases, then place the container on the bases,
finally fix the container.
C.4.1 Fixing Positions
Fix central positions of four container bases according to the reference sizes in plain
engineering drawings. Then based on the central positions, fix the positions of four
installation holes and mark them, as shown in Figure C-2 and Figure C-3.
Figure C-2 Installation holes for the 20-foot container (expressed in mm)
C-5
Figure C-3 Installation holes for the 40-foot container (expressed in mm)
C.4.2 Drilling Holes
Use a percussion drill to drill the ground with marks for expansion bolts.
Keep the bit perpendicular to the ground. Hold the drill handle firmly with both hands to
control the direction. Do not shake the drill to avoid tilted holes or prevent damage to
the floor.
The depth of the hole should be the sum of the length of the expansion tube and that of
the bolt head. The depth of all holes should be the same. Clean the hole before
measuring the net-depth. To drill a hole, use a vacuum cleaner to clean the dust.
Position-fixing and hole-drilling are the fundamental work for hardware installation. Any
poor precision may cause great inconvenience for follow-up jobs.
C.4.3 Installing Bases
Prior to installation, clean the dust inside and outside the holes with a vacuum cleaner
and then measure the spacing between holes. Relocate and drill before installing
expansion bolts in case of poor accuracy.
1) Place the bases on the marked positions and align the four holes in the bases with
the holes in the ground for expansion bolts.
2) Put expansion bolts into holes vertically and strike them lightly by a nail hammer
until expansion tubes are all into the ground.
C-6
3) Place insulation shells, big flat washers (replacing the washers of expansion bolts),
spring washers, and nuts, into expansion bolts.
4) Fasten nuts to 45 Nm by a torque wrench and pull expansion bolts.
5) Take down nuts, spring washers, and flat washers.
C.4.4 Placing the Container
Lift the container by a crane, as shown in Figure C-4. Move the container and align the
four corners with the bases. Then place the container on the bases slowly. Ensure that
the container is on the bases reliably. Figure C-5 shows the appearance of the
container base.
Figure C-4 Lifting the container
C-7
Figure C-5 The container base
Caution:
It must be ensured that the crane simultaneously lifts the four upper corners of the
container. The crane must be able to load much more than the sum of the weight of the
container and that of the equipment inside.
C.4.5 Fixing the Container
Take out the fixing structure of the container. Horizontally put the square iron plate into
the hole at the bottom of the container. Align the hole in the base with that in the square
iron plate. Insert fixing bolts into the holes and fasten them. Ensure that the longer side
of the iron plate is reliably on the container side, as shown in Figure C-6.
Figure C-6 Container fixed on the base
C-8
C.5 Installing Equipment
C.5.1 Installing BAM Components
Refer to Chapter 8 Installation of BAM Cabinet in this manual.
C.5.2 Installing Storage Batteries
I. Fixing positions
Install storage batteries into the battery rack. The battery rack is at the end of the
container and next to the computer operation desk.
II. Installing storage batteries
Figure C-7 shows how storage batteries are connected.
+ +
- -
Figure C-7 Connection of storage batteries
Generally, connect four 12-V cells in series to form a group of 100-Ah battery. The
container uses two groups of 100-Ah battery. Before installation of storage batteries,
first check whether the cells are damaged. During installation, check the polarities and
connect the cells correctly. For detailed installation steps, refer to Installation Guide to
Storage Batteries delivered along with the storage batteries.
C-9
C.6 Installing Power Cables, Signal Cables, and Grounding

System
Note:
The power cables and signal cables inside the container-type switch room have been
completely installed before delivery. This section is only for cable checking. For the
installation of power cables, this section is based on the PS48300-25 intelligent high
frequency switch power system. Actual power system might be of other type. During
installation, refer to the manual attached with the power product.
C.6.1 Cable Layout and Running Principles
To connect power cables and grounding system, first check the layout of cabling frames
in the container and have a rough estimate of cable length and running positions.
Figure C-8 shows the cable layout in the container and specifies the positions for signal
cables and power cables. During installation, refer to the figure and conform to the
following cable running principles.
z When running power cables and grounding cables, bind them separately from
other cables whether in a cabling frame or out of a cabling frame such as cable
trough or trench. Run power cables and ground cables across the fixing brackets
at both sides of a rack and bind them on the inner edges of the external sides of
the brackets. Bind the cables on each bracket and keep cable ties at the external
sides of the brackets.
z When connecting power cables and grounding cables to wiring terminals in
cabling frames, run them straightly and bind them neatly. Run the cables to farther
wiring terminals outside and the cables to nearer wiring terminals inside.
z Run 220-V/380-V ac power cables separately from other cables. Do not directly
bind them on metal cabling frames. Insulation measures should be added.
z To run power cables and grounding cables, first precisely measure the distance
between the wiring busbar and the power distribution box and that between the
power distribution box and the wiring terminals of cabinets. According to the
measurements, prepare enough cables to avoid any lack of cables. If a cable is
short, stop the cabling, and replace it with an appropriate one. Do not extend the
cable by means of connecting or soldering, as shown in Figure C-9.
C-10
(1) Passage (2) For air conditioner

(3) For equipment (4) For signal cables
(5) For power cables (6) Entry 1 for external power
(7) For external power cables (8) For dc power cables of air conditioners
(9) For ac power cables of air conditioners (10) For feeder cables
Figure C-8 Cable layout in the container-type switch room (top view)
Connected through No soldering

soldering
To BTS To BTS
Soldering
Grounding or power copper busbar Grounding or power copper busbar
Figure C-9 Specifications for cable connection
The entry for external power is in lower-right corner in the air conditioner cabin, as
shown in Figure C-10.
C-11
Figure C-10 Entry for external power
C.6.2 Installation Flow
1) Installing power cables of individual equipment

2) Installing power cables of air conditioners
3) Installing signal cables of C&C08 switch
4) Installing input power cables of the ac distribution cabinet
C.6.3 Cable Label
To run power cables, first make marks at both ends of each cable to prevent error
connection. After installation, paste cable labels according to specifications. The power
cable label is a Huawei-made label. Paste it 2 cm away from the lug at both ends. There
are two sides on a label. Write the position of the local wiring terminal on one side and
write that of the opposite end at another side.
C.6.4 Power Distribution Cabinet
The power distribution cabinet adopts the PS48300-25 intelligent high frequency switch
power system. The power system has both ac and dc power distribution units and can
monitor and manage storage batteries. Figure C-11 shows the ac power distribution
unit and Figure C-12 shows the dc power distribution unit.
C-12
(1) Neutral wire terminal

(2) Buzzer (3) Buzzer switch
bar
(4) Forced ON switch of
(5) Forced ON switch of (6) Forced OFF switch of battery
load secondary output
battery group II (S4) group II
(S5)
(7) Forced ON switch of (8) Forced OFF switch of
(9) Mains control board
battery group I (S2) battery group I (S1)
(10) Mains sampling
(11) Fault indicator (red) (12) Running indicator (green)
board
(13) C-level lightning (15) Input miniature circuit
(14) AC chain contactor
arrestor breaker (MCB) of mains I
(17) C-level lightning (18) D-level lightning protection
(16) Input MCB of mains II
protection MCB box
(21) User three-phase output
(19) Grounding bar (20) Neutral wire bar
MCB (16-A/3-P)
(22) User single-phase (23) Input MCB of rectifier
output MCB (16-A/3-P, module (20-A/1-P,
3-channel) 12-channel)
Figure C-11 AC power distribution unit
C-13
(9) (10)
(11)
(12)
(8) (13)
(7)
(6)
(5)
(4)
(14)
(15)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(2) Current divider of battery (3) Current divider of battery

(1) Load current divider
group II group I
(4) Contactor of battery (5) Contactor of battery group (6) Secondary output
group I II contactor
(7) Fuse of battery group (8) Fuse of battery group II (9) Fuse of mains output 1
I (250-A) (250-A) (200-A)
(10) Fuses of mains (11) Fuses of mains outputs 5 (12) Fuses of mains outputs 7,
outputs 2, 3, 4 (100-A) and 6 (63A/1P) 8, 9 (32A/1P)
(13) Fuses of mains
outputs 10 and 11 (14) DC output board (15) Signals transfer board
(20A/1P)
Figure C-12 DC power distribution unit
C.6.5 Installing Power Cables of Individual Equipment
I. Entire power distribution
Figure C-13 shows the entire power distribution of the switching system.
C-14
Power distribution box in

air conditioner cabin
40-A MCB
～220 V
Lighting current
AC power cabinet
16-A MCB
～ 220-V/380-V input ～220 V Voltage
stabilizer 1 Air conditioner 1
～220 V 16-A MCB

Voltage Air conditioner 2
stabilizer 2
-48V
-48V
DC power cabinet
-48V
Battery group 1
～ 220-V/380-V input
-48V
Battery group 2
-48V
Distribution box -48V1
-48V
Distribution box -48V2
Figure C-13 Entire power distribution
Note:
Broken lines in Figure C-13 indicate that the corresponding equipment might be
unavailable.
II. Installing power terminals
To make OT terminals for a power cable, first cover it with a heat-shrink tube and then
apply soldering tin (no soldering tin when processing large-section power cable). Finally,
move the heat-shrink tube up.
When connecting OT terminals to GND copper busbar and studs of – 48 V, add flat
washers and spring washers. Connect them neatly.
III. Connecting lighting ac power cables
The AC power cable from the power distribution cabinet to lighting switches comprises
three wires (one live wire, one neutral wire, and one earth wire). The live wire is from
one of the three 16-A MCBs in the AC power distribution unit. The neutral wire and
earth wire are from the (4) and (1) in Figure C-14. The master leakage switch of
lighting/socket is on the left of the power distribution box in the air conditioner cabin.
C-15
(1) (4)
● ● ● ● ●
(5)
(2) (3)
(6)
(1) Grounding bar (2) 12 power supply MCBs

(3) Lighting live wiring terminal (4) Neutral wire bar
(5) Standby wiring terminals for (6) Live wiring terminals of the voltage stabilizer
output of three-phase power of the air conditioner
Figure C-14 Input/Output MCB bar of the ac power distribution unit
IV. Connecting power cables of battery groups
There are two power cables between a battery group and the power distribution cabinet,
-48 V (blue, 25 mm2) and GND (black, 25 mm2). There are two battery groups and so
there are four power cables to be connected.
Connection method:
1) Connect the power cable of -48 V of the battery group I to the port 7 in Figure C-12
and connect that of the battery group II to the port 8.
2) Connect the two GND power cables of the battery groups to the grounding bar in
the power distribution cabinet, that is, the port 19 in Figure C-11.
Caution:
To prevent short circuit, first take out the fuse core and then connect the power cables
from the battery groups to the dc power distribution cabinet.
C-16
V. Connecting power cables of C&C08 switch
The C&C08 switch is connected to the dc power distribution cabinet through the power
distribution box. There are three power cables between them, namely, -48 V (blue),
GND (black), and PGND (yellowish green).
VI. Connecting power cables of air conditioners
The air conditioner has two input power supplies, two dc cables of -48 V (one brown
core and one blue core) and one 220-V ac cable (one brown core, one blue one, and
one yellowish green core). Only with these two power supplies can an air conditioner
be working normally. The dc input of the air conditioner is from the power distribution
cabinet. The ac input power cable of the air conditioner is first connected to the MCB in
the power distribution box in the air conditioner cabin and then to the output of the
power distribution cabinet (to the output of the voltage stabilizer of the air conditioner if
the voltage stabilizer is available), as shown in Figure C-15. In the power distribution
box, the left leakage protection switch is the master switch of the internal lighting and
socket power and the two MCBs on the right are the ac switches of the air conditioner.
Figure C-15 Power distribution box in the air conditioner cabin
Connection method:
1) Connect the two ac outputs of the power distribution cabinet (or the two ac outputs
of the voltage stabilizer of the air conditioner) to the two MCBs on the left in the
power distribution box.
2) Connect the power cable of each air conditioner to one MCB on the right in the
power distribution box. Connect the brown wire to the live wire, the blue wire to the
neutral wire, and the yellowish green wire to the earth wire.
C-17
3) Connect the two dc power cables of an air conditioner to the equipment cabin
through the holes at the top of the air conditioner cabin, and then to any two 32-A
fuses of mains outputs 7, 8, 9 (as shown in Figure C-12).
Caution:
After the installation of an air conditioner, push the humidity switch to 30% to prevent
water drops from entering the equipment cabin due to too high wind speed. Figure C-16
shows the humidity switch.
Figure C-16 Humidity switch of an air conditioner
C.6.6 Installing Input Power Cables of AC Distribution Cabinet
AC input power cables are cords with a diameter not more than 6 mm2. The power
might be single-phase 220-V ac power or three-phase four-wire power. In the first case,
there can be two mains inputs simultaneously. Connect the three-phase ac phase line
of the mains 1 to the input MCB indicated by (15) in Figure C-11 and that of the mains 2
to the input MCB indicated by (16). Connect the input ac neutral wire to the neutral wire
bar indicated by (20).
Connection of Input power cables:

1) Run the power cables across the holes in lower-right corner in the air conditioner
cabin (as shown in Figure C-10), then the holes in the wall at the top of the air
conditioner cabin, finally to the ac distribution cabinet. This way is recommended.
C-18
2) Run the power cables across the holes on the container wall and then to the ac
distribution cabinet through the cabling frames, as shown in Figure C-17.
Figure C-17 Feeder windows
C.7 Checking Installation
Upon completion of hardware installation, check the installation work to ensure

successful software installation and system debugging. The check consists of the
following three parts, overall check, frame power-on check and board power-on check.
C.7.1 Checking Totally
This covers the entire installation process. Check such parts as cabinets, cables,
connectors, labels and site environment.
I. Checking cabinets
Check whether the following requirements are met.

z After the cabinets are connected, they should have been neatly aligned and firmly
fixed. Cabinets in the same row should be at the same level.
z All screws should be tightened and be correctly added with flat washers and spring
washers.
z All components and cables of each cabinet should not be broken or damaged. The
labels should be marked correctly, clearly, and completely.
z After the installation, the cabinets should be cleaned thoroughly to remove finger
prints and dust (including that in the inaccessible corners).
C-19
z Adjacent cabinets should be neatly arranged. Electro-magnetic shielding layers of

side panels should be closely contacted to prevent environmental pollution due to
electro-magnetic leakage.
II. Checking cables
Refer to Chapter 16 Hardware Installation Check in this manual.
III. Checking labels
All labels should be neat, clean, clear, and in correct positions. For details, refer to
Appendix A Labels for Cables in this manual.
IV. Checking site environment
z Cabinets
Ensure that there are no sundries inside cabinets and there are no finger prints or
smears on front/back doors and side plates of cabinets.
z Equipment room
Make sure that there are no unwanted things cluttering in the equipment room and the
required useful things are kept tidily. The operation desk and the raised floor are to be
always kept neat and clean.
After finishing the check, conduct power-on checks.
C.7.2 Checking Power Supplies
Check power supplies of the container-type switch room, including the ac power
distribution cabinet, lighting, sockets, and air conditioners. For checking of other items,
refer to the installation instructions of each piece of equipment.
Caution:
After installation and debugging of equipment, take out fire extinguishers from the fixed
box and place them beside cabin doors.
C.8 Transportation of Container-Type Switch Room
Ensure that all equipment installed in the container is not damaged during
transportation.
C-20
I. Reinforcement measures
Such equipment needs be completely installed in the container as cabinets, power

cabinets, cabling frames, microwave brackets, air conditioners, and cables. When
fixing such equipment, consider the shock during transportation.
Ensure that all items in the container are fastened and will not be damaged in the case
of container rolling.
Place desiccants in the container and prevent rust on metal parts.
Coat some connecting parts with glue to prevent loosening or falling-off during
transportation.
II. Attention
Seal up feeder windows and floor holes (drain passages of air conditions and
grounding cable passages) during transportation.
C.9 Switch Box in the Container Passage
There is a switch box in the container passage and there are four MCBs, namely,
lighting switch, socket switch, NULL and NULL.
The white switch on the rightmost is the lighting switch, as shown in Figure C-18.
Figure C-18 Switch box in the container passage
C-21
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Index
Index
window and door, 3-9

Numerics assembled cabinet
120 ohm twisted pairs backplane, 7-3
connecting in TSM, 12-4 busbar, 7-1
installing, 10-7 frame, 7-2
2-Mbit/s reference clock cable,installing, 9-40 assembled cabinet rack,installing, 7-21
2-MHz reference clock cable,installing, 9-41 assembling cabling ladder, 7-48
75 ohm coaxial cable
conneting in TSM, 12-2 B
installing, 10-7 B800 series support, 8-1
back door,installing, 7-74
A BAM cabinet, 8-1
accessory,installing, 7-57 BAM cabinet door,installing, 8-29
adjusting support height, 7-11, 8-6 BAM component,installing in container, C-9
air conditioning and ventilation requirement BAM internal component,installing, 8-18
air conditioner, 3-25 BAM rack,installing, 8-13
heat, 3-24 BAM system,instaling, 13-3
heat dissipation, 3-25 barrier,installing, 8-16
humidity and temperature, 3-23 beam,installing, 7-65
air filter,installing, 7-77 beryllium oxide, 1-3
alarm box sound volume,setting, 14-12 board
alarm indicator control cable,installing, 9-38 description, 7-81
alarm indicator,installing, 7-72 installing, 7-81
AM/CM cable replacement, 7-83
installing, 9-1 BTU network cable,installing, 9-61
type and function, 9-1 BTU serial port cable,installing, 9-62
analog trunk cable,installing, 12-21 BTU STM-1 electrical interface cable
anti-iterference measure, 3-29 installing, 9-62
anti-static wrist strap, 1-9 BTU STM-1 optical interface fiber
architectural requirement for switch room installing, 9-62
area, 3-6
corrsive gases, 3-10 C
electromagnetic environment, 3-10 cabinet and frame,numbering, 7-85
floor, 3-8 cable
height, 3-8 connecting ESM and AM/CM, B-17
neatness, 3-9 connecting in ESM, B-6
trough, 3-9 installing in container, C-10
wall surface, 3-9
i-1
cable-through hole,installing, 7-40 cover plate installing, 8-16

cabling ladder,assembling, 7-48 cover plate,installing, 7-15, 7-40
cabling rack current and power consumption
ceiling-suspending, 7-53 board, 3-16
ground-supporting, 7-53 frame, 3-17
cabling rack attachment,installing, 7-52 SM, 3-19
cabling rack part, 7-41
cabling rack,installing, 7-40 D
cabling specification digital trunk cable
for subscriber cable, 11-23 bundling, 12-7
for trunk cable, 12-7 connecting in SPM, 12-6
cabling trough connecting to DDF, 12-20
function, 7-30 installing in SPM, 12-4
installing, 7-32, 7-49 installing in TSM, 12-1
profile and structure, 7-30 structure, 12-1, 12-4
carton,opening, 6-4 door,installing, 7-63
cause and harm of ESD, 3-26 downward cabling trough,installing, 7-36
cause and harm of interference, 3-28 DT8K reference clock cable,installing, 9-40
CC11 alarm box
connecting cable, 14-2 E
fixing, 14-1
electrical safety
installing, 14-1
for current leakage, 1-10
installing lock, 14-5
for drilling, 1-7
clock signal cable
for flammable air environment, 1-10
installing, 9-29
for high voltage, 1-5
structure, 9-30
for power cabl, 1-5
connecting cabinet-top and cabling rack, 7-55
for power lable, 1-10
connecting rack and base, 7-21
for static electricity, 1-8
connecting rack and foot, 7-21
for thunderstorms, 1-8
connecting rack and guide rail, 7-23, 8-13
for tool, 1-7
container
emergency serial port cable,installing, 9-35
drilling hole, C-6
ESD-preventive measure, 3-28
fixing, C-8
ESM
fixing position, C-5
centralized number receiving frame, B-5
installing, C-5
digital trunk frame, B-5
installing base, C-6
interface frame, B-5
placing, C-7
main control frame, B-4
container-type switch room
ESM configuration, B-1
checking installation, C-19
ET16 digital trunk cable, 12-5
size and weight, C-1
excessive subscriber cable,handling, 11-20
transportation, C-20
expansion bolt,mounting, 7-11, 8-5
control serial port cable,installing, 9-34
external BITS clock cable,installing, 10-6
i-2
F quantity, 7-6, 8-3
fan power signal cable,installing, 9-39

H
fan safety, 1-15
firming support, 7-11, 8-6 handling of heavy object, 1-19
fixing bar,installing, 8-14 hardware installation check
fixing floor bracket, 7-15 for board, 16-3
fixing plate,installing, 8-14 for cabinet, 16-1
floor bracket for cable, 16-1
fixing, 7-15 for connector, 16-2
installing, 7-15, 8-8 for label, 16-2
flow for power supply, 16-3
installing container-type switch room, C-2 for site environment, 16-2
installing support and guide rail, 7-7, 8-4 for socket, 16-2
foot-anchor plate fro lock, 16-2
component, 7-16, 8-10 hardware installation process, 2-1
function, 7-16, 8-10 HDLC signal cable
installing, 7-20, 8-10 installing, 9-1
foot-anchor plate assembly,installing, 7-17, 8-11 structure, 9-2
front and back door,installing, 8-29 high temperature, 1-15
front door,installing, 7-74 hoisting of heavy object, 1-18
fuse, 1-11 HW and NOD cable,binding, 9-59

HW signal cable
G installing, 9-22
structure, 9-22
GM12 alarm box
hydrochloride, 1-3
connecting cable, 14-7
hydrofluoride, 1-4
fixing, 14-6
installing, 14-6
I
installing lock, 14-13
setting sound volume, 14-12 information on label
grounding of switch for power cable, A-8
alarm box, 4-3 for signal cable, A-8
BAM, 4-3 inserting & pulling out board, 1-20
interconnection between cabinets, 4-2 inspection of equipment building
interconnection in cabinet, 4-1 for auxiliary equipment, 5-3
signal cable, 4-3 for contruction, 5-2
terminal, 4-3 for environment, 5-2
grounding requirement for grouding cable, 5-3
for AC, 15-2 for power supply, 5-2
for DC, 15-1 installation completion check, 7-80
guide rail, 7-4 installation preparation
installing, 7-13, 8-7 for document, 5-1
leveling and fastening, 7-13, 8-7 for equipment building, 5-2
i-3
for tool and instrument, 5-1 label for ethernet cable

installing accessory, 7-57 example, A-11
installing alarm indicator, 7-72 information, A-10
installing BAM cabinet door, 8-29 label for optical fiber
installing beam, 7-65 example, A-12, A-13
installing BTU network cable, 9-61 information, A-12, A-13
installing cabling rack attachment, 7-52 label for subscriber cable
installing cabling trough, 7-32, 7-49 example, A-17
installing cover plate, 7-15 information, A-17
installing downward cabling tough, 7-36 label for trunk cable
installing foot-anchor plate, 7-20 example, A-15, A-16
installing pulling-plate, 7-63 information, A-14, A-15
installing top cover, 7-69 laser, 1-12
installing triangular bracket, 7-54 laser safety
installing turning cabling rack, 7-50 danger, 1-13
insulation test for handling fiber, 1-14
for floor bracket, 7-16, 8-9 general information, 1-12
for support, 7-12, 8-7 guideline, 1-13
inter-module cable,installing, 10-5 warning, 1-12
inter-module optical fiber layout of equipment room
bundling and cabling, 10-3 MDF room and transmission room, 3-4
connection, 10-1 power distribution room, 3-5
function, 10-1 storage battery room, 3-6
internal cable switch room and control room, 3-3
connecting in 32-channel subscriber frame, 9-60 leveling and fastening guide rail, 7-13, 8-7
internal cabling of BAM cabinet, 8-19
inter-row,fixing rack, 7-61 M
inverter,installing, 13-10 MDF,installing, 11-32
mounting expansion bolt, 7-11, 8-5
L mounting square nut, 7-13, 8-7
label
material, A-1 N
type and shape, A-1 NOD cable
label for AC power cable installing, 9-55
example, A-20 type, 9-55
information, A-19
label for alarm box cable O
example, A-10
open box inspection, 6-1
information, A-9
opening carton, 6-4
label for DC power cable
opening requirement, 6-1
example, A-18
opening wooden case, 6-2
information, A-18
optical fiber in AM/CM
i-4
connecting, 9-43 feed system, 3-20

installation specification, 9-46 requirement for protection system
intoduction, 9-42 anti-interference, 3-28
ESD, 3-26
P fire, 3-31
P550 series support, 7-4 lightning, 3-32
pasting label over-voltage, 3-30
to power cable, A-7 quakeproof, 3-31
to signal cable, A-6 RSA, 10-6
pasting rack label, 7-79 RSM, 10-5
power cable
connecting, 15-4 S
installing, 15-3 safety precaution, 1-1
laying, 15-11 safety promts, 1-2
printing label safety symbol
cell merging on template, A-3 for anti-staticr, 1-2
requirement for feeding printer, A-4 for attention, 1-2
requirement for printed label, A-4 for caution, 1-2
requirement for printer, A-4 for common warning, 1-2
template, A-3 for danger, 1-2
procedure,installing cabling rack, 7-47 for laser, 1-3
pulling-plate,installing, 7-63 for live-line, 1-3
for microwave, 1-3
R for scald, 1-3
rack label for warning, 1-2
function, 7-79 safety symbol explanation, 1-1
type, 7-79 secondary power alarm cable,installing, 9-40
rack label,pasting, 7-79 securing rack and guide rail, 7-23, 8-13
rack,connecting and securing, 7-27 sharp edge, 1-20
requirement for equipment building shockproof,installing, 7-60, 8-16
air conditioning and ventilation system, 3-23 side panel,installing, 7-70, 8-29
architecture, 3-6 SM cable
layout, 3-2 installing, 9-49
lighting system, 3-20 type and function, 9-48
power supply system, 3-11 SM clock cable,installing, 9-58
protection system, 3-26 SM HW cable
site selection, 3-1 installing, 9-49
water supply and drainage system, 3-23 type, 9-49
requirement for power supply system SM secondary power alarm cable
AC power, 3-12 installing, 9-58
current and power consumption, 3-15 specification for equipment grounding
DC power, 3-12 earth resistance value, 4-4
i-5
general principle, 4-1 quantity, 7-5, 8-3

general rule, 4-1 support and guide rail,installing, 7-3, 8-1
grounding of switch, 4-1 support height,adjusting, 7-11, 8-6
square nut,mounting, 7-13, 8-7
storage battery,installing, C-9 T
structure of assembled rack,connecting, 7-21 teminal of power distribution box, 15-3
subscriber cable terminal network system,installing, 13-4
bundling inside rack, 11-19 terminal system
connecting in 16-channel subscriber frame, for centralized maintenance, 13-2
11-10 strcture, 13-1
connecting in 32-channel subscriber frame, test subscriber cable,installing, 9-59
11-10 tool and instrument, 5-1
connecting with MDF, 11-29 top cover,installing, 7-69, 8-16
for 16-channel subscriber frame toxic hazardous article, 1-3
128-core, 11-5 triangular bracket,installing, 7-54
32-core, 11-1 trunk cable installation specification
64-core, 11-2 for cabling along trough, 12-16
for 32-channel subscriber frame for downward cabling, 12-18
128-core, 11-14 for upward cabling, 12-19
64-core, 11-11 turning cabling rack,installing, 7-50
installing, 11-1
subscriber cable installation specification U
for bundling, 11-21
user sequence number, 11-16
for cabling, 11-23
for downward cabling, 11-23 W
for upward cabling, 11-25
wooden case,opening, 6-2
support
workstation,installing, 13-3
firming, 7-11, 8-6
writing label, A-5
installing, 7-11, 8-5
locating, 7-7, 8-4
i.
i-6

Installation Manual-Volume 1 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Installation Manual-Volume 1 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Installation Manual-Volume 1 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chapter 1 Safety Precautions .........................................................................

C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Manual Version T2-010417-20050430-C-4.12

Product Version OVSV610R103

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.,

Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China

Postal Code: 518129

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

All Rights Reserved

No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any

, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET, , ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC,

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

It offers an overall introduction to the C&C08

It introduces almost all the boards available in the

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Chapter 1 Safety Precautions covers the safety precautions to be observed during

Chapter 3 Requirements for Equipment Building specifies the requirements for

Chapter 4 Specification for Equipment Grounding covers the specifications for

Chapter 5 Installation Preparation offers the preparation work before the

Chapter 7 Installation of Assembled Cabinet elaborates on the procedures for

Chapter 11 Setting of Subscriber Cables focuses on the methods of connecting

Chapter 13 Installation of Terminal System presents the procedures of installing

Chapter 15 Connection of Grounding Cable and Power Cable specifies how to

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Appendix B ESM Installation covers the installation of the Enhanced Switching

Appendix C Installing Container-Type Switch Room covers how to install the

The manual is intended for the following readers:

• Installation engineers & technicians

• Operation & maintenance personnel

The manual uses the following conventions:

Boldface Headings are in Boldface.

Caution, Warning, Danger: Means reader be extremely careful during the

Note, Comment, Tip, Knowhow, Thought: Means a complementary

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Chapter 1 Safety Precautions ...................................................................................................... 1-1

Chapter 2 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 2-1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

2.3 Caution............................................................................................................................... 2-5

Chapter 3 Requirements for Equipment Building...................................................................... 3-1

Chapter 4 Specification for Equipment Grounding ................................................................... 4-1

Chapter 5 Installation Preparation............................................................................................... 5-1

Chapter 6 Open Box Inspection (OBI) ......................................................................................... 6-1

Chapter 7 Installation of Assembled Cabinet............................................................................. 7-1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7.1.2 Busbar ..................................................................................................................... 7-1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

7.10 Numbering Cabinet and Frame ..................................................................................... 7-85

Chapter 8 Installing BAM Cabinet................................................................................................ 8-1

Chapter 9 Installing Cables and Optical Fibers in the Cabinet................................................. 9-1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

9.1.9 Installing Secondary Power Alarm Cables............................................................ 9-42

Chapter 11 Installing Subscriber Cables .................................................................................. 11-1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

11.6 Connecting Subscriber Cables with Terminal Block on MDF...................................... 11-29

Chapter 12 Installing Trunk Cables ........................................................................................... 12-1

Chapter 13 Installing Terminal System ..................................................................................... 13-1